33. BRP CALCULATIONS ...........................................
67
Contents
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION ...........................................................2
1. OUTLINE OF PLAY ...................................................2
COMPONENTS AND CONCEPTS .................................2
2. GAME TERMS ...........................................................2
3. GAME COMPONENTS ..............................................4
4. TERRAIN AND THE MAPBOARD ............................4
5. MAPBOARD CHANGES ............................................6
6. COUNTERS ...............................................................6
7. SCENARIOS................................................................7
8. TABLES .....................................................................9
9. SEQUENCE OF PLAY ................................................9
MECHANICS OF PLAY ...............................................10
10. STACKING ............................................................10
11. HEX CONTROL .....................................................11
12. ZONES OF CONTROL (ZoCs) ................................12
13. OPTION SELECTIONS ...........................................12
14. THE OFFENSIVE OPTION - MOVEMENT ............13
15. THE OFFENSIVE OPTION - COMBAT ..................15
16. THE ATTRITION OPTION ....................................21
17. LIMITED OFFENSIVES .........................................23
18. THE PASS OPTION ...............................................24
19. UNIT CONSTRUCTION ........................................24
20. STRATEGIC REDEPLOYMENT (SR) .....................25
UNIT COUNTERS .......................................................30
21. INFANTRY ............................................................30
22. REPLACEMENTS ..................................................30
23. ARMOR .................................................................30
24. AIRBORNE ............................................................31
25. PARTISANS ..........................................................32
26. AIR UNITS ............................................................34
27. NAVAL WARFARE ................................................44
28. BRIDGEHEADS .....................................................57
LOGISTICS ..................................................................58
29. SUPPLY .................................................................58
30. OIL .........................................................................65
31. WEATHER .............................................................66
ECONOMICS ...............................................................67
32. THE YEAR START SEQUENCE (YSS) ...................67
1 A3R rules rewrite v.3
34. INDUSTRIAL CENTERS (ICs) ...............................70
35. BRP SPENDING LIMITS .......................................71
36. BRP GRANTS ........................................................72
37. MURMANSK CONVOYS .......................................73
38. BRP GRANTS THROUGH PERSIA ........................76
39. BRP GRANTS THROUGH TURKEY ......................77
40. KEY ECONOMIC AREAS .......................................77
41. ECONOMIC WARFARE .........................................78
42. STRATEGIC WARFARE (SW) ...............................78
43. GERMAN BOMBING OF BRITAIN ........................83
44. RAIDERS................................................................83
POLITICS ....................................................................85
46. DECLARATIONS OF WAR (DoWs) .......................85
47. SURRENDER OF MAJOR POWERS .......................87
48. RESTRICTIONS ON FRENCH FORCES .................90
49. ANGLO-FRENCH COOPERATION ........................91
50. RUSSO-ALLIED COOPERATION ...........................92
51. GERMAN-ITALIAN COOPERATION ....................93
52. MINOR COUNTRIES .............................................93
53. MINOR COUNTRY OPERATIONS ........................93
54. CONQUEST OF MINOR COUNTRIES ...................95
55. INTERVENTION IN MINOR COUNTRIES ............98
56. MINOR ALLIES .....................................................99
57. GERMAN ECONOMIC PENETRATION OF MINOR
COUNTRIES ..............................................................103
58. POLAND AND EASTERN EUROPE .....................104
59. DIPLOMACY .......................................................107
MISCELLANEOUS RULES ........................................112
VARIANTS ................................................................119
71. VARIANTS ..........................................................119
OPTIONAL RULES ....................................................119
72. OPTIONAL RULES ..............................................119
MULTI-PLAYER GAMES ..........................................121
73. THE MULTI-PLAYER GAME ..............................121
74. RUSSIAN SURRENDER RULES ..........................122
75. BRITISH SURRENDER RULES ...........................124
76. U.S. - AXIS TENSIONS........................................128
INTRODUCTION
1. OUTLINE OF PLAY
1.1 ADVANCED THIRD REICH may be played by two
to six players. Each player controls one or more
major powers. The number of major powers
involved varies in each scenario.
1.11 In ADVANCED THIRD REICH, players may play a
two-sided game, in which the Axis and Allies are
treated as immutable coalitions, a three sided game,
in which the Axis, Western Allies and Russia each
have their own victory conditions, or a multi-player
game, in which each major power has distinct
victory conditions and players may negotiate
directly with both enemy and allied major powers.
1.12 In all ADVANCED THIRD REICH games, the
diplomatic rules (59, Appendices I - III) may be used
to simulate major power efforts to influence other
major powers and minor countries. Players who do
not wish to use the diplomatic rules should consult
the optional rules (72), which set out the dates at
which certain diplomatic results are implemented
when the full diplomatic rules are not used.
1.2 ADVANCED THIRD REICH is played in game
turns of three months each.
1.3 Each ADVANCED THIRD REICH game turn
consists of two player turns, during which players
declare war, move their forces, attack enemy
forces, construct unbuilt units and redeploy forces
behind friendly lines.
1.4 Many activities in ADVANCED THIRD REICH
involve the expenditure of economic resources.
These resources are measured in terms of Basic
Resource Points (BRPs). The acquisition of BRPs
through diplomacy and conquest and the
destruction of enemy BRPs are two of the key
elements of the game.
COMPONENTS AND CONCEPTS
2. GAME TERMS
2.1 In ADVANCED THIRD REICH, some terms have
exact meanings as defined in the rules. In addition,
conventions have developed concerning the use of
acronyms, both in conversation and in the rules
themselves. The following list sets out the
definitions and acronyms used in these rules:
2 A3R rules rewrite v.3
“A”: Attacker eliminated. An offensive operation
ground combat result (15.4).
“Allies”: The Allies consist of Britain, France,
Poland and whichever major powers and minor
countries go to war with the Axis. Russia and the
U.S. are not considered Allied until they are at war
with the Axis.
“associated minor countries”: A minor country
which is attacked by a major power becomes
associated with any major power which intervenes
on behalf of the minor country against the invading
major power (55). Association may also be triggered
by a diplomatic result.
“ASW”: Anti-submarine warfare. This term is used
to refer both to Allied SW units which operate
against German submarines and Allied fleets
assigned to anti-submarine duties.
“Axis”: The Axis consist of Germany, Italy (even
while neutral) and whichever minor countries join
them in their war with the Allies.
“BRP”: Basic Resource Point. BRPs are the
fundamental currency of the game, and are used to
measure the economic strength of each country.
“CA”, “CA1”, “CA2”, “CA3”: Counterattacks by
defending units. An offensive operation ground
combat result (15.4).
“colonies”: Minor countries which are controlled by
a major power at the start of the Campaign Game.
Colonies do not have independent military forces
except after a diplomatic result.
“combat phase”: The portion of a player turn in
which combat is resolved.
“covert operations”: , Starting in 1940, some major
powers may engage in covert ops to negate
activated enemy DPs (59.43).
“CRT”: Combat Results Table. The CRT is used to
resolve ground combat during offensive operations.
“D”: Defender eliminated. An offensive operation
ground combat result (15.4).
“DM”: Defense Multiplier. The defensive strength of
a ground unit during offensive operations is
calculated by multiplying its combat factor times
the net DM. DMs can be both positive and negative,
and are always cumulative (15.22).
“DP”: Diplomatic Point. DPs are used to represent
the diplomatic influence of the various major
powers (59.1).
“DRM”: Die (Dice) Roll Modifier(s). This term refers
to the modifications to a die or dice roll. The result
of the roll is determined by the result after all DRMs
are taken into account.
“DoW”: Declaration of War. A neutral country may
not be attacked without a DoW. DoWs against minor
countries cost 10 BRPs. DoWs against major powers
normally cost 35 BRPs (46), but this may change due
to some diplomatic results.
“Ex”: Exchange - both the attacker and defender
suffer losses. An offensive operation ground combat
result (15.4).
“force pool”: All units, built and unbuilt, available
to each major power. A major power may not
construct more units of a given type than are in its
force pool.
“fronts”: The mapboard is divided into three fronts
- the Western, Eastern and Mediterranean. At the
start of each player turn, the moving major powers
must select the option they wish to carry out on
each front.
“game turns”: Each year consists of four game
turns. These are identified by the seasons: Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter.
“IC”: Industrial Center(s). ICs represent areas of
Russian industrial production. The BRPs derived
from ICs make up a considerable portion of the
Russian BRP total. ICs may be moved, captured and
destroyed (34).
“initiative”: In each game turn, the order in which
the player turns occur is determined according to
which side has the greater number of BRPs (9.1).
“limited offensive”: Some units on a front on which
an attrition option has been selected may carry out
offensive operations. This is termed a limited
offensive (17).
3 A3R rules rewrite v.3
“major powers”: The six countries which have
independent BRP levels and force pools: Germany,
Italy, Russia, Britain, France and the U.S.
“minor allies”: A minor country may become allied
with a major power as a result of a diplomatic die
roll (56).
“minor countries”: All countries, including
colonies, other than the six major powers.
“movement phase”: The portion of a player turn in
which units are moved.
“objectives”: Cities printed in red. Objectives are
often used for victory determination. There are
fourteen objectives on each front.
“options”: Each player turn, each major power must
select an offensive, attrition or pass option for each
front (13).
“player turns”: Each game turn is divided into an
Axis and an Allied player turn.
“SAC”: Strategic Air Command. SAC factors are used
to represent Western Allied heavy bombers, and are
used in offensive SW operations against Germany.
“SR”, “SRed”: Strategic Redeployment(s),
Strategically Redeploy(ed). SR takes place at the
end of each player’s turn, and allows a limited
number of units to move long distances behind
friendly lines (20).
“SW”: Strategic Warfare. SW involves ASW,
submarines, SAC and interceptors. Successful SW
eliminates enemy BRPs and limits enemy SRs (42) at
the end of each game turn.
“unit construction phase”: The portion of a player
turn in which unbuilt units are brought into play
(19).
“USAT”: U.S. Axis Tension level (76).
“Western Allies”: All Allied major powers and minor
countries except for Russia and its minor allies and
associated minor countries.
“YSS”: Year Start Sequence. The YSS takes place at
the start of each year, before the first game turn of
the year. During the YSS, the BRP levels of all major
powers are determined and SW expenditures for
the upcoming year are made (32).
“ZOC”: Zone(s) of Control. A fully supplied armor
unit exerts a ZoC into adjacent hexes. ZoCs
influence enemy movement, unit construction and
supply (12.3).
3. GAME COMPONENTS
3.1 ADVANCED THIRD REICH consists of the
following components:
A. Two unmounted 22' x 30' mapsheets.
B. Four counter sheets.
C. 64-page rulebook.
D. 36-page appendices.
E. Six table and player aid cards.
F. Six scenario cards.
G. Two dice.
H. A complimentary copy of ULTRA.
4. TERRAIN AND THE MAPBOARD
4.1 The mapboard consists of a map of Europe,
North Africa and the Middle East. Superimposed
over the mapboard is a hexagonal grid, which is
used to determine movement.
4.11 FRONT BOUNDARIES: Solid red front
boundaries separate the mapboard into three
fronts: Eastern, Western and Mediterranean. Fronts
are significant with respect to a variety of
situations, such as option choices (13), weather (31)
and oil effects (30).
4.2 GRID COORDINATES: Each mapboard hex may be
identified by a specific grid coordinate reference.
Each row of hexes running east-west has been given
a specific letter designation, while a second
reference is composed of numbers running
diagonally northwest to southeast. Thus Lisbon is
V8, Marrakesh is EE2, Dublin H22, Rome Y22, Berlin
L31, Helsinki D41, Moscow H47 and Perma D61.
4.3 PLAYABLE HEXES: National borders (black
dashed lines) and geographical features have been
rationalized to conform to the hexagonal grid. Solid
gray hexes (Switzerland and the edges of the board)
are not playable and are impassable to all units,
including air and naval units. All other hexes are
playable.
4.31 QATTARA: Ground movement, combat, SR and
the tracing of supply lines is not allowed across all-
Qattara hexsides (NN25-NN26 and MM25- NN26).
This prohibition does not apply to air operations.
4 A3R rules rewrite v.3
4.4 LAND/SEA HEXES: Land terrain is defined as the
area inside the shoreline bordering all bodies of
water. Hexsides must contain land on both sides to
allow normal ground movement or combat across
them. Similarly, sea hexsides are defined as any
hexside containing blue on both sides of the
hexside, provided the blue is not solely attributable
to a river. Naval movement is allowed only across
sea hexsides (EXCEPTION: The Suez canal (67.1)).
Where the red front boundary follows a coastline it
is treated as sea for the purposes of this rule. Lakes
which do not completely cover a hexside have no
effect on play and are included on the mapboard for
aesthetic purposes only.
4.41 Hexsides which are partially sea and partially
land are considered both land and sea for all
purposes.
4.42 Any completely gray land mass is impassable to
ground units. Such areas are included on the
mapboard for aesthetic purposes only. Thus areas
such as the islands east of Athens (DD28 and CC28)
do not exist for game purposes. Similarly, the
extended northernmost peninsula on the Caspian
Sea in W52 does not exist for game purposes. Any
ground unit in W52 would be considered to be on
the southernmost peninsula. F33 is not considered a
one hex island (4.72), even though the G32 portion
of the island is unplayable.
4.43 LAND MOVEMENT: Terrain never slows ground
units. Ocean and lake hexsides may not be crossed
by ground units without naval assistance except at
a crossing arrow (4.46).
4.44 ALL-WATER HEXES: Units are not “adjacent”
for the purposes of pass option movement,
exploitation (15.62) or SR when they are separated
by all water hexsides, including those containing
crossing arrows (EXCEPTION: Units are adjacent
across river hexsides).
4.45 The ZoC of armor units (12) does not extend
across all-water hexsides, including those
containing crossing arrows. ZoCs do extend across
rivers.
4.46 CROSSING ARROWS: Red crossing arrows
permit ground units to move or engage in offensive
or attrition combat across all-water hexsides in
either direction. Crossing arrows occur only in
Denmark (3), Scotland (1), the Turkish Straits (2),
the strait of Kerch (1) and the strait of Messina (1).
4.5 CITIES:
4.51 The term “city” includes capitals, objectives
and ports.
4.52 Capitals (any city designated by a star,
including those in colonies) and objectives (any city
printed in red) may not be selected for attrition
occupation (16.5). Infantry and replacement units
defending against exploiting armor in such cities
are not subject to an adverse DM (15.24). See 29.2
for details of capitals as supply sources.
CLARIFICATION: Vichy and Kiev are considered to be
capitals only so long as Vichy France and Ukraine have
an independent political existence. Otherwise they are
normal cities.
4.53 Ports (any city designated by an open, non-
solid black or red circle) may base naval units
(27.1). Capital-ports (Algiers, Athens, Helsinki,
Lisbon, Oslo, Stockholm, Tripoli) function as both a
port and a capital. Brindisi is on the east coast of
AA25; naval units may traverse it only via the
easternmost of the two water areas within the hex.
Similarly, Rosyth (F26) is on the east coast of
Scotland, Plymouth (K21) is on the southern coast
of its peninsula, Lorient (N19) is on the southwest
coast of its peninsula and Famagusta (GG34) is on
the southeast coast of Cyprus.
4.54 Other cities, designated only by black dots,
have no military significance except for their ability
to base air units (26.11). Such cities have no effect
on combat.
4.6 FORTRESSES:
4.61 Malta and Gibraltar are always fortress hexes.
All other fortress hexes permanently lose their
fortress status as soon as they are occupied by an
enemy unit.
4.62 Maginot hexes lose their status upon the fall of
France, and are not treated as fortress hexes in the
1941, 1942 and 1944 scenarios.
4.63 The German West Wall (Q25, Stuttgart,
Frankfurt, Bonn and Essen) is shown with gray
fortress symbols on the board. West Wall hexes do
not become actual fortress hexes until the start of
5 A3R rules rewrite v.3
1944, and then only if they are under Axis control.
Allied occupation of a West Wall hex prior to 1944
does not prevent the hex from becoming a fortress,
provided the Axis recapture the hex prior to the
start of 1944.
4.64 Units defending in Malta, Gibraltar, and, while
fortress hexes (4.61), Leningrad, Sevastopol,
Berchtesgaden (Axis variant 25) and Moscow and
Stalingrad (Allied variant 13) receive a +2 DM when
attacked from any direction (15.23E). Units
defending in Maginot and West Wall hexes receive a
+2 DM only if attacked from hexes faced by their
fortifications or by airborne units airdropped on
them. If attacked from any other direction, the
fortifications in such hexes are disregarded.
4.65 Fortress hexes act as supply sources only
where specified (29.2).
4.66 Fortress hexes may not be selected for attrition
occupation. This prohibition does not extend to
hexes which have lost (4.61) or not yet obtained
(4.63) their fortress status, or to Maginot or West
Wall hexes which are attacked from a hex which is
not faced by their fortifications.
4.67 The ZoCs of armor units (12) do not extend into
fortress hexes, nor into Maginot and West Wall
hexes across the sides marked with fortifications.
ZoCs do extend out of fortress hexes. (EXCEPTION:
Where armor units in the Maginot Line are facing
West Wall fortifications, or vice versa. This may
only occur if France survives until 1944).
4.68 Leningrad is a fortress under Russian control at
the start of all scenarios.
4.681 Sevastopol is a fortress under Russian control
at the start of the Campaign Game and the 1939,
1941, 1942 and Barbarossa scenarios. Sevastopol is
not a fortress in the 1944 scenario, because it has
been occupied by the Axis, then recaptured by the
Russians, before the start of the scenario (4.61).
4.7 ISLANDS: Islands which have beach hexes may
be invaded only at those beach hexes.
4.71 Islands shown in gray are included on the
board for aesthetic purposes only. Such islands are
not playable.
4.72 One hex islands, including Scapa Flow, I32 (the
Danish island containing Copenhagen) and I31
(27.431), but not the island at the northern tip of
Denmark, may be invaded, provided they do not
contain an enemy 9-factor fleet at the moment the
invasion is resolved (27.432).
4.73 Supply may be traced to one hex islands even if
they do not contain a port or bridgehead (29.331).
Units may also be SRed in and out of such islands
(27.67).
4.8 TERRAIN EFFECTS ON GROUND COMBAT: The
Terrain Effects Chart summarizes the effects of
terrain features on ground combat.
4.81 The defensive strength of a ground unit equals
its printed combat strength times its net DM
(15.22).
4.82 All defending ground units receive a +2 DM
regardless of terrain (15.23A).
4.83 Ground units defending against a seaborne
invasion receive a +1 DM (15.23B). Beach hexes do
not otherwise benefit the defender.
4.84 Defending ground units receive a +1 DM when
behind a river or a hexside crossing arrow. This DM
may be negated (15.23C).
4.85 Defending ground units receive a +1 DM when
in a mountain or swamp hex (15.23D).
4.86 Defensive benefits are cumulative: a unit
defending on a mountain behind a river is
quadrupled (a DM of +4); a unit defending in a
fortress (4.64) against seaborne invasion is
quintupled (a DM of +5).
4.9 MAPBOARD BOXES:
4.91 U.S. BOX: The U.S. box represents North
America, including Canada. British units may not be
constructed in Canada except for British fleet
factors (27.82), or after a British surrender (75).
Newly constructed American units are placed in the
U.S. box, as are British fleet factors rebuilt in
Canada. Naval units may intercept from the U.S.
box and may be moved into the SW box, but
otherwise may only leave the U.S. box by initially
deploying to Europe during the SR phase
(EXCEPTION: 20.73). Units in the U.S. box may not
be taken as attrition losses (16.41).
6 A3R rules rewrite v.3
4.92 STRATEGIC WARFARE (SW) BOX: The SW box
represents the Atlantic shipping lanes and the air
war over Germany. ASW, interceptors, SAC and
submarines in the SW box are inverted to conceal
their true number. German air factors and Allied 9-
factor fleets assigned to SW are openly placed in the
SW box. SW units are deployed to various SW tasks
during the SW deployment phase of each turn
(42.41). German raiders may attempt to enter the
SW box prior to SW resolution in order to disrupt
Allied convoys (44.21).
4.93 MURMANSK BOX: The Murmansk box
represents the northern ports in Norway and the
Murmansk convoy route. German air and naval
units in Bergen may either move or SR into the
Murmansk box, both to oppose Allied convoys to
Russia and to facilitate raider movement to the SW
box. Allied fleets may enter the Murmansk box
during the SR phase to protect convoys to Russia.
German submarine and Allied ASW factors may be
deployed to the Murmansk box during a SW
deployment phase (42.44).
4.94 SOUTH AFRICA BOX: Allied units which SR
between the Western front and Suez, Basra, Bushire
or India (20.511, 20.512) incur a one turn delay and
are placed in the South Africa box while in transit.
Similarly, during the first turn of Allied BRP grants
to Russia through Persia (38.4) a counter is placed
in the South Africa box to indicate the transit of
BRPs.
4.95 INDIA BOX: Allied units which have SRed to
India (20.512) are placed in the India box.
4.96 SIBERIA BOX: Russian units in transit to or
from Siberia (20.514) are placed in the western
portion of the Siberia box (the Urals). Units actually
in Siberia are placed in the eastern portion of the
Siberia box.
5. MAPBOARD CHANGES
[Deleted section comparing A3R maps to 3R maps]
5.1 (OPTIONAL) The Finnish border hexes are
considered mountain terrain. (This change prevents
Russia from easily crushing the entire Finnish army
during a border war, and requires them to work
hard at getting those hexes. It is a completely
optional suggestion based on personal experience
and may be ignored if desired.)
6. COUNTERS
6.1 Ground unit counters show a combat factor as
the first (left) number on the counter, followed by a
movement factor (EXCEPTION: Replacement
counters, which may not move, show only a combat
factor).
6.2 Air unit counters also show a combat factor and
a movement factor. Fleet unit counters show only a
combat factor; their range is unlimited within their
front. Each country is provided with partial fleet
counters (27.7). British submarines may only base
in Malta (64.4).
6.3 SW counters (submarines, ASW, SAC and
interceptors) show only a number representing the
strength of the unit.
6.4 BRP counters are used on the BRP track on each
major power’s scenario card. Year and season
counters are used on the Time Track on the
mapboard. A marker has been provided to help
keep track of the U.S. - Axis Tension level (USAT,
76). IC counters are used to represent
concentrations of industry in Russia (34). Each
major power has a limited number of airbase (26.12)
and bridgehead (28) counters.
6.5 Numbered counters are used to select variants
(71). Rocket bases may be built by Germany only if
it selects Axis variant 24. Commandos may be used
by the British only if Allied variant 16 is played.
7. SCENARIOS
7.1 When beginning a game of ADVANCED THIRD
REICH, players must choose the scenario they wish
to play. Players may select from the Campaign
Game, 1939, 1940, 1941, 1942, 1944 and Barbarossa
scenarios. The details of each scenario are found in
Appendices VI - XII. In each case, the historical
situation at the starting date of the scenario is set
out, along with other information and rules
applicable to the scenario.
7.2 The information contained in each scenario
consists of the following:
7.21 DURATION: This defines the length of the
scenario. Players playing the 1941 or 1942 scenarios
may, if they agree beforehand, continue past the
end of the scenario and play to the end of the
7 A3R rules rewrite v.3
Campaign Game scenario (Winter 1945), using the
Campaign Game victory conditions.
7.22 SITUATION: This indicates which nations are at
war and which diplomatic results are in effect at
the start of the scenario. No BRPs are expended to
attain these states of war.
7.23 ORDER OF DEPLOYMENT: Prior to play, each
nation involved in the scenario sets up its forces in
the indicated order.
7.24 ORDER OF MOVEMENT: Once play begins, the
indicated order of movement is followed.
7.25 VICTORY CONDITIONS: In each scenario, the
victory conditions for both two-player and multi-
player games are indicated.
7.251 The winner of the scenario is determined only
at the end of the scenario, unless one side concedes.
If both sides fulfill their victory conditions, the
winner is determined by comparing the level of
victory conditions achieved. Similarly, in a multi-
player game, more than one major power may
achieve its victory conditions.
EXAMPLE: In a two-player Campaign Game, the Axis
control 28 objective hexes at the end of the Winter 1943
game turn, giving the Axis a marginal victory. The Allies
then conquer the Axis by Winter 1944, giving them a
tactical victory. The Allies would win the game. Had the
Allies conquered the Axis in Spring 1945, the Allies would
also achieve a marginal victory and the game would be
drawn.
EXAMPLE: In a multi-player Campaign Game, France
survives until Summer 1941, achieving a tactical victory.
If Italy held seven objective hexes at the end of the game,
it would achieve a decisive victory and would win the
game.
7.252 Britain and Russia are considered to be
conquered for the purpose of the Axis two-player
Campaign Game victory conditions only if their
surrenders are in effect at the end of the game
(Winter 1945).
7.253 To fulfill their victory conditions in a two-
player Campaign Game, the Allies must only
conquer Germany. Major powers are conquered as
described in 47. Italy surrenders when Germany is
conquered (47.411).
7.254 When victory is determined by the possession
of objective hexes, objectives in neutral minor
countries are not credited to either side unless one
side or the other has gained control over them as a
consequence of a diplomatic result. If Italy or Russia
remains neutral, objective hexes under its control
are credited to the Axis/Allied totals in a two-
player game and to the Italian/Russian totals in a
multi-player game. If British (75) and/or Russian
surrenders (74) are in effect at the end of the game,
all objective hexes under British or Russian control
at the end of the game are counted in the Allied
total.
7.255 Where one player controls two or more major
powers in a game governed by multi-player victory
conditions, that player must abide by the victory
conditions of the nation under his control which
controls the most objective hexes at the start of the
scenario. Although the player controls the forces of
one or more other major powers, those major
powers are not considered for victory
determination purposes except to the extent that
they influence the victory conditions achieved by
other, determinant major powers.
7.256 In a multi-player game, a player may
withdraw from the game at any time by assigning
play of his major power(s) to another player
participating in his alliance. When a player acquires
a second or third major power, that player must
abide by the victory conditions of the nation under
his control which controls the most objective hexes
at the time he takes control of the additional major
powers. The acquiring player may choose a major
power for victory determination purposes only if
the additional major powers have the same number
of objective hexes as his original major power when
he acquires control over them.
7.257 As players withdraw, the game may ultimately
become a two-player game in which normal two-
player victory conditions apply.
7.258 If a scenario is played where there are
separate British and American players, they play as
partners, winning or losing jointly.
7.26 BRP LEVEL AND GROWTH RATE: The starting
BRP level for each major power is indicated. The
source of these BRPs, including each major power’s
BRP base, is set out in parentheses. The growth rate
(33.2), which determines the rate of BRP increase
8 A3R rules rewrite v.3
each year, is listed below each major power’s BRP
level.
7.27 SR LEVEL: The basic SR capacity for each major
power (20.1) and any possible reductions are listed.
7.28 DP ALLOCATION: The basic number of DPs for
each major power (59.1) is listed, together with
additional DPs which may be available at the start
of the scenario.
7.29 FORCE POOL: “At Start” forces are placed on
the mapboard during the initial setup of the
scenario. Other forces become available as
“allowable builds” as indicated. The total number of
units of each type available to each major power is
indicated in brackets (“[]”). The number which
precedes the brackets indicates units added to or, in
the Barbarossa scenario, subtracted from, each
major power’s force pool at a given time.
7.291 Available builds may be constructed during a
player’s unit construction phase. Units eliminated
during the game are returned to the owning major
power’s force pool as allowable builds.
(EXCEPTIONS: airborne units during the game turn
they are eliminated (24.4), minor country armor
and air units (53.5), minor country naval units
(27.85), and “free Russian” units given by Axis
variant 18).
EXAMPLE: Germany begins the Campaign Game with
eight 3-3 infantry units, four 4-6 armor units, four 5-4 air
units and two 9- factor fleets. During the Fall 1939 unit
construction phase, twenty 3- 3 infantry units, eight 4-6
armor units, two 5-4 air units and one 9- factor fleet are
added to the German force pool. These may be
constructed during the Fall 1939 unit construction phase.
Germany’s third 9-factor fleet and its two 5-6 armor
units may not be constructed until they are added to
Germany’s force pool later.
7.292 AIRBASE COUNTERS: The number of airbase
counters (26.12) available to each major power is
indicated.
7.3 DEPLOYMENT LIMITS: A major power may be
required to place specific minimum forces in a
given location or area. Additional forces may be
placed in such areas, subject to stacking limits.
Deployment limits apply only to the opening setups
of scenarios. Forces may move freely once the
scenario begins.
EXAMPLE: Britain must begin the Campaign Game with
at least one air factor and one 1-3 infantry unit in Malta.
Additional ground or air units may be placed in Malta,
but a 3-4 infantry unit could not substitute for the 1-3
infantry unit. Similarly, a 4-5 armor unit could not
substitute for the 2-5 armor unit which must be placed in
Egypt.
7.31 CONTROL: The indicated areas are controlled
by the major power at the start of the scenario.
Units may only be placed during opening setup in
controlled areas. In the Campaign Game, a player
may not set up units in areas controlled by another
major power, even if that major power is an ally.
Thus Britain could not begin the Campaign Game
with units in France, although it could, with French
permission, move units into France during the
Allied Fall 1939 player turn. Similarly, Germany
could not begin the Campaign Game with units in
Rumania.
7.32 SURPLUS SW: The 1941, 1942 and 1944
scenarios begin with one side or the other having
some SW factors already in play. This amount may
be increased by SW construction during the YSS at
the start of those scenarios. SW construction has
already occurred in the 1940 scenario.
7.4 SCENARIO CARDS: Each scenario card contains a
summary of the information set out in the
Appendices for each major power. In addition, each
scenario card has a BRP track which players may
use to record BRP levels by moving each major
power’s three BRP counters along the 100’s, 10’s,
and 1’s line. Players may wish to keep a written
record of BRPs, as such a record is immune from
table jostling and is useful in providing reliable
answers to questions such as “Did you subtract 15
BRPs for that offensive option?”
7.5 BEGINNING A GAME: Each player places his at
start forces on the mapboard, following the order of
deployment, and places his allowable builds on the
force pool section of his scenario card. Each major
power’s BRP counters are placed on its BRP track,
and each major power’s airbase, bridgehead and
substitute air and naval counters are kept available.
7.51 Once all at start forces have been set up, SW
construction takes place in the 1941, 1942 and 1944
scenarios. In the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios this step is omitted. Players then allocate
their DPs (59.2).
9 A3R rules rewrite v.3
7.52 Once DPs have been allocated, play begins as
indicated by the order of movement for the
scenario.
8. TABLES
8.1 The following tables are set out on separate
sheets to facilitate reference during play:
A. Combat Results Table.
B. Attrition Table.
C. Air Defense Table.
D. Air Attack Table.
E. Air Force Nationality DRM Chart.
F. Naval Interception Table.
G. Fleet Combat Table.
H. Naval Nationality DRM Chart.
I. Fleet Staying Power Table.
J. Naval Reconstruction Table.
K. Winter Table.
L. SW Ratio Table.
M. SW Effects Table.
N. British Resistance Table.
O. Russian Resistance Table.
P. Year Start Sequence of Play.
Q. BRP Costs Chart.
R. Minor Country Forces Chart.
S. US Tensions.
9. SEQUENCE OF PLAY
9.1 BRP LEVEL DETERMINATION AND ORDER OF
PLAY:
9.11 At the beginning of each game turn, the Axis
and Allies each total their remaining BRPs to
determine which side holds the initiative. The side
with the higher total has the initiative and moves
first in the coming game turn. If the BRP totals are
equal, the order of play from the previous turn
prevails. For the purpose of determining the
initiative, a major power which has incurred a BRP
deficit is considered to have a BRP total of zero.
9.111 The Axis move first in the first turn of the
Campaign Game and the 1939, 1940, 1941 and 1942
scenarios.
9.12 The side which went last in a game turn may
find that it will move first in the next game turn,
thus obtaining a “double move”. The opportunities
offered by such a development are exceptional, and
may warrant the limiting of BRP expenditures in
order to keep a higher BRP level than the opponent.
On the other hand, there are hazards connected
with a double move, because the other side may
later regain the initiative and thereby obtain a
double move itself. The side with the initiative may
never obtain a double move.
9.13 Italian BRPs are always included in the Axis
total, whether or not Italy has entered the war, and
Germany and Italy conduct their turns at the same
time. Russian and American BRPs are not included
in the Allied total until they are at war with
Germany. However, Russia and the Western Allies
conduct their turns at the same time throughout
the game, whether or not Russia is at war with
Germany, and even if a neutral Russia has a larger
BRP total than the Axis and the Axis have the
initiative.
9.14 American BRPs are included in the Allied total
only after the turn in which the U.S. enters the war,
because a DoW by or against the U.S. would take
place after the initiative has been determined for
that turn.
9.15 The BRPs for newly activated minor allies
(56.3F) and minor countries subject to German
economic penetration (57.1) are added to the
appropriate major power’s BRP level at the start of
the player turn following the diplomatic die roll
which triggered the activation of the minor ally or
the economic penetration. The BRPs for minor
allies which switch sides (56.92) are added
immediately after the diplomatic phase. The
addition of these BRPs does not affect the
determination of the initiative for that game turn.
9.16 BRPs in the South Africa box are included in
the Allied total (38.42).
9.2 SEQUENCE OF PLAY:
9.21 A detailed Sequence of Play is included with
this rule set. The highlights of each player turn are
summarized below.
9.22 DECLARATIONS OF WAR (DoWs): Each major
power announces any DoWs it is making at the start
of its player turn and immediately pays the BRP
cost associated with each DoW. The forces of minor
countries which have been subject to a DoW are
then set up by an opponent of the major power
which made the DoW (53.1).
10
9.23 OPTION DECLARATIONS: Each major power
then announces its option for each front. Each
major power immediately pays 15 BRPs for each
offensive option it selects.
9.231 SW DEPLOYMENT: Germany may select
limited or unlimited submarine warfare (42.411).
SW forces available for this turn are then deployed
(42.41).
9.24 MOVEMENT: Once options have been declared,
units are moved. Supply is determined during the
movement phase (29.42).
9.25 COMBAT: Combat takes place after all
movement is completed. Limited offensive
operations and regular offensive combat are
resolved before attrition combat. Exploitation
movement and combat takes place after the
resolution of attrition combat. Supply status is
determined again after combat (29.43).
9.26 UNIT CONSTRUCTION: After post-combat
adjustments, including the removal of unsupplied
units, unbuilt units may be constructed (19).
9.27 STRATEGIC REDEPLOYMENT (SR): During the
SR phase, units may be SRed (20) and BRPs granted
(36).
9.3 MINOR COUNTRY TURNS: Minor countries
which have been attacked, but not conquered,
conduct their turn immediately following the
player turn of the major power which attacked
them, even if the invader has obtained a double
move and will thus move first in the coming game
turn. A minor country player turn consists of
movement, combat and unit construction only.
Minor country units may only be SRed if the minor
country is allied to a major power. Minor countries
do not take independent turns once a major power
has intervened to assist them (55).
9.4 SECOND PLAYER TURN: The opposing coalition
then moves, repeating the steps outlined above.
9.5 SW RESOLUTION AND ALLOCATION: Once both
sides have completed their player turns, German
raiders may be sent into the Atlantic (44). SW is
then resolved (42.5).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
MECHANICS OF PLAY
10. STACKING
10.1 The basic stacking limit is two ground units per
hex, regardless of their combat strength. There are
several exceptions to this general rule:
10.11 Three ground units may stack in London, but
only if all three are British.
10.12 Airborne units do not count against the
stacking limit and may be added to any legal stack.
This exception applies even if an airborne unit
moves like a normal infantry unit, without
dropping. It does not apply to an airborne unit
employed in a seaborne invasion (24.5).
10.13 Up to five ground units may stack on a
bridgehead counter (28.5). There is no increase in
the stacking capacity of a bridgehead in London
(10.11).
10.14 Armor units may overstack on a breakthrough
hex (15.7). Such overstacking must be remedied by
the end of the attacker’s SR phase, or excess units
of his choice are eliminated.
10.15 A defender may temporarily overstack if
forced to do so when retreating during an enemy
attrition option (16.54). The defender must remedy
the overstacking during his next movement phase.
If he is unable to do so, excess units of his choice
are eliminated (16.56).
10.2 Stacking limits do not apply to ground units
while moving, nor while they are embarked on
fleets. A ground unit may not end its combat phase
or its turn embarked on a fleet.
10.3 Stacking of air and naval units is unlimited
while in the air or at sea. There are limits to the
number of air and naval factors which may base at
air bases (26.1) and ports (27.1).
10.4 There are some restrictions on units of allied
nations stacking together in the same hex (49.4,
50.1, 51.1). Stacking which is not expressly
prohibited is allowed.
11. HEX CONTROL
11.1 The areas controlled by each major power at
the start of each scenario are set out in the
Appendix relating to that scenario.
11
11.2 Once play begins, the control of land hexes is
determined as follows:
11.21 Control of enemy and neutral hexes is gained
by occupying or moving through such hexes. Each
land hex is controlled by the last nation to have
ground units in it or to pass ground units through it
(EXCEPTIONS: 11.22, 11.23 and 11.5).
11.22 The initial conquest of a minor country gives
the conqueror control of all hexes in the conquered
country (see 54.2 for details and exceptions).
11.221 If two or more major powers cooperate in
the conquest of a country or colony (54.7), the
conquerors must decide, at the moment of
conquest, which of them controls which hexes in
the conquest. The conquerors may assign the
control of hexes in any manner they choose.
(EXCEPTION: The capital of a conquest is always
controlled by the conquering major power which
first occupies it (15.5, 54.8).) If, in a multi-player
game, conquerors are unable to agree on hex
control after a cooperative conquest, hexes are
controlled by whichever power has units closest to
them. Ties are resolved by a die roll.
11.23 Hex control of a conquered major power is
determined according to the rules which apply to
the specific major power in question (47).
11.24 Hex control may not be transferred from a
major power to an ally. The movement of friendly
ground units through hexes controlled by a major
power ally does not change the control of those
hexes. A major power may move or SR into (20.2)
and place airbases (26.122) in hexes controlled by
its allies, but only with their consent (73.4). A major
power may trace supply through such hexes any
time (29.322).
11.25 If the U.S. is at war with the Axis, all British-
controlled hexes are jointly controlled by Britain
and the U.S.
11.3 When an “Ex” result occurs in combat and the
attacker loses his entire ground force, or for any
other reason fails to occupy an attacked hex with at
least one ground unit (15.5), the attacked hex
remains in control of the defender. A hex thus does
not necessarily pass to the control of the attacker
when its defenders are eliminated. An attacker
must advance a ground unit into the hex in order to
gain control of it (EXCEPTION: Hexes defended by
A3R rules rewrite v.3
partisans (25.5)). Similarly, if an airborne unit drops
on enemy defenders and both forces are eliminated,
the defender retains control of the hex.
11.4 Placing an enemy-controlled hex in the ZoC of
a friendly armor unit does not change the status of
the hex.
11.5 Isolated hexes controlled by the non-moving
player which are neither occupied by nor adjacent
to any of the non-moving player’s units at the start
of the moving player’s turn pass to the moving
player’s control at the end of his post-combat
supply determination phase, provided they are
adjacent to a supplied hex controlled by the moving
player. Such hexes also immediately receive supply
if a land supply line can be traced to them, although
supply may not be traced through such newly-
acquired hexes until the following turn. Thus, hexes
acquired in this manner may not be used by the
moving player’s air or naval units during
movement and combat, but come under the control
of the moving player and receive supply prior to his
SR phase.
EXAMPLE: In Summer 1941, German armor units
encircle a large pocket of Russian infantry units. The
Russian player is unable to break the encirclement, and
the Russian infantry units are eliminated at the end of
the Russian Summer 1941 post-combat supply
determination phase. During the Fall 1941 German
movement phase, no German airbases may be built in
these hexes, as they are still controlled by Russia. The
German player doesn’t bother to move units through the
pocket. At the end of the German Fall 1941 post-combat
supply determination phase, all of the encircled hexes
adjacent to supplied German hexes come under German
control, and the German player may SR units into or
through these hexes. Were the pocket several hexes deep,
the innermost hexes would not come under German
control for another turn or two.
12. ZONES OF CONTROL (ZoCs)
12.1 Armor units exert a ZoC into the six hexes
adjacent to the hex they occupy, subject to the
qualifications set out in 12.12.
12.11 ZoCs extend across rivers, the Suez Canal and
friendly fortress hexsides into adjacent hexes.
12.12 ZoCs do not extend across all-water hexsides,
hexsides containing crossing arrows, or into neutral
countries or enemy fortresses.
12
12.2 ZoCs adversely affect enemy movement (14.63),
unit construction (19.3), airdrops (24.1) and supply
lines (29.32).
12.3 An armor unit which has its mechanized
component temporarily negated acts as an infantry
unit and has no ZOC until its mechanized
component is restored (23.2).
13. OPTION SELECTIONS
13.1 OFFENSIVE OPTIONS: A major power must pay
15 BRPs for each offensive option it selects. A major
power could thus spend as many as 45 BRPs on
offensive options in a single turn if it selected an
offensive option for all three fronts.
13.11 A major power selecting an offensive option
for a front must either make at least one ground
combat attack or conduct at least one offensive air
or naval mission against enemy forces on that
front. This requirement is met even if enemy forces
intercept and prevent the mission from being
completed.
CLARIFICATION: This list of activities is not exhaustive.
Any activity that allows a major power do something on
a front which it would otherwise not be able to do
without selecting an offensive option (such as a
paradrop) satisfies the requirement.
13.2 ATTRITION OPTIONS: Attrition options require
no BRP expenditure. A major power may select an
attrition option even if none of its forces will
engage in attrition combat on that front, or even if
none of his units will be in contact with adjacent
enemy ground units at the end of the movement
phase. A player may select an attrition option
rather than a pass option in order to enter
uncontrolled hexes during his movement phase.
13.3 LIMITED OFFENSIVES: Limited offensive
operations may only be carried out on a front
where an attrition option has been selected.
Limited offensive operations require BRP
expenditures according to the forces used. No more
than 14 BRPs may be expended for limited offensive
operations on a single front.
13.4 PASS OPTIONS: No BRPs are required to
conduct a pass option.
13.41 A pass option must be selected on a front in
the following situations:
A3R rules rewrite v.3
A. An allied major power wishes to conduct an
offensive option on a front and other major powers
are unwilling or unable to do so themselves. If one
allied major power selects an offensive option on a
front, others must do so as well or select a pass
option.
B. If a major power finds itself unable to comply
with the requirements of an already announced
offensive option (13.11), it must pass instead and
forfeit the 15 BRPs it paid for the offensive option.
C. After the play of Allied variant 19 (Hitler
assassinated) or Allied variant 23 (Italian general
strike).
13.5 If one major power selects an offensive option
on a given front, its major power allies must join in
the offensive option or pass. A major power may
not select an attrition option on a front where
another major power has selected an offensive
option. In multi-player games, if allies cannot agree
on the option to be used on a front, the player
wishing to select an offensive option prevails. His
allies must then also select an offensive option or
pass on that front (EXCEPTION: Once it is at war
with the Axis, Russia always determines the option
to be used on the Eastern front). This restriction
does not apply until an alliance is activated.
EXAMPLE: If Italy is not at war with the Allies it could
select an attrition option on a front where Germany has
selected an offensive option.
13.51 When two or more major power allies join in
conducting an offensive option, each major power
must pay 15 BRPs.
13.6 If two major powers are conducting attrition
options on a front, and both wish to conduct limited
offensive operations as well, no more than 14 BRPs
may be expended in total. In a multi-player game, if
two major powers cannot agree on how to limit the
forces involved in limited offensive operations to
comply with this restriction, neither major power
may spend more than seven BRPs. If three major
powers cannot agree, none may spend more than
four BRPs.
13.7 OPERATIONS ACROSS FRONT BOUNDARIES:
13.71 The hex which receives the action determines
the option required.
EXAMPLE: British naval units in the Mediterranean
could invade southern France or land a sea transport
13
mission at Marseilles, even if Britain selected a pass
option in the Mediterranean, provided that the British
option for the Western front allows for such missions.
Similarly, air units based in northern Italy could attack
targets in southern France. If a pass option were selected
in the Mediterranean, the sea transport mission
described above could not land ground units in Genoa,
even if they then moved by land and attacked a Western
front hex. The restrictions on invasions in winter
(27.4322) apply only to the front through which the
naval units move, so the invasion described above would
be permitted even in winter.
EXAMPLE: Italian ground units in Turin and U21 could
attack adjacent units in France during an Italian
Western front offensive option, even if Italy selected an
attrition or a pass option in the Mediterranean.
Similarly, the Italian units could be counted as part of a
Western front attrition, even if Italy selected an offensive
or pass option in the Mediterranean. In both cases, the
restrictions on movement during a pass option would not
prevent the Italian units from moving to the border.
13.72 A unit may only participate in an action on
two fronts by conducting a single attack against
units in several hexes on different fronts (15.33) or
by exploiting from a combat on one front into
another attack on another front. A unit at a front
boundary may not make separate attacks against
defending units on both fronts, be counted in the
attrition total for both fronts or attrition on one
front and make an offensive attack on the other.
13.73 Exploiting armor units from one front may
engage in offensive combat on another front only if
an offensive option is in effect on both fronts.
Exploiting armor units may enter a front for which
an attrition option is in effect, but may not engage
in attrition or limited offensive combat on that
front (15.658).
14. THE OFFENSIVE OPTION - MOVEMENT
14.1 During an offensive option, a player may move
all, some or none of his units. A player first moves
his air units, then his naval units, then his ground
units.
14.11 VOLUNTARY ELIMINATION OF UNITS:
Immediately before beginning his movement phase,
a player may voluntarily eliminate any of his own
units and return them to his force pool
(EXCEPTION: French units (48.3)). Forces of inactive
minor allies, including Vichy France, may not be
A3R rules rewrite v.3
voluntarily eliminated prior to activation. ICs may
also be destroyed at this time (34.43). Units which
are voluntarily eliminated may not be
reconstructed during the game turn in which they
were eliminated.
14.12 Airbase counters may not be voluntarily
eliminated, but one airbase may be “recycled” each
turn (26.123).
14.2 Terrain does not affect movement except for
certain impassable hexsides (4.31, 4.43). Otherwise,
all movement costs one movement factor per hex
traversed. Movement factors may not be
transferred from one unit to another, nor may they
be accumulated from one turn to the next.
14.3 AIR UNITS: Air units may stage (change base)
during the movement phase (26.2). German air
units may move in or out of the Murmansk box
(37.4). Counterair missions (26.43) may be
conducted after the staging of air units and before
the movement of naval units and supply
determination.
14.4 NAVAL UNITS: Naval units may change base
during the movement phase. Such base changes
may be intercepted by enemy air and naval units
(27.21). German fleets may move in or out of the
Murmansk box (37.4).
14.5 SUPPLY: Supply is determined after air and
naval movement, but before ground movement
(29.4).
14.6 GROUND UNITS: Ground units may move up to
the limit of their movement factor, subject to the
following:
14.61 Ground units which are out of supply may not
move (29.531).
14.62 Armor units and motorized infantry units
which are in limited supply have their movement
factor reduced to three (23.2, 29.521B).
14.63 ZoCs of hostile armor units affect movement.
A ground unit in the ZoC of hostile armor pays two
additional movement factors, for a total of three, to
leave its hex. There is no extra cost to enter a ZoC.
ZoCs have no effect on the movement of air and
naval units.
14
14.64 Ground units must expend one additional
movement factor to execute an overrun (14.81).
14.65 Ground units may be moved together, both
for convenience and to execute overruns (14.8). A
ground unit may also defer part of its movement in
order to wait for another ground unit to move, then
continue its movement, alone or in conjunction
with the other unit, up to the limit of its movement
factor.
14.7 Ground units may not move onto or through
hexes occupied by hostile ground units except
when conducting overruns. (EXCEPTION: Airborne
units may airdrop on hostile ground units (24.14).)
14.8 OVERRUNS: Overruns may be conducted only
during offensive options. Overruns may take place
during the movement phase of both regular and
exploitation movement or following sea transport.
Units being overrun are subject to both positive and
negative DMs (15.25).
14.81 Overruns are conducted by moving no more
than two units (EXCEPTION: Overstacked airborne
units (24.5)), one of which must be armor, together
through the same hexside onto the attacked unit(s)
at odds of 6-1 or greater. Each overrunning unit
must expend one additional movement point to
occupy the overrun hex. If the overrunning units do
not have sufficient movement points, the overrun
may not take place.
EXAMPLE: It would cost four movement points to
overrun an armor unit. One to move one hex, plus one for
the overrun, plus two for leaving a hex in a ZoC.
CLARIFICATION: A unit moving by sea transport may
only combine with another ground unit sea transported
by the same naval mission to conduct an overrun.
14.82 An overrun may be assisted by available
offensive air for ground support. Such air support is
declared and committed at the start of the combat
phase, at the same time as all other air and naval
missions. The defender may provide defensive air
support to units being overrun. This defensive air
support may be intercepted by uncommitted
offensive air units within range at the time of the
overrun. Such air combat is resolved immediately.
14.821 If defensive air support reduces the overrun
odds to less than 6:1, the overrun may not take
place. The ground units which attempted the
A3R rules rewrite v.3
overrun are placed in the hex from which they
entered the overrun hex. They may not move from
that hex during the remainder of movement phase,
and any overstacking which results must be
remedied either by moving other units out of the
hex, or by eliminating units from the hex at the end
of the movement phase. Any offensive and/or
defensive air support committed to the overrun
remains in place until the end of the combat phase.
The attacker may not attempt to overrun the target
hex again with other units.
14.822 During the following combat phase, the units
which unsuccessfully attempted the overrun,
including any air units which provided ground
support, must conduct a normal attack against the
defending unit(s). They may be assisted in this
attack by other units.
14.823 Airborne drops may not be used to assist
overruns.
14.83 Units which are overrun are eliminated. At
the moment of overrun, a die is rolled to determine
whether the attacker suffers any casualties. On a
die roll of “1” the moving player suffers an Ex result
(15.41). These losses may be taken from any ground
or air units which contributed to the overrun. On
all other rolls, the moving player suffers no losses.
Both sides remove losses immediately.
14.84 After an overrun, surviving overrunning units
may continue moving up to their movement
allowance, may overrun other enemy units, conduct
normal combat, and, if otherwise permitted, may
conduct exploitation movement and combat that
turn. Air units which provided ground support for a
successful overrun are inverted at the end of the
movement phase.
14.85 Other units which have not yet moved may
enter a hex which was the scene of an earlier
overrun without paying the additional movement
cost required by 14.81.
14.86 Overruns are prohibited on the Eastern front
during Spring turns (31.1) and may be prohibited as
a result of the winter die roll (31.2).
14.87 Overruns may not take place during seaborne
invasions (27.43), which are resolved after regular
movement and combat and before exploitation.
15
14.871 Units moving by sea transport may overrun,
but a unit moving by sea transport may only
combine with another sea transported ground unit
to conduct an overrun.
14.88 Units in capitals, objective hexes, ICs and
bridgeheads may be overrun, if all other
requirements are met.
EXAMPLE: A German 4-6 armor unit and 3-3 infantry
unit supported by five German air factors overrun a
Russian 1-3 infantry unit. The German player wishes to
overrun a second Russian 1-3 infantry unit, but can no
longer use the 3-3 infantry unit for this purpose because
it would not have sufficient movement factors. The
German player may move a second 4-6 armor unit (14.85)
through the hex which contained the first Russian 1-3
infantry unit, then execute the second overrun using
both 4-6 armor units and four additional German air
factors.
14.9 MOVEMENT FROM ONE FRONT TO ANOTHER:
Ground and air units which move from one front to
another must abide by all rules pertaining to the
front they enter, including restrictions arising out
of the option selected on that front. Units which
move to a front boundary to attack an enemy unit
across the front boundary, whether by offensive or
attrition combat, are moved according to the option
that is in effect on the front in which the enemy
unit is located.
15. THE OFFENSIVE OPTION - COMBAT
15.1 GENERAL: During the combat phase of an
offensive option, the following sequence is
followed:
15.11 The attacker announces all air and naval
missions, except for air missions which may take
place during exploitation, and places his air and
naval units accordingly. Counter-interceptions of
defensive naval interceptions by the attacker’s
uncommitted air and naval units are not offensive
missions, and are not announced at this time.
15.12 Counterair missions (26.43) and air attacks on
naval units in port (26.452) are resolved. Some
counterair missions may already have been
resolved during the movement phase (14.3). At this
stage, the attacker is not committed to any specific
ground attacks.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
15.13 The defender announces any allocation of
defensive air support (26.51) to ground units and
any air (26.453) or naval (27.5) interceptions of the
attacker’s naval missions.
15.14 The attacker announces any air interception
of defensive air support (26.44) and any air or fleet
counter-interceptions of the defender’s naval
interceptions. Counter-interceptions, then
interceptions, are resolved.
15.15 Successful sea transport missions (27.42) are
concluded and the naval units employed returned
to port.
15.16 The attacker carries out any airborne drops
(24) he wishes to make.
15.17 The attacker announces and resolves all
ground attacks he wishes to make, in whatever
order he chooses. The attacker resolves each attack
sequentially, using the Combat Results Table (CRT).
Victorious units may advance into hexes previously
occupied by enemy units (15.5), before the attacker
announces and resolves his next attack. Seaborne
invasions (27.43) are completed after all regular
ground combat has been resolved. Once all attacks
have been resolved, exploiting armor units may
move to breakthrough hexes (15.62).
15.18 Exploiting armor may conduct exploitation
movement (15.65). Airborne drops and offensive
and defensive air activity by uncommitted air units
may again take place. Exploitation attacks are
resolved (15.66). No naval activities are allowed
during the exploitation phase.
15.19 The combat capabilities of air, naval and
airborne units are dealt with in greater detail in the
rules relating to those units.
15.2 DETAILS OF GROUND COMBAT:
15.21 The attacker may attack with all, some or
none of his ground units which are adjacent to or,
in the case of airborne units, on top of, enemy
ground units (EXCEPTION: Replacement counters,
even when adjacent to the enemy, may not attack
except as part of a “CA” result). An attacker is never
forced to attack except when he has made an
airdrop on top of an enemy ground unit or has
received a “CA” result from a defender’s
counterattack.
16
15.22 DEFENSE MULTIPLIERS (DMs): The attacking
strength of a unit is always equal to its printed
combat factor. The defensive strength of a unit
equals its printed combat strength times its net DM.
All positive and negative DMs are taken into
account in determining the net DM for defending
units (15.26). While the defensive strength of units
may be increased (15.23) or decreased (15.24),
according to terrain and other factors, units never
defend at less than face value. In other words, a net
DM of less than +1 is always treated as +1.
15.23 POSITIVE DMs: Units receive a positive DM
(their defensive strength is increased) as follows:
A. All defending units receive a basic +2 DM.
B. Units defending against seaborne invasion
receive a +1 DM, even if some of the attacking units
are attacking from adjacent land hexes or are
dropped airborne units.
C. Units defending against attack from across a
river or crossing arrow receive a + 1 DM. This is
negated if some of the attacking units attack from a
hex which is not across a river or crossing arrow.
An airborne drop onto the defending units similarly
negates the DM.
D. Units defending in a mountain or swamp hex
receive a +1 DM.
E. Units defending in a fortress hex or behind a
fortification line receive a +2 DM. This is negated if
some of the attacking units attack from an adjacent
hex which is not across a fortification line. This may
only occur in attacks against Maginot and West
Wall hexes. In contrast to rivers and crossing
arrows, airborne drops do not negate this DM.
15.24 NEGATIVE DMs: Ground units incur a -1 DM as
follows:
A. Infantry and replacement units attacked by
exploiting armor, unless defending in a capital,
objective hex, IC or bridgehead. Partisans, airborne
units and armor (subject to 15.242) do not incur a -1
DM when attacked by exploiting armor.
B. Minor country infantry units defending in any
type of hex outside their home country
(EXCEPTION: Finnish and Swedish units defend
normally anywhere on the map, and Vichy French
units defend normally in France (70.33)).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
C. As specified by certain weather (31.2), diplomatic
and variant results.
15.241 Partisans never incur negative DMs.
15.242 Armor treated as infantry (23.2) because of a
winter die roll of “5” or more (31.2), supply
problems (29.521B, 29.531) or an oil shortage (30.2E)
is subject to negative DMs.
15.25 DMs, both positive and negative, also apply to
units which are being overrun (14.8).
15.26 CUMULATIVE EFFECTS OF DMs: Units may be
subject to positive and negative DMs for more than
one reason in a single turn. Such effects are
cumulative (15.22).
EXAMPLES: An Italian 2-5 armor unit is attacked on
clear terrain. It receives a +2 DM (15.23A). Its defensive
strength is four. Its strength would be still be four even if
it was attacked by exploiting armor (15.24A).
A German 3-3 infantry unit on clear terrain is attacked
across a river by exploiting armor. It receives a +2 DM
(15.23A), a +1 DM (15.23C) and a -1 DM (15.24A), for a net
DM of +2. Its defensive strength is six.
A 2-3 Rumanian infantry unit on clear terrain near the
outskirts of Stalingrad is attacked by exploiting armor. It
receives a +2 DM (15.23A), a -1 DM (15.24A) and a -1 DM
(15.24B), for a net DM of zero. Its defensive strength is
two (15.22).
15.3 All defending ground units in a hex must be
attacked collectively. The combat factors of all
defending units are added together.
EXAMPLE: A 4-5 Russian armor unit and a 3-3 Russian
infantry unit on clear terrain are attacked by exploiting
armor. Both Russian units receive a +2 DM (15.23A), but
the 3-3 infantry unit receives a -1 DM (15.24A), so the
total defensive strength of the Russian units is eleven.
15.31 If the attacker has more than one ground unit
in a hex, they need not all attack the same enemy
hex. For example, one ground unit could attack in a
northeasterly direction while another attacked to
the southeast, or did not attack at all.
15.32 An attacking ground unit may not split its
combat factor and make two or more separate
attacks. The entire combat factor must be applied
to one attack.
17
15.33 Attacking units in a single hex may attack
enemy units located in two or more hexes in a
single attack. All the attacking units must be
adjacent to all the defending units involved in the
attack. In such an attack, air units conducting
ground support or defensive air support may be
placed on any of the hexes being attacked.
Similarly, an airborne unit may airdrop on any one
of the enemy hexes and participate in such an
attack (24.2).
15.331 Similarly, units from two different hexes
may make a single attack against units defending
on two different hexes, provided that all the
attacking units are adjacent to all the defending
units.
15.34 Attacking units in a single hex may attack
defending units on hexes which are on different
fronts in a single attack, provided the attacker has
paid the BRP cost of the attack for both fronts,
either by declaring an offensive option or paying
for a limited offensive operation for each front that
included the attacking units. It is conceivable the
BRP cost for the attacking units would have to be
paid twice.
15.35 A ground unit may only be attacked once
during the regular combat phase (EXCEPTIONS: A
counterattack dictated by the CRT or a Western
Allied/Russian attack against the same hex (50.3)).
This does not preclude a second attack against a
defending unit during exploitation.
15.36 If, following an attrition option retreat, the
defender has more than two units stacked on an
attacked hex in excess of the normal stacking limit
(10.1), only two of those units may defend. The
defender determines which two. The excess units,
while they are not counted for defense, are
eliminated along with the defending unit on a “D”
result, and, unless the attacker had the smaller
force and at least one defending unit survived, are
eliminated by an “Ex” result. The excess units are
disregarded in determining the attacker’s losses
after an “Ex” result and the odds of a counterattack.
15.361 The above does not apply where excess
stacking is explicitly permitted (bridgeheads,
airborne units, three British units in London).
15.37 Only two ground units may attack from any
one hex (EXCEPTIONS: Armor units on a
A3R rules rewrite v.3
breakthrough hex (15.663), overstacked airborne
units, British units in London).
15.38 When all preparations for attack and defense
are complete, each attack is resolved. The attacker
calculates the strength of his attacking force,
including air factors from ground support air
missions and fleet factors from shore
bombardment. The defender calculates the strength
of his defending force, including defensive air
support, taking into account the net DM (15.23,
15.24). The total attacking and defending strengths
are expressed as a ratio (fractions are ignored), one
die is rolled and the appropriate odds column on
the CRT consulted. The attacker may not select a
column on the CRT which is lower than the actual
odds. Attacks greater than 5-1 are allowed, but the
5-1 column is used to resolve the attack. Similarly,
attacks at less than 1-4 are allowed, but these
automatically result in the elimination of the
attacker without loss to the defender.
EXAMPLES: 10 factors attacking 10 is a 1-1 attack; 19
factors attacking 10 is still only a 1-1 attack; five factors
attacking 13 is a 1-3 attack.
15.4 COMBAT RESULTS TABLE (CRT)
15.41 COMBAT RESULTS:
A: ATTACKER ELIMINATED: All attacking ground
and air units are eliminated. Fleets conducting
shore bombardment are eliminated at the rate of
one fleet factor for every three fleet factors used
(27.415). Fleets carrying ground units for a failed
invasion are unaffected and return to port.
D: DEFENDER ELIMINATED: All defending units,
including air units flying defensive air support, are
eliminated.
Ex: EXCHANGE: The side with fewer combat factors
loses its entire force. The larger side removes at
least an equal number of factors. The attacker must
match the value of the defender’s units as reflected
by their net DM if the exchange occurs during the
attacker’s combat die roll. If the exchange arises
out of a counterattack, DMs are disregarded, as the
defender no longer receives any advantage for
defending. Fleet factors which are conducting shore
bombardment are eliminated at the rate of one fleet
factor for every three fleet factors used (27.415).
18
EXAMPLE: The defending force is a 3-3 infantry unit
receiving a +2 DM, together with one air factor of
defensive air support. The attacking force consists of 11
factors. The combat odds are 1:1 and an “Ex” result
occurs. The attacker must remove at least seven number
of factors to match the defender’s losses. The attacker
would remove more than seven number of factors if he
could not exactly match the defender’s losses, or if he
wished to do so in order to preserve certain attacking
units (for example where the attacking force consisted of
two 4-6 armor units and a 3-3 airborne unit and the
attacker wanted to preserve the airborne).
CA: COUNTERATTACK: All of the defender’s units
must immediately attack all units which originally
attacked them. The basic combat factors involved
are compared, the die rolled and the appropriate
odds column on the CRT consulted. During
counterattacks, DM is disregarded, and all units
employ their basic combat strength. If the die roll
for the counterattack yields another “CA” result,
the original attacker attacks again and all DMs
again apply (i.e., the original attack is repeated).
When the defender counterattacks, an “A” result
eliminates the original defender and a “D” result
eliminates the original attacker. If the defender is
forced to counterattack at less than 1-4 odds he is
automatically eliminated without the need for a die
roll.
CA1: COUNTERATTACK AT 1:1 ODDS: The defender
counterattacks as above, but rolls on the 1:1 column
of the CRT regardless of the relative strength of the
forces involved.
CA2: COUNTERATTACK AT 1:2 ODDS: The defender
counterattacks as above, but rolls on the 1:2 column
of the CRT regardless of the relative strength of the
forces involved.
CA3: COUNTERATTACK AT 1:3 ODDS: The defender
counterattacks as above, but rolls on the 1:3 column
of the CRT regardless of the relative strength of the
forces involved.
15.42 Neither side may bring additional forces to
bear during counterattacks, even if unused forces
are adjacent to the attacked hex.
15.43 No battle may end with a counterattack
result. Each battle must ultimately end with an “A”,
“D” or “Ex” result.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
15.44 If a 2-1 attack results in a “D” result on a 1-1
“CA” (a die roll of 4 followed by a die roll of 6), the
original attacker’s losses are limited to the modified
value of the defender’s units. The defender does not
suffer any losses (i.e., an “Ex” result, but without
any defender losses, occurs).
EXAMPLE: Four 3-3 infantry units attack a 3-3 infantry
unit on clear terrain at odds of 2:1. The attacker rolls a 4
and the defender rolls a 6. The attacker loses two
infantry units; the defender loses none.
15.441 The rule in 15.44 also applies to all CRT
required counterattacks made at 2-1 odds.
EXAMPLE: An exploiting 3-5 armor unit attacks two 3-3
infantry units on clear terrain (1:2 odds). The attacker
rolls a 3 (a “CA” result), which requires the defender to
counterattack at 6:3, i.e. 2:1 odds. If the defender now
rolls a 4, followed by a 6 (a “D” result), the defender
would lose only one 3-3 infantry unit.
15.5 ADVANCE AFTER COMBAT: Whenever combat
results in the elimination of the original defender’s
ground units, the original attacker’s surviving
ground units may advance, subject to stacking
limits, into the hex(es) previously occupied by the
defender. The attacker decides which units, if any,
he wishes to advance immediately after resolving
the attack, before he resolves any other attacks.
15.51 Unsupplied ground units may not advance
after combat. Exploiting armor units may be
prohibited from advancing after combat in certain
situations (15.67). Airborne units which have been
airdropped may not advance after combat (24.2).
15.52 The attacker may place a bridgehead in a hex
occupied after combat, if otherwise allowed to do so
(28).
15.53 If two or more allies had ground forces
participating in an attack and they are unable to
agree as to which of them will control the vacated
hex, neither may advance units into the vacated
hex.
15.54 The original defender may never advance
after combat, even if he wins a counterattack.
15.61 CREATING A BREAKTHROUGH: Whenever the
attacker’s ground units include at least one
supplied armor unit, and any attacking ground unit
survives (it need not be an armor unit) and
19
advances into the defender’s hex (EXCEPTION: an
airborne unit dropped on the defender’s hex does
not meet this requirement), a breakthrough results.
The defender’s hex becomes a “breakthrough hex”.
A single attack against more than one defending
hex may create two or more breakthrough hexes.
EXCEPTION: No breakthroughs may be created by an
overrun or as a result of exploitation combat.
EXCEPTION: Breakthroughs may not be created on the
Eastern front during spring turns (31.1), or depending on
the Russian die roll, during winter turns (31.2).
15.62 EXPLOITATION: Armor units which were, at
the moment of combat, adjacent to or stacked with
any unit which attacked a breakthrough hex are
eligible to exploit and may be placed on that
breakthrough hex after all normal ground combat
has been resolved. Exploiting armor units are
placed on a breakthrough hex without regard to
available movement factors or stacking limits.
15.63 To be eligible for exploitation, an armor unit
must have been supplied from an unlimited supply
source during the initial supply determination
phase of the current player turn and may not have
attacked during the combat phase in which the
breakthrough is created. Armored units which
attacked the breakthrough hex to create the
breakthrough are ineligible for exploitation and
may not move or attack during exploitation.
15.631 AIRBORNE DROPS: Airborne units may
conduct airdrops during exploitation even if no
breakthroughs occurred and no armor units
exploit. An airborne unit may thus airdrop into a
hex which has been cleared by regular ground
attacks (EXCEPTION: During spring (31.1), or
possibly winter (31.2) on the Eastern front).
15.64 Units belonging to a major power which
selected a pass option on a front in which an ally
created a breakthrough may not exploit their ally’s
breakthrough, even if the units would only move
over controlled hexes and would not move adjacent
to enemy units.
15.65 MOVEMENT OF EXPLOITING ARMOR UNITS:
Once all regular combat has been resolved on all
fronts, exploiting armor units may remain in a
breakthrough hex or move from a breakthrough
hex as set out below. Exploiting armor units may
enter enemy-controlled hexes, move backwards
A3R rules rewrite v.3
through friendly hexes, or both, subject to the
following restrictions:
15.651 The first exploiting armor unit may move
into a hex adjacent to the breakthrough hex, then
into one additional hex adjacent to the first hex
entered. In addition to any limits on movement
relating to its movement factor, the first exploiting
armor unit may not enter more than two hexes.
15.652 A second exploiting armor unit may move
one or two hexes from the breakthrough hex, using
a different route from that used by the first
exploiting armor unit. Alternatively, it may exactly
duplicate the route of the first exploiting armor
unit and then, if it is able to do so, move one or two
additional hexes.
15.653 A third exploiting armor unit may move one
or two hexes from the breakthrough hex, using a
different route from that used by the first two
exploiting armor units. Alternatively, it may
duplicate the route of the previous exploiting
armor units and then, if it is able to do so, move one
or two additional hexes.
15.654 This process is repeated until all exploiting
armor units have moved. Movement from the
location of other exploiting armor units follows the
same rules as movement from the breakthrough
hex itself. An exploiting armor unit is effected by
enemy ZoCs in the same manner as during regular
movement. No exploiting unit may exceed its
movement factor.
15.655 CHAIN OF ARMOR UNITS: At the end of all
exploitation movement, a chain of exploiting armor
units must exist. Each exploiting armor unit must
be within two hexes of the breakthrough hex or
another exploiting armor unit.
15.656 A player is not required to move exploiting
armor units in sequence, as long as a chain of
exploiting armor units is formed at the end of
exploitation movement. Two exploiting armor units
may thus be moved together in order to execute an
overrun (14.8). An exploiting armor unit may move
several hexes, wait to be joined by another
exploiting armor unit, then complete its movement
(14.65). Two exploiting armor units may execute an
overrun, wait for a third armor unit to move to the
hex they occupy, then continue movement, leaving
the third armor unit to form the first link in the
20
chain. While the movement of armor units during
exploitation is flexible, the chain of exploiting
armor units must always be preserved and armor
units may never exceed their movement factors.
15.657 The chain created by the movement of
exploiting armor may not be broken by advances
after exploitation combat (15.67). The elimination
of exploiting armor units in combat, after the
completion of exploitation movement, has no
adverse effect on other exploiting armor units, even
if the chain is broken.
15.658 EXPLOITATION INTO OTHER FRONTS:
Exploiting armor units may cross a front boundary,
but their movement after crossing the front
boundary must conform to the option selected for
that front. If a pass option had been selected, the
exploiting armor units could only move into hexes
controlled at the start of the turn and could not
move adjacent to enemy units. If an attrition option
had been selected, exploiting armor units could not
participate in attrition or limited offensive combat
on that front. Exploiting armor units may only
make attacks on a front for which an offensive
option has been declared, and only after all regular
combat had been resolved on that front.
15.659 Exploiting armor units which move up to,
but not across, a front boundary are subject to
similar restrictions. They may make exploitation
attacks across the front boundary only if an
offensive option had been selected in the other
front, and could not engage in attrition or limited
offensive combat on the other front.
15.66 EXPLOITATION ATTACKS: The only units
which may engage in exploitation attacks are
exploiting armor units, airborne units which
airdrop during exploitation (whether or not armor
units are exploiting on that front) and air units
which provide ground support for such attacks.
Other units, even if they did not attack earlier in
the turn, may not attack during exploitation. Air
units which provide ground support for
exploitation attacks may not have flown previously
during the game turn, and airborne units which
airdrop may not have airdropped, moved or
engaged in combat previously during the player
turn.
15.661 All exploitation movement must be
completed before exploitation attacks are
A3R rules rewrite v.3
announced and resolved. After movement, the
attacker announces his ground support missions.
The defender then elects to commit unused air
units for defensive air support. The attacker decides
whether to intercept the defensive air support with
unused air units, and any air combat which results
is resolved. The attacker then makes his airdrops
and exploitation ground combat is resolved.
15.662 No naval missions and no air missions, other
than ground support, defensive air support and
interceptions, may be conducted during
exploitation.
15.663 ATTACKS FROM THE BREAKTHROUGH HEX:
All exploiting armor units which remain in a
breakthrough hex may attack out of the
breakthrough hex into adjacent hexes. The normal
limit of two ground units attacking out of a hex
does not apply in this situation.
15.67 ADVANCE AFTER COMBAT DURING
EXPLOITATION: Exploiting armor units which are
victorious in exploitation combat may advance to
occupy the defender’s hex, provided this does not
break the chain of exploiting armor units (15.655).
Advance after exploitation combat is permitted if
the defender’s hex is either adjacent to the previous
unit in the chain or separated from it by a hex
through which an exploiting armor unit has already
passed. Advance after combat may not leave a more
distant unit disconnected from the chain. The chain
may thus be reconstituted by a lateral advance after
combat, but at the end of exploitation the attacker
must still be able to trace a chain in the same
manner as after exploitation movement.
15.7 STACKING LIMITS: Overstacking is permitted
only on breakthrough hexes, and only during
exploitation movement and combat. After combat
resolution, post-combat advance and SR, normal
stacking limits apply to all exploiting armor units,
including those still in a breakthrough hex. If a
breakthrough hex is overstacked after SR is
completed, the attacker must eliminate excess units
of his choice. Exploiting armor units that move
from the breakthrough hex are subject to normal
stacking limits on other hexes, including other
breakthrough hexes, and may not be overstacked at
the end of exploitation movement (EXCEPTION:
Bridgeheads (28)).
21
15.8 EXPLOITATION SUPPLY: In the game turn
following exploitation, and only in that game turn,
exploiting armor units are automatically in supply
and need not trace a supply line (29.552). This
special supply status is lost if the armor unit is SRed
(29.554).
15.9 BREAKTHROUGHS AGAINST VACANT HEXES:
Breakthrough and exploitation may occur without a
defending ground unit being eliminated from the
breakthrough hex only as a result of a seaborne
invasion (27.43) of a hex by more than one armor
unit. One armor unit is required to “attack” and
occupy the undefended hex in order to create a
breakthrough. Armor units held in reserve during
the invasion may then exploit from the
breakthrough hex. This procedure is permitted
even if the invasion hex was under friendly control,
and even if enemy units were adjacent to the hex.
Breakthroughs against vacant hexes are otherwise
prohibited.
16. THE ATTRITION OPTION
16.1 ATTRITION MOVEMENT: During attrition
options, ground units move in the same manner as
during offensive options (EXCEPTION: Overruns
(14.8) are not permitted).
16.11 ATTRITION COMBAT: Attrition combat differs
from offensive option combat. At the end of the
regular combat phase, the attacker totals the
number of ground factors he has in contact (if any)
with adjacent enemy ground units on the front in
question. Unsupplied units are included, as are
units on other fronts which are in contact with
enemy units on the attritioned front, unless those
units are participating in attrition or offensive
combat on their own front. Units which took part in
limited offensive attacks (17) or offensive or
attrition attacks on another front are not included
in the attrition total. Replacements or units which
are only in contact with enemy units on another
front or across all-water hexsides (unless across a
crossing arrow) are also not included. The attacker
must count all eligible ground units in his total.
16.2 Units of all allies participating in an attrition
are totaled together for one attrition die roll. A
major power at war with another major power and
one or more unconquered minor countries makes a
single attrition die roll for that front, provided the
minor countries are associated with or allied to the
A3R rules rewrite v.3
enemy major power. A separate attrition die roll is
made against minor countries for which association
or alliance has not occurred. Similarly, a major
power may be subject to several attrition die rolls if
unconquered minor countries attrition during their
independent turns (53.4).
16.3 ATTRITION TABLE: The attacker rolls one die
and consults the appropriate column on the
Attrition Table. The result indicates the number of
ground unit counters (“C”) which the defender
must lose and the number of hexes (“H”) which he
must give up to the attacker.
16.4 ATTRITION COMBAT RESULTS - COUNTERS:
The defender first chooses which unit counters he
will lose and returns them to his force pool. He may
not choose to lose more units than the number
called for. If he does not have enough ground units
on the attritioned front to satisfy the losses, he
loses what ground units he has and disregards the
remainder. Air and naval units may not be taken as
attrition losses.
CLARIFICATION: A unit that survived a limited
offensive attack may be later removed by the defender to
satisfy his attrition losses.
16.41 Ground units removed to satisfy attrition
losses must belong to a defending country which
has at least one ground unit in contact with the
enemy somewhere on the attritioned front,
although the eliminated units themselves need not
be in contact with enemy units. Ground units of
minor countries associated with or allied to a
defending major power may be taken as losses,
provided the minor country in question has at least
one ground unit in contact with the enemy.
Partisans are considered to belong to the major
power which paid for their construction and may be
taken as losses. Attrition losses resulting from an
attrition directed solely against partisans may be
taken from units belonging to the partisans’
constructing major power. Units in a offmap box
(4.9) may not be taken as attrition losses.
CLARIFICATION: A defending country may not take
attrition losses if its units are only in contact with enemy
replacements and/or with enemy units engaged in a
limited offensive attack.
16.42 If defending allies cannot agree on which
units to lose, they split the losses with the odd unit,
22
if any, coming from the nation with the larger
number of ground factors in contact with the
enemy on the attritioned front. Ties are resolved by
a die roll.
16.5 ATTRITION COMBAT RESULTS - HEXES: After
the defender has eliminated the required units, the
attacker selects one or more hexes for occupation
as allowed by the attrition die roll. The attacker
need not select all, or any, of the hexes to which he
is entitled by an “H” result. His forces may remain
in their positions. The attacker may not occupy a
capital, objective, bridgehead, fortress, IC or a hex
which may only be occupied through a hexside
containing a crossing arrow. (EXCEPTION: A
Maginot or West Wall hex may be occupied if
attacked from a hex not faced by their fortifications
(4.66)). Luxembourg, which has no capital for game
purposes, may be occupied unless it contains a
bridgehead.
16.51 If attacking allies cannot agree on which
hexes are to be gained, they split the rewards with
the nation having the larger number of ground
factors in contact with the enemy on the attritioned
front getting first choice. Ties are resolved by a die
roll.
16.52 Hexes selected for attrition occupation must
contain an enemy ground unit and must be adjacent
to an attacking ground unit which is eligible to
advance. Replacements and units which are
unsupplied at the start of their turn are not eligible
to advance.
16.53 A hex from which the defender has taken all
the attrition losses inflicted on him by the
attacker’s attrition die roll for that front may not be
selected by the attacker for attrition occupation,
even if the defender has units remaining in the hex
after taking the losses.
EXAMPLE: The Axis player has two 3-3 infantry units in
a key hex. The Allies make an attrition die roll in the “11-
20” column. If the die roll is a “1”, the Axis player retains
control of the key hex by eliminating both units on the
hex. If the die roll had been a “3”, the Axis player could
still retain control of the hex by eliminating one of the
infantry units.
16.54 The attacker must advance at least one
adjacent ground unit into each selected hex. If the
attacker is unable or unwilling to advance into an
A3R rules rewrite v.3
enemy-occupied hex, he may not select that hex for
attrition occupation. The defender retreats his
unit(s) one hex from the selected hex(es). The
defender may not retreat into a hex which the
attacker will vacate to make his advance, nor into a
hex occupied by any enemy ground, air, naval or
airbase counter, nor into a hex which his units may
not enter, nor into another hex selected by the
attacker for attrition occupation. If forced to do so,
the defender may overstack, enter an enemy ZoC or
enter an enemy-controlled hex. The defender must,
if possible, overstack rather than enter an enemy
ZoC; and must, if possible, enter an enemy ZoC
rather than an enemy-controlled hex.
CLARIFICATION: Defending units may not retreat into a
hex that contains any enemy counter, not even an
unoccupied IC, bridgehead or airbase.
16.55 Once the attacker has designated all the hexes
he wishes to occupy as a result of the attrition die
roll, the defender vacates all the designated hexes
simultaneously. The attacker then simultaneously
occupies all the designated hexes. This process is
not carried out one hex at a time; all hexes must be
vacated before the attacker advances to occupy any
of the vacated hexes.
CLARIFICATION: Once the attacker has selected target
hexes, he must advance into all of them. He may not
change his mind after seeing the enemy’s retreats.
16.56 If the defender overstacks when retreating, he
has until the end of his next movement phase to
meet stacking limits. If he fails to remedy the
overstacking, he must eliminate excess units of his
choice.
16.57 Defending units are eliminated if they are
required to retreat by attrition combat and are
unable to do so because they are totally surrounded
by enemy units, friendly units with which they may
not stack, prohibited hexes, including other hexes
selected for attrition occupation, or impassable
hexsides.
16.58 Air or naval units which are based in hexes
occupied by enemy units as a result of attrition
combat are displaced to the nearest friendly base.
Air units are eliminated only if no other friendly air
bases exist within eight hexes (26.24); naval units
are eliminated only if no other friendly ports exist
23
on that front (27.26). Displaced naval units may be
intercepted (27.51).
17. LIMITED OFFENSIVES
17.1 A major power taking an attrition option on a
front may conduct one or more of the following
offensive operations at the indicated BRP cost:
17.2 GROUND COMBAT: Engage in offensive ground
combat, at a cost of one BRP per attacking ground
factor.
17.3 AIR MISSIONS: Counterair enemy air units,
provide ground support for ground attacks,
intercept enemy defensive air support, attack
enemy naval bases or provide air cover, at a cost of
one BRP per attacking air factor.
17.31 If Axis variant 16 has been played, German air
units may provide air supply, at a cost of one BRP
per air factor.
17.4 NAVAL MISSIONS: Conduct sea transport,
invasions and shore bombardment missions, or
escort fleets on such missions, at a cost of one BRP
per three fleet factors used (round fractions up).
17.5 If an invasion is conducted against an
undefended beach hex, the attacker pays only the
BRP cost of the fleets he employs. If the beach hex is
defended and combat occurs, the attacker must also
pay the BRP cost of the units which attack the
defenders.
17.6 No more than 14 BRPs may be spent on limited
offensive operations on any one front, whether by
one or more major powers. Operations beyond this
limit require a normal offensive option.
17.61 If two major powers cannot agree on how to
limit the forces involved in limited offensive
operations, neither major power may spend more
than seven BRPs. If three major powers cannot
agree, none may spend more than four BRPs.
17.7 A player indicates which units will be
employed in limited offensive operations and pays
the BRP cost for such operations when he actually
carries out the operation in question. Attrition
combat is resolved at the end of the regular combat
phase, after all limited offensive operations have
been carried out.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
EXAMPLE: A player wishes to carry out an invasion
against an undefended beach hex (using a 9-factor fleet
and a 1-3 infantry unit) and a ground attack (using six
ground factors) on a front on which he selected an
attrition option. During the combat phase, the player
announces his naval mission and pays three BRPs. Before
any limited offensive ground attacks are announced, the
defender decides whether to fly defensive air support,
just as in an offensive option. If he does, the attacker may
intercept with available air units. He immediately pays
the required BRP cost for those units that intercept. After
air combat, the attacker announces his ground attack
and pays six BRPs. If the attacker intercepted defensive
air support with more than five air factors, the number
of ground factors which could attack would be reduced
accordingly, as a total of no more than 14 BRPs could be
spent on limited offensive operations.
17.8 A limited offensive operation may not be
conducted on a front where an active ally has
selected an offensive option (13.5).
17.9 Contested invasions are permitted during
limited offensives, but overruns, breakthroughs,
exploitation and airborne drops are not. Ground
units which engage in combat during a limited
offensive or are adjacent only to enemy units
subject to such attack are not counted toward the
attrition level for that front and may not may make
attrition advances.
18. THE PASS OPTION
18.1 During a pass option, all offensive operations
are prohibited. Only defensive air and naval
operations are allowed. Movement is restricted as
follows:
18.2 GROUND UNITS: Ground units may only move
over already controlled hexes. Ground units may
not move into enemy-controlled hexes, even if
vacant and in a friendly ZoC. Ground units which
are adjacent to an enemy unit may not move, even
if the enemy unit is on another front. Ground units
may not move into or through any hex which is
adjacent to an enemy unit (4.44). “Enemy unit”
includes ground, air and naval units, as well as
partisans, airbase counters and ICs.
18.21 Ground units of a major power taking a pass
option may enter hexes captured by an ally during
the same movement phase, provided no other
restrictions apply.
24
18.22 Ground units belonging to a major power
taking a pass option may be sea transported or
invade a friendly hex if the required naval units are
provided by an ally taking an offensive or limited
offensive option.
18.3 AIR UNITS: Air units may only stage over
already controlled ground, water or part water,
part neutral land hexes (26.21).
18.4 NAVAL UNITS: Naval units may change base
only if no enemy air or naval units are capable of
intercepting them (27.21).
18.5 OPERATIONS ON OTHER FRONTS: The above
restrictions do not apply to ground or air units
which change fronts during movement or which
attack enemy units across a front boundary. The
option selected on the front entered or attacked
governs. A naval unit based on a front where a pass
option has been selected may change base to a two-
front port in order to carry out a mission from that
port on another front, even if it were subject to
interception during its base change. Similarly,
during the combat phase, a naval unit may move
through sea hexes on a pass option front to conduct
a sea transport, invasion or shore bombardment
mission on another front. The hex receiving the
naval action, including the port of debarkation for
sea transport, must be on the front where a limited
or full offensive was selected.
19. UNIT CONSTRUCTION
19.1 Each major power may construct units which
are in its force pool as allowable builds, subject to
its BRP spending limit (35) (EXCEPTIONS: Airborne
units eliminated in the current game turn (24.4),
and units voluntarily eliminated (14.11) or
eliminated due to lack of supply (29.543) in the
current player turn).
19.2 The construction costs for units in BRPs per
combat factor are as follows:
A. One BRP per factor: Infantry, replacements,
submarines.
B. Two BRPs per factor: Armor, partisans, ASW,
interceptors.
C. Three BRPs per two factors: SAC (Additionally,
one SAC factor may be built for two BRPs in order
to maximize SW expenditure in the YSS).
C. Three BRPs per factor: Air, naval, airborne,
commandos (Allied variant 16).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
19.3 Units must be constructed and placed in their 19.5 Free Siberian transfer, while it involves the
home country, on fully supplied hexes, not in an placement of units on the board, takes place prior
enemy ZoC, which were controlled by the to the movement phase and does not require any
constructing major power at the beginning of the BRP expenditure (see 65).
player turn of construction (EXCEPTIONS: British
units in Egypt, Iraq or India (19.35); Russian units in 20. STRATEGIC REDEPLOYMENT (SR)
Siberia (19.36); British submarines in Malta (64.4)).
20.1 After unit construction, each major power may
Units may not be constructed on hexes which were
redeploy a number of its and its active minor allies’
recaptured from the enemy until the turn following
(56.33) units, moving them any distance. BRPs may
their recapture. Stacking limits must be observed
also be SRed from one major power to another
during placement.
(20.6). Partisans and units belonging to associated
minor countries may not be SRed. Each unit or 20
19.31 If two countries are not at war, units may be
BRPs SRed costs one SR. The SR capacity of each
placed in a border hex despite the presence of a ZoC
major power is set out below. The number after the
from a potential enemy's armor unit deployed
major power’s name is the basic SR capacity of that
across the border.
major power. Possible reductions in the basic SR
capacity are then detailed. The SR capacity of each
19.32 Russian units may not be constructed in a city
major power is recalculated each turn.
containing an IC, including Leningrad, unless a
supply line can be traced from that city to Moscow
20.11 GERMANY: 9. For every three BRPs lost to SW
or the east edge of the board. Limited supply from
during the previous game turn, the German SR
an IC is not sufficient for unit construction
capacity is reduced by one, to a maximum per turn
purposes.
reduction of four. In addition, each turn oil supplies
are interrupted, the German SR capacity drops by
19.33 For unit construction purposes, East Prussia is
one (30.4). During winters, German ability to SR
an integral part of Germany, Sicily is an integral
inside Russia is reduced by the modified winter die
part of Italy and Ulster is an integral part of Britain.
roll, although the overall German SR capacity is
Italy may not construct units in Sardinia, France
unchanged.
may not construct units in Corsica and Russia may
not construct units in eastern Europe.
20.12 ITALY: 5. Each turn oil supplies are
interrupted, the Italian SR capacity drops by one
19.34 American units are constructed in the U.S.
(30.4). During winters, Italian ability to SR inside
box.
Russia is reduced by the modified winter die roll,
although the overall Italian SR capacity is
19.35 Britain may construct up to three BRPs worth
unchanged.
of British infantry and replacement units (only) in
Suez, Basra, or the India box each turn (in total -
20.13 FRANCE: 5.
not three BRPs in each location).
20.14 RUSSIA: 6. If Moscow is controlled by the Axis,
19.36 Russia may construct up to three BRPs worth
the Russian SR capacity decreases by two. In
of Russian infantry units (only) each turn in Siberia.
addition, a maximum of three Russian SRs may be
used to send units to or from Siberia (20.514).
19.4 VOLUNTARY ELIMINATION OF BRPs: During
the unit construction phase a player may
20.15 BRITAIN: 9. For every three British BRPs lost
voluntarily eliminate BRPs, usually to avoid an
to submarines, raiders, German bombing of Britain
unwanted double move (9.12). Such voluntary
(43.6), or V-weapons (Axis variant 24) during the
elimination of BRPs does not count as spending in
previous Axis player turn, the British SR capacity is
relation to that nation’s spending limit (35). A
reduced by one, to a maximum per turn reduction
major power belonging to the side which held the
of four.
initiative may not voluntarily eliminate BRPs. Also
see: Scorched Earth (33.62).

25 A3R rules rewrite v.3

20.16 UNITED STATES: The U.S. basic SR capacity
equals one for every 20 BRPs in the U.S. current BRP
base. For every three American BRPs lost to SW and
raiders during the previous game turn, the U.S. SR
capacity is reduced by one. U.S. SR capacity may not
be reduced below half its basic value (rounded up).
EXAMPLE: In Summer 1942, the U.S. BRP base is 220.
This would give the U.S. an SR capacity of 11, but during
the Spring 1942 SW resolution phase, German
submarines and raiders eliminated 21 American BRPs,
for a possible SR reduction of seven. But the U.S. SR
capacity may not drop below half its basic value
(rounded up), so it will be six in Summer 1942.
20.17 SRs are not transferable from one nation to
another and may not be accumulated from one turn
to the next. When a unit is sea escorted by an ally’s
fleet factors, the SR is charged against the nation
owning the unit, not the nation providing the sea
escort.
20.2 RESTRICTIONS ON SRs: Units SRed by land may
move only over controlled, fully or partially
supplied hexes (including hexes controlled by an
ally, with that ally’s permission). Ports must
similarly be supplied before units may SR into or
through them. Subject to the restrictions of 20.22,
units may SR into and through hexes acquired
during the preceding movement or combat phases
if those hexes are fully or partially supplied during
the post-combat adjustment phase.
20.21 Air units may SR from an unsupplied airbase,
but only to a fully supplied airbase. The SR of air
units is not considered an “SR by land”
(20.2), and therefore there is no requirement that
the hexes between the air bases be supplied.
Similarly, naval units may SR from an unsupplied
port, but only to a fully supplied port. In either
case, the new base must be controlled by the SRing
major power or an ally.
20.22 ENEMY UNITS OR CONTROL PROHIBITS SR: No
SRed unit (ground, air, naval, airbase counter or IC)
may pass adjacent to any enemy unit, including a
ground, air, naval, or partisan unit, an airbase
counter, unoccupied bridgehead or an IC. Nor may a
unit begin or end its SR adjacent to an enemy unit.
A unit is not “adjacent to an enemy unit” if the
enemy is a potential enemy, not yet at war (4.44).
Units being SRed by sea may pass by or through
26
hexes containing enemy units, although they may
not begin or end the sea portion of their SR in a
port adjacent to an enemy unit (27.66). Air units
may not SR over land hexes which are under enemy
control.
20.23 Units may be SRed in any order to avoid
overstacking at the end of the SR phase.
(EXCEPTION: Naval SRs take place before all other
SRs. Non-naval SRs are only declared after naval
SRs are resolved.) Naval SRs may be intercepted by
enemy units (20.8) and must be indicated to the
opponent before any SRs are made, after which
they may be attempted in any order. Naval SRs to
the same destination port may be made together for
protection against enemy interception. A unit
which is itself SRed may not be used to cover the SR
of other units in the same SR phase (20.86).
20.3 Ground units and BRP grants may not cross all-
water hexsides during SR without sea escort (27.6)
(EXCEPTION: Crossing arrows; American initial
deployments and BRP grants to Britain or France
(20.611)).
20.31 AIR UNITS: Air units may SR over water only
by sea escort or by tracing a path of no more than
eight hexes from a controlled air base to another
supplied, controlled air base on the far shore. They
may cross a total of more than eight water hexes in
this manner by using a chain of air bases no more
than eight hexes apart. (EXCEPTION: Air units may
SR from the U.S. to Scapa Flow without sea escort).
British and French air units may use each other's
airbases for SR even if they could not use the
airbases for other purposes (49). Air units may
combine sea SR (to cover longer distances) with SR
by flight in the same phase. Air units may SR over
partial land-sea hexes unless the land portion of the
hexes is enemy-controlled.
20.32 Airborne units SR as ground units. Their
airdrop ability may not be used during SR.
20.4 Naval units moving by SR may only cross one
front boundary. Fleets performing sea escort may
not cross a front boundary.
20.41 SR THROUGH STRAITS: Naval units may SR
through the strait of Gibraltar only if Gibraltar is
controlled by their side. Hostile forces in any other
hex adjacent to the strait (including AA9 and BB8)
A3R rules rewrite v.3
do not prevent SR into or through Gibraltar, so long
as Gibraltar itself is controlled. Sea escort into and
out of Gibraltar is similarly permitted. Naval SR
may not pass through the Turkish straits if any one
of the four hexes adjacent to the crossing arrows is
controlled by hostile or neutral forces.
20.5 OFF-BOARD SRs:
20.51 Units may SR off the board only as follows:
20.511 MIDDLE EAST: Allied units may SR between
Europe and Suez (67.5) and Europe and Basra (62.3)
or Bushire (if the Persian BRP route has been
activated - 38.2) by way of South Africa, with sea
escort. The units being SRed incur a one-turn delay.
Units SRed by sea between Suez and Basra or
Bushire also require sea escort, but do not incur a
one turn delay.
20.512 INDIA: Britain may SR units to India to
modify the diplomatic die roll for Japan. Units SRed
from Britain to India require sea escort and must
stop in South Africa while in transit, incurring a
one-turn delay. British units SRed from Suez to
India also require sea escort, but do not incur a one
turn delay. British units coming from India may be
placed in Suez, Basra, Bushire (if the Persian BRP
route (38.2) has been activated), or South Africa on
the turn they leave India.
20.513 FINLAND: If the northern hexes of both
Finland and Sweden are controlled by the same
major power, that major power may SR one unit per
turn off the northern edge of the board from one
country to the other. A diplomatic result of “7” for
Sweden allows Germany to SR units by land in this
manner.
20.514 SIBERIA: Russian units may SR from the
eastern edge of Russia to Siberia, and vice versa. A
maximum of three units per turn may be moved in
this manner. Units being SRed to and from Siberia
incur a one turn delay by going through the Urals
first (4.96). Continuing SRs between the Urals and
Siberia do not decrease the number of allowed
Russian SRs to Siberia, nor do they require further
SR costs (20.52). Free Siberian transfer (65) is
distinct from SRs between Russia and Siberia, but
each unit placed on the board by free Siberian
transfer reduces Russian ability to SR to Siberia by
27
one. This reduction does not affect the overall
Russian SR capacity (20.52).
CLARIFICATION: Only the SR of a Russian unit from the
Siberia box to the eastern edge of the mapboard (or
placement by Free Siberian transfer) counts as a Siberian
SR. To continue the SR once on the board would cost
Russia another SR, but would not decrease the number of
allowed Siberian SRs any further.
20.515 MURMANSK: Britain, the U.S., if at war with
the Axis, and France may SR fleets to the Murmansk
box to protect BRP grants to Russia (37.2). Such
fleets are in addition to the fleets required for sea
escort of such BRP grants. Fleets SRed to the
Murmansk box may be based in any Western front
port. ASW moved to the Murmansk box during the
SW deployment phase does not count against SR
capacity (42.44).
20.516 If Germany can trace a supply line from an
unlimited supply source to the Norwegian hexes
along the northern edge of the board, German air
and naval units may SR from Bergen off the
northern edge of the board into the Murmansk box.
Air and naval units SRed to the Murmansk box must
begin the SR phase in Bergen. Similarly, air and
naval units SRed from the Murmansk box must end
the SR phase in Bergen. If the Allies capture Bergen
while German units are in the Murmansk box, those
units must move out of the Murmansk box during
the next Axis movement phase (37.41).
20.517 THE U.S. BOX: Western Allied units may SR
to the U.S. box. (EXCEPTION: French units may not).
20.52 Units moving off the mapboard (20.511,
20.512, 20.514) take two turns to reach their
destination: first they move to an off-board box,
then they appear at their destination during the
following SR phase. The SR cost for these units is
paid only during the initial turn. Thus, units
returning to the mapboard from an off-board box
do not decrease the owning major power’s SR
capacity unless they move by SR once they have
returned to the mapboard. Sea escort, if required,
need only be provided for the first turn of off-board
SRs.
20.53 [Combined with 20.52]
A3R rules rewrite v.3
20.54 INTERCEPTION PERMITTED: Naval SRs to and
from off-board boxes may be intercepted (20.8), but
only in an on-board sea hex (EXCEPTION: German
fleets SRing into Murmansk box may not be
intercepted (37.4)).
20.6 BRP GRANTS: Each grant of 20 BRPs or fraction
thereof from one major power to another counts as
one SR against the granting major power’s SR
capacity. The BRPs originate in any fully supplied,
controlled hex in the granting nation and must be
SRed normally to a hex in the recipient nation
capable of receiving SR. (EXCEPTION: This
requirement does not apply to American BRP grants
to Britain and France).
20.61 INTERCEPTION OF BRP GRANTS: BRP grants
which are SRed across water may be intercepted
(20.8) (EXCEPTIONS: American grants to Britain and
France, or to Russia through Persia (38) may not be
intercepted). U.S. grants to Russia via Murmansk
(37) may only be intercepted in the Murmansk box.
U.S. grants to Russia via Turkey may be intercepted
while being SRed to Turkey across the Atlantic
(20.849) or in the Mediterranean (39).
20.611 No sea escort is required for BRP grants from
the U.S. to Britain or France. Sea escort is required
for BRP grants from the U.S. to Russia.
20.7 INITIAL DEPLOYMENTS: Special rules apply to
units in the U.S. box:
20.71 SRs from the U.S. box to Europe are termed
initial deployments. The number of initial
deployments allowed is limited to half (rounded up)
of the current U.S. SR capacity.
20.711 Each grant of 20 BRPs or fraction thereof
from the U.S. counts as one initial deployment,
whether granted to Britain, France, or to Russia via
Murmansk, Persia or Turkey.
20.712 All unit SRs from the U.S. box to Europe are
“initial deployments.” This includes naval units
which have initially deployed and returned to the
U.S. box, as well as units which have been
eliminated and rebuilt in the U.S. Box.
20.713 No sea escort is required for units which
initially deploy by SR from the U.S. box to Europe.
28
20.72 All initially deploying units must SR into a
port capable of receiving SR (20.2) and must end
their SR as follows:
20.721 If Britain (only) is unconquered: in Britain,
including Ulster. (EXCEPTION: If Germany rejects a
British surrender offer, see 75).
20.722 If France (only) is unconquered: in France.
20.723 If Britain and France are unconquered: in
either Britain or France.
20.724 If both Britain and France are conquered, or
if Germany has rejected a British surrender offer
(75): in any hex contiguous by land SR to a port in
or bordering on the Western front.
20.725 If Allied variant 18 has been played, to any
port in or bordering on the Western front or the
South Africa box.
20.726 Initially deploying units may not move
farther than the areas specified above in the turn of
their arrival, even at the cost of an additional SR.
20.73 SEA TRANSPORT AND INVASION FROM THE
U.S. BOX: The restrictions set out in 20.72 do not
apply to units in the U.S. box used for sea transport
or invasion missions. Subject to the normal rules
governing such missions (27.42, 27.43), sea
transport and invasion from the U.S. box is
permitted even if initial deployment by SR is also
possible. For both types of missions, the U.S. box is
treated as the port from which the mission is
launched. Fleets in the SW box may not be used for
sea transport and invasion missions from the U.S.
box, nor may they provide protection for such
missions.
20.731 SEA TRANSPORT: Ground and air units in the
U.S. box may sea transport to any port on the
Western front controlled by the Western Allies at
the start of the Allied player turn. Four fleet factors
are required for each transported ground or air
factor.
20.732 SEA INVASION: Ground units in the U.S. box
may invade any beach hex in or bordering on the
Western front. Six fleet factors are required for
each invading ground factor.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
20.733 Units which sea transport or invade from the
U.S. box count against the American initial
deployment limit (20.71). Fleets based in the U.S.
box which are used for sea transport or invasion do
not count against initial deployment limits,
provided the fleets end their turn in the U.S. box.
20.74 Fleets based in the U.S. box which deploy to
the SW box during the SW deployment phase for
use against German submarines are not counted
against U.S. initial deployment limits. U.S. fleets
which withdraw from the SW box must return to
the U.S. box, even if they previously had initially
deployed to Europe.
20.75 [Moved to 20.726]
20.76 [Moved to 20.713 and 20.611]
20.77 CANADA: Initial deployment of British units
from Canada is handled in the same manner as
initial deployments from the U.S. The American
initial deployment limit (20.71) applies, even prior
to U.S. entry into the war.
20.8 INTERCEPTION OF NAVAL SRs: Units which SR
by land or air may not be intercepted. Units and
BRPs SRed by sea are subject to interception as set
out below.
20.81 SR of naval units or SR involving sea escort
may be intercepted by uninverted enemy air and
naval units (26.4531, 27.5). SRs to and from off-
board boxes, including initial deployments, may be
intercepted in on-board sea hexes (20.54, 20.84).
The SRing power may counter-intercept
intercepting enemy naval units (27.56).
20.82 If naval units being SRed or conducting sea
escort win their engagement with intercepting
enemy naval forces, the SR succeeds. If they lose
(27.574), or if the SRing player aborts (27.575), the
SR fails and the naval units involved return to their
port of origin, as do any ground or air units which
were being SRed. Such failed SRs count against the
SRing power’s SR capacity. The naval units involved
end their turn in the port of origin and may not
attempt a second SR. If the failed SR results in
overstacking in the port of origin, and excess units
are eliminated (27.576). Ground and air units may
be SRed elsewhere, at no additional SR cost.
29
20.83 If, as a result of fleet combat or air attack, the
number of surviving undamaged fleet factors drops
below that required to sea escort a ground or air
unit, that unit is eliminated. Where several units
are being sea escorted, the SRing player chooses
which unit(s) to eliminate. Similarly, the
interception of a BRP grant may result in the loss of
some or all of the BRPs if the number of surviving
fleet factors drops below the required level (27.622).
20.84 INTERCEPTION OF INITIAL DEPLOYMENTS:
Units initially deploying by sea may be intercepted
by Axis air and naval units as follows:
20.841 Units which initially deploy by sea must
trace a path from the western edge of the mapboard
(A22 to EE1) to their destination port. Any Axis air
and naval interception must take place between the
western edge hex selected and the destination port.
20.842 No sea escort is required for initially
deploying units (20.713). For record-keeping
purposes only, each ground and air factor initially
deployed from the U.S. box is considered to be
carried by two transport factors. These transport
factors are not represented by counters. The
number of transports is considered to be exactly
sufficient to carry the SRing units or BRP grant. If
any transports are eliminated or damaged, at least
some of the units involved in the initial deployment
will be eliminated (27.622).
20.843 Fleets which are initially deploying from the
U.S. box may defend other initially deploying units.
Allied fleets in the SW box may also defend, even if
they earlier engaged enemy forces while protecting
sea supply from the U.S. American fleets in the SW
box may not defend until the U.S. is at war with
Germany. If units are being initially deployed to
more than one European port, the Allied player
must indicate which routes his fleets are protecting
before the Axis announce their interceptions. After
combat, surviving undamaged fleets from the SW
box return there and are counted for SW resolution.
20.844 If Axis fleets succeed in intercepting an
initial deployment, fleet combat occurs between the
intercepting Axis force and all Allied fleets which
are defending the initial deployment. If the Allied
fleets lose the resulting fleet combat, or if no Allied
fleets were defending the initial deployment, the
initial deployment is aborted.
A3R rules rewrite v.3

CLARIFICATION: If the Axis intercept an undefended
initial deployment, the Axis still make a fleet combat or
air attack dice roll to determine U.S. transport losses
before the initial deployment aborts.
20.845 Axis air interception of initial deployment is
carried out in the same manner. There is no effect
on the initial deployment unless all defending fleets
are eliminated or damaged so that the transports
are affected. An initial deployment which suffers
losses solely from Axis air attacks may be continued
by the Allied player or aborted, at the Allied
player’s option.
20.846 Allied combat losses which cannot be
absorbed by defending Allied fleet factors are taken
from the transports carrying the initially deploying
units.
20.847 For each transport factor which is
eliminated, the U.S. immediately loses three BRPs.
In addition, units being carried by transports which
are eliminated or damaged are lost (20.83).
20.848 The rules relating to the interception of
initial deployments apply only to units initially
deployed by sea. Allied air units SRing into Scapa
Flow by air and are not subject to interception.
20.849 INTERCEPTION OF AMERICAN BRP GRANTS:
Should a U.S. BRP grant to Russia via Turkey be
intercepted while it crosses the Atlantic, the
procedure outlined in 20.84 is followed.
20.85 INTERCEPTION OF SOUTH AFRICAN SRs: The
interception of SRs between the South Africa box
and the Western front is handled in the same as
manner as the interception of initial deployments
(20.84). Allied fleets in the SW box may defend such
SRs, unless they have been used to defend an SR to
or from the U.S. box in the same SR phase. If the SR
was from the South Africa box to the Western front,
sea escort would not be required (20.52), and
Britain incurs any BRP losses for lost transports
(20.847).
20.86 Air and naval units may perform defensive
missions in the opponent’s portion of the game turn
that they are SRed, including initial deployment
(20.7), unless they were employed or constructed in
that game turn. Air and naval units may not be used
30
against enemy units during the SR phase in which
they are themselves SRed or initially deployed
(20.23).
EXAMPLE: The Allies have the initiative. An American
air unit which initially deploys to Britain in Fall 1942
could provide defensive air support or intercept Axis
fleets during the Axis Fall 1942 player turn, unless the
American air unit were constructed during the Allied
Fall 1942 unit construction phase. It could not intercept
Axis fleets which intercepted the sea escort of another
Allied unit from Britain to Norway in the Fall 1942 Allied
SR phase.
20.9 VOLUNTARY ELIMINATION OF UNITS: At the
end of the SR phase, a player may voluntarily
eliminate units, usually for political or diplomatic
reasons.
UNIT COUNTERS
21. INFANTRY
21.1 Most infantry units have a movement factor of
three and operate without impairment even when
supplied from a limited supply source (29.22).
21.2 British and American 3-4 infantry units have a
mechanized component, which is reflected in their
higher movement factor. Such units have their
movement factor reduced to three if not fully
supplied.
21.3 Infantry units attacked by exploiting enemy
armor incur a -1 DM unless they are defending in a
capital, objective hex, IC or bridgehead (15.24A).
22. REPLACEMENTS
22.1 Replacement counters represent training
organizations feeding new levies into combat units.
One of their main functions is to provide players
with cheap units which they may eliminate when
subjected to attrition combat. Russia, with an
abundance of equally cheap 1-3 infantry units, has
no replacement counters.
22.2 Replacement counters, once placed on the
board, may not move except by SR or when
required to retreat by an opponent’s attrition hex
selection.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
22.3 Replacement counters defend normally against
enemy offensive attacks. They may attack only as
part of a defender’s counterattack required by a
CRT result. They may not attack during their own
side’s offensives, are not counted toward attrition
totals and may not advance to occupy a hex gained
by attrition.
23. ARMOR
23.1 Armor units consist of an infantry component
and a mechanized component. This mechanized
component gives armor units unique abilities, such
as a ZoC (12), a greater movement factor and the
ability to conduct overruns (14.8), create
breakthroughs and move and attack during the
exploitation phase (15.6).
23.2 An armor unit may have its mechanized
component temporarily negated because of supply
problems (29.521B), an oil shortage (30.2E), or a
winter die roll (31.2). When this occurs, the armor
unit acts as an infantry unit, with a movement
factor of three, has no ZoC, and loses the other
abilities associated with armor units until its
mechanized component is restored. Its combat
factor is unaffected, although armor units attacked
by exploiting enemy armor incur a -1 DM in the
same manner as infantry units (21.3).
24. AIRBORNE
24.1 To airdrop, an airborne unit must begin its
player turn on a supplied city or airbase which is
not in an enemy ZoC. The presence of a neutral
enemy armor unit next to an airborne unit at the
start of its player turn does not prevent an airdrop,
even if the moving player declares war on that
neutral that turn. An airborne unit may not airdrop
if it moves during the movement phase, or if it
moves by sea transport or invades during the
combat phase. An airborne unit which begins its
player turn in a hex which does not contain a city
or airbase may not airdrop, even if an airbase is
placed in its hex during that player turn.
24.12 An airborne unit may only airdrop during an
offensive option. Airdrops are prohibited during
limited offensives.
24.13 An airborne unit may only airdrop during the
combat phase, either immediately prior to ground
combat resolution or immediately prior to
31
exploitation combat resolution. Airdrops may be
made whether or not any breakthrough or
exploitation movement by armor units occurred.
An airborne unit that attacks during the regular
combat phase may not airdrop during exploitation.
No airdrops may be made during exploitation in
spring turns on the Eastern front (31.1).
24.14 Subject to 24.15, an airborne unit may airdrop
on any hex within six hexes of its base, including a
hex containing enemy units. Like air units, an
airdropping airborne unit may not cross over land
hexes which are completely neutral, but may cross
over hexes which are part water, part neutral land.
24.15 An airborne unit may only drop on a hex over
which the moving player has air superiority, which
means that the moving player must have at least as
many uninverted air factors capable of flying
offensive air missions within range of the target
hex as the defender. This determination is made
after the attacker and defender have committed air
units to ground support and defensive air support,
and the attacker has intercepted any defensive air
support. Air units used for these purposes do not
count in determining air superiority. Air units
belonging to a major power that took a pass option
are also not counted (18.1). Defending air factors
may not intercept airdrops. Air combat may take
place as a result of an airdrop only if defending air
factors fly defensive air support in the drop hex and
are intercepted by attacking air factors.
CLARIFICATION: Anglo-French cooperation restrictions
(49) do not prevent British and French air units from
being counted together when determining whether a
German airdrop on Paris is permitted, nor do Russo-
Allied cooperation restrictions (50) prevent Western
Allied and Russian air units from being counted together
for determining the legality of airdrops.
CLARIFICATION: Air units belonging to enemy major
powers that have not yet intervened are not taken into
account when determining the legality of an airdrop into
a minor country.
24.16 The Italian airborne unit may not airdrop
unless lent to Germany (51.26).
24.2 An airborne unit which airdrops may only
attack units in the drop hex itself. It may not attack
units in adjacent hexes, either alone or in
A3R rules rewrite v.3
conjunction with other attacking units, even if the
airborne unit drops on an empty hex or a hex
occupied by friendly units. If defending units in two
or more hexes are being attacked in a single attack
(15.33), an airborne unit may participate in the
attack by airdropping on any of the attacked hexes.
24.3 An airborne unit may not voluntarily move
from the hex on which it airdrops, except by SR,
until the game turn following its airdrop. Airborne
units which airdropped may not advance after
combat.
24.31 Airborne units are fully supplied during the
game turn following an airdrop, unless moved by
SR (29.554), but may not airdrop again unless
supplied from an unlimited supply source at the
start of their player turn. The special supply status
arising out of an airdrop is not in itself sufficient to
allow a second airdrop.
24.4 Eliminated airborne units may be rebuilt, but
not in the game turn in which they were
eliminated.
24.5 Airborne units ignore all stacking limits and
are never counted in determining the number of
units in a stack. They may both attack and defend in
situations where another unit would be
overstacked. This rule applies even if the airborne
unit is moved and used like infantry. It does not
apply to seaborne invasions if the airborne unit is
part of the seaborne invasion force. Only two
embarked ground units may attack in an invasion
and this may not be increased to three by the use of
an airborne unit. This does not prevent the use of
an airborne unit in invasion combat by way of an
airdrop.
25. PARTISANS
25.1 Partisans represent irregular forces which are
governed by special rules concerning their
construction, supply, employment and effect on hex
control.
25.2 CONSTRUCTION: The Allies may not construct
partisans in any country until Russia is at war with
the Axis, nor may they construct partisans while
Russia has surrendered (74.5). Germany may
construct partisans only after an Allied declaration
of war on Ireland or as a result of a successful
diplomatic die roll for Ireland or Egypt.
32
25.21 Partisans may be constructed and placed on
the board by Britain, the U.S., Russia and Germany
during their unit construction phase, at a cost of
two BRPs per partisan. Only Russia may construct
partisans in Russia. No more than one partisan may
be constructed in the same country each turn
(EXCEPTION: Allied variant 15 allows the
construction of two partisans in Russia each turn).
25.22 Allied partisans may normally be constructed
as follows:
Spain, Yugoslavia, Russia: 4
Greece: 3
(After a surrender) France, Italy, Britain: 2
These limits may be affected by Allied variants 15
and 17 and certain diplomatic results. Partisans
may be rebuilt once eliminated, but the number of
partisans on the board in a particular country may
not exceed the limit for that country. Partisans may
not be built in an unconquered country unless
allowed by a diplomatic result (EXCEPTIONS: Russia
and Ireland).
25.221 Germany may build three partisans in
Ireland if it is attacked by the Allies. In addition, it
may build partisans in Ireland and Egypt if allowed
to do so by a diplomatic result.
25.23 Partisans may only be placed in an eligible
country on vacant, enemy-controlled hexes or on
hexes which contain another partisan constructed
by the same major power (EXCEPTION: After an
Allied attack on Ireland, Germany may build
partisans in Irish hexes which have not yet come
under Allied control). Partisans may not be placed
in an enemy ZoC, nor in a hex containing an
unoccupied enemy bridgehead. If no eligible hexes
exist, no partisans may be constructed that turn.
Allied partisans may be constructed in Ulster,
Sicily, Sardinia or the Greek islands if otherwise
allowed (25.22). Partisans may not be constructed in
or move into Vichy France unless it has activated as
a German minor ally, has been deactivated, or is
independently at war with the Allies. Russian
partisans may not be constructed in eastern
Europe. Russia may construct partisans in
ungarrisoned captured ICs.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
25.24 If two major powers both wish to construct a
partisan in the same country in the same turn and
cannot resolve their disagreement, the major power
controlling the smaller number of partisans in that
country builds the partisan. If both major powers
control the same number of partisans, the partisan
is built by the major power with ground forces
closer, as the crow flies, to the capital of the
country in question (a die roll if tied).
25.25 Partisans are eliminated if the major power
which constructed them surrenders. A major power
may not build partisans after it has surrendered.
25.26 Subject to 25.23, partisans may be constructed
after their country is recaptured by friendly, non-
partisan forces. Partisans remain in play after the
liberation of their country, although the
restrictions of 25.3 remain in effect.
25.3 MOVEMENT AND COMBAT: Partisans are
controlled and moved by the major power which
constructed them and must conform to that major
power’s option selection on their front during the
combat phase. Partisans may always move without
regard for hex control or option selection.
25.31 Partisans may not leave their country and
may not attack across its borders, except as
required by a CRT dictated counterattack
(EXCEPTION: Irish partisans may move and attack
into Ulster). Partisans are not counted for attrition
if in contact with enemy forces across a national
border. Russian partisans may not enter any part of
eastern Europe.
25.32 Partisans may not move by sea and may not
be SRed.
25.33 While partisans may stack and attack with
friendly units, they are limited by Russo-Allied
cooperation restrictions (50.4). Thus a partisan built
by the Western Allies may not cooperate with
another partisan built by Russia, even if they are
both in the same country.
25.36 Partisans may not receive air support. This
does not preclude non-partisan ground units
engaged in combat alongside partisans from
receiving air support. The allowable amount of air
support (26.422) depends on the number of non-
partisan factors involved.
33
25.34 Partisans attack in the same manner as
infantry, and may combine with non-partisan units
to eliminate the positive DM of a defender attacked
across a river or crossing arrow (15.23C).
25.35 Partisans are counted in attrition totals, may
be taken as attrition losses and may advance to
occupy hexes after attrition combat, subject to
25.31.
25.4 SUPPLY: Partisans are always in supply and do
not need to trace a supply line (29.551).
25.5 HEX CONTROL: A partisan only temporarily
controls the hex it occupies. As soon as a partisan
moves to another hex the hex reverts to the control
of the major power which previously controlled it.
25.51 A partisan-controlled hex is controlled only
by the partisan itself. It is not controlled by either
the major power which controls the partisan or by
the major power which previously controlled the
hex. Thus a partisan-controlled port could not
receive sea transport or SR, nor could a partisan-
controlled city base air units.
25.52 A partisan-controlled objective is not counted
in the total for either side for victory determination
or any other purpose. A Wafdist controlled Suez has
no effect on the British surrender level (75.2), hex
control after a British surrender (75.423), or the
USAT (76).
25.53 A partisan may force air or naval units to
change base by moving or advancing into a base
hex.
25.54 A partisan-controlled capital yields no BRPs to
the major power which controls the partisan,
although the major power which previously
controlled the capital loses BRPs for the capital if it
fails to regain control of the capital during its next
player turn and it had received those BRPs during
the previous YSS, or, in the case of a recently
activated minor ally, during the current year.
Control of a capital at the start of a scenario meets
this requirement. Because partisans only control
hexes while they occupy them (25.5), the
elimination of the partisan would be sufficient to
prevent BRP loss. It is not necessary to advance into
the capital itself to reclaim it.
A3R rules rewrite v.3

25.55 If Russian partisans gain control of a captured
IC, the Axis immediately lose any BRPs they
received for that IC during the previous YSS. Axis
recapture of the IC does not prevent this BRP loss.
Russia would not be considered to have recaptured
the IC until regular Russian ground units gained
control of the IC.
25.6 ECONOMIC EFFECT OF PARTISANS: For each
partisan in territory controlled by an enemy major
power, that major power loses one BRP each turn
(EXCEPTION: After a cooperative conquest (54.7),
the major power receiving the most BRPs from the
conquest incurs the BRP loss, regardless of hex
control. If several major powers shared equally in a
conquest, BRP losses from partisans are also shared
equally each turn, with a die roll being made for
any remnant). These BRPs are deducted at the end
of the enemy major power’s combat phase. To
inflict BRP damage on an enemy major power,
partisans must be in enemy or partisan-controlled
hexes and be adjacent only to such hexes, water or
neutral land (EXCEPTION: This requirement does
not apply to Irish partisans, which always inflict a
BRP penalty on Britain). Partisans behind friendly
lines, adjacent to friendly nonpartisan units or on
islands do not count. This BRP penalty does not
apply to a minor country which has been
reconquered from the enemy major power, either
by partisans themselves or another major power.
CLARIFICATION: Partisans in a minor country may
eliminate more BRPs during the course of a year than the
minor country is worth. The major power controlling the
minor country may avoid such losses by invoking
Scorched Earth (33.62).
EXAMPLE: Germany conquers Greece in Spring 1941.
The Allies build a partisan in Greece in their Spring 1941
unit construction phase. If the Axis fail to eliminate the
partisan, Germany loses a BRP in Summer 1941, even
though it has not yet received any BRPs for Greece.
26. AIR UNITS
26.1 AIR BASES:
26.11 Each city, including ports, may base five air
factors. A hex containing two cities may therefore
base ten factors.
34
26.12 AIR BASE COUNTERS: Each major power is
also provided with airbase counters as follows:
Germany: 4
U.S., Britain, Russia: 3
Italy, France: 2
26.121 Each major power may place one airbase
counter on the board during the initial setup of the
Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios. For all other
scenarios, each major power may place all its
available airbase counters on the board during
initial setup. Once play begins, each major power
may place no more than one airbase counter each
turn and only during the movement, unit
construction and strategic redeployment phases of
that power’s turn. Airbases are never placed during
the opponent’s turn.
26.122 Airbase counters may be placed in any
supplied hex controlled by the placing major power
or an ally, if permitted by the ally, even if the hex is
in the ZoC of enemy armor. No more than one
airbase counter may occupy a single hex.
26.123 Once all of a nation’s available airbase
counters are on the board, a player may only place
an additional airbase counter by simultaneously
removing an existing airbase counter from another
hex, so that the total number on the board does not
exceed the limit set out in 26.12. This process is
unrelated to SR and does not count against a
nation’s SR capacity, but is subject to the
prohibition against placing more than one airbase
counter each turn (26.121).
CLARIFICATION: An air unit may stage from an airbase
placed in a previous turn (airbase A) to a newly-placed
airbase (airbase B) even if the placement of airbase B
results in the elimination of airbase A.
26.124 After initial placement, airbase counters may
only be moved by SR. Each airbase counter so
moved counts as one unit against the owning
nation’s SR capacity and requires sea escort by a 9-
factor fleet to cross water. SR of airbase counters is
unrelated to the recycling of one airbase counter
each turn (26.123).
26.13 An airbase counter may base five air factors. A
hex containing an airbase counter and a city may
A3R rules rewrite v.3
base ten air factors; a hex containing an airbase
counter and two cities may base 15 air factors.
26.14 British air units may not base on French
airbase counters and vice versa until Anglo-French
cooperation restrictions are lifted (49.44). Russian
air units may not base on Western Allied airbase
counters and vice versa. Germany and Italy and the
Western Allies may use each other’s airbase
counters, but airbase counters may be used only by
air units belonging to the placing major power
during the phase in which they are placed
(EXCEPTION: Lent Italian air units may use both
German and Italian airbase counters any time).
EXAMPLES: A German air unit may SR using an airbase
placed by Italy during the unit construction phase.
Britain builds an airbase in London in the Winter 1944
unit construction phase, then SRs it to Paris. Ten
American air factors may SR to Paris in the same SR
phase.
A minor ally air unit may not stage to an airbase placed
by its controlling major power in that movement phase.
26.15 An airbase counter is removed from the board
if the hex it occupies comes under enemy control.
Unsupplied airbase counters are removed from the
board in the same manner as ground units (29.541).
In either case, the airbase counters may be placed
on the board again in accordance with 26.121.
26.16 If the recycling (26.123), removal or SR of an
airbase counter reduces the basing capacity of a hex
below the number of air factors in that hex, the air
factors must be moved or SRed to another air base
in the same phase or be eliminated. If these factors
are lost in the unit construction phase, they may
not be rebuilt in the same phase. When an airbase
counter is overrun, the provisions of 26.24 apply.
26.2 STAGING:
26.21 An air unit may stage (change bases) up to
eight hexes at the beginning of the movement
phase. The new base hex need not be on the same
front as the old base. It must have been controlled
by the staging side at the start of its player turn. Air
units thus may not stage to new bases acquired by
ground units during the same movement phase.
Intervention in an attacked minor country
35
(including intervention by a staging air unit) or a
successful Axis diplomatic die roll for Denmark or
Belgium Luxembourg (Appendix II) results in the
acquisition of bases which may be used
immediately. An air unit may stage to a base which
is not fully supplied, but it may not carry out any
activities from the new base unless supply is later
provided to it (29.61B). Staging may not be
intercepted. During a pass option, air units may
stage only over controlled, water or part water,
part neutral land hexes (18.3).
26.211 German air units in Bergen may stage to the
Murmansk box. If the Allies capture Bergen while
German air units are in the Murmansk box, they
must stage to an Axis-controlled air base within
eight hexes of hex A34 during the next Axis
movement phase or be eliminated.
26.22 Air units have an operational radius of four
hexes. An air unit may fly four hexes from its base
to perform air missions. This operational range is in
addition to staging. An air unit may stage eight
hexes during the movement phase, then fly up to
four additional hexes to a target hex during the
combat phase, then return to its new base. The
defender’s air units may also fly four hexes to
perform defensive tasks. Surviving air factors
always return to the same base in which they began
the combat phase (EXCEPTION: 26.25).
26.221 Air units may be sea transported from one
port to another (27.424). Air units may not stage
during a turn in which they are sea transported.
The destination port becomes the air units’ new
base. Only ground support and interceptions may
be flown from the new base (29.61B), subject to
supply requirements (27.4241).
26.23 Air units may not stage over neutral land
hexes. Air units may fly over hexes which are part
water, part neutral land, provided they do not cross
a hexside containing exclusively neutral land. Air
units may stage over enemy-controlled territory,
except during pass options.
26.24 Air units on bases which are overrun by
enemy units are displaced to the nearest controlled
air base at the instant enemy units enter their hex,
regardless of whether that airbase is in supply or
not. Should two such bases be equidistant, the
owning player chooses. The new base must be
A3R rules rewrite v.3
within eight hexes of the original base and must
have room for the displaced air units. Should no
such air base exist, the air units are eliminated.
26.241 An air unit in the same hex as a friendly
ground unit is not displaced from its base when an
enemy airborne unit airdrops on its base until the
resolution of ground combat in favor of the enemy
airborne unit.
26.242 The movement of dislodged air units may
not be intercepted. An air unit forced to move in
this manner may still perform missions from its
new base, if not counteraired (26.43).
CLARIFICATION: If enemy ground units enter a port hex
containing enemy air and fleet factors, displacing them,
the displaced air factors may not fly air cover for the
displaced fleets from their new base.
26.25 Should a base be captured while its air units
are absent on a defensive air mission, the
provisions of 26.24 are applied at the end of the
combat phase. At that time, the defender’s
surviving air units are placed at their new base. The
new base must be as close to the original base as
possible, and must be within eight hexes of the
original base.
26.3 EMPLOYMENT:
26.31 During any game turn air units may perform
one, and only one, offensive or defensive mission.
26.32 Defending survivors of a counterair mission
may not perform any mission, offensive or
defensive, for the remainder of the game turn,
unless the attacker counteraired the defender with
fewer factors and lost the ensuing air combat
(26.4331). Newly constructed air units may not fly
any offensive or defensive missions during the
game turn in which they are constructed.
EXAMPLE: In Spring, the Axis move first. Axis air units
which flew offensive missions during the Axis Spring
player turn and newly constructed Axis air units may
not fly defensive missions during the Allied Spring player
turn. Allied survivors of Axis counterair attacks (subject
to the exception in 26.4331) and Allied air units which
flew defensive missions during the Axis Spring player
turn could not fly offensive missions during the Allied
Spring player turn. In the Summer game turn, regardless
36
of which side moved first, all air units could fly missions.
During the Spring game turn, all air units could stage
and SR, which is allowed regardless of offensive or
defensive missions flown, provided all other criteria are
met.
26.33 Any air unit which performs a mission, is
counteraired (subject to 26.4331) or is newly
constructed is inverted until the end of the current
game turn.
26.34 The restrictions of 26.23 governing the
movement of air units over neutral hexes also apply
to air units which fly offensive and defensive
missions or SR.
26.4 OFFENSIVE AIR MISSIONS:
26.41 Offensive air missions may only be flown from
supplied cities or airbases during an offensive
option or a limited offensive operation. Most
offensive air missions (ground support, counterair,
interception, attacks on naval units, air cover and
German bombing of Britain (43)) are flown during
the combat phase. Three types of offensive air
missions may be flown during the movement phase:
counterair missions may be flown immediately
after the staging of air units; German air supply
missions (Axis variant 16)) may be flown prior to
initial supply determination (29.42); and ground
support may be flown during overruns (14.8). Air
cover for sea supply and naval SRs are not
considered to be missions and may be flown
regardless of option selection (26.462, 29.344).
26.42 GROUND SUPPORT:
26.421 Air units within four hexes of a hex capable
of being attacked by ground units may fly to that
hex and add their combat factor to that attack.
Overruns and exploitation attacks may be similarly
supported by air units. Air units which provide
ground support for exploitation attacks may not
have provided ground support for overruns or
attacks during the regular combat phase, even
against the same hex.
26.422 The total number of air factors providing
ground support for an attack may not exceed three
times the total number of attacking ground factors
involved.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
26.4221 Once ground support has been committed
to a hex, the attacking player may decide not to
attack that hex, but the air units providing ground
support may not then be withdrawn. If the attacker
chooses not to attack the enemy units in that hex,
the air units providing the ground support are
eliminated. Air units providing ground support are
not eliminated where the attacker is unable to
attack as a result of enemy action (26.4222,
26.4223), but a voluntary decision not to attack, or a
decision to attack with fewer ground factors than
required to comply with 26.422, results in the
elimination of the excess air units providing ground
support.
26.4222 Ground support may be provided for sea
invasions. If the invasion is successfully intercepted
by enemy action and turned back, or is voluntarily
aborted by the attacking player, air units providing
ground support are not eliminated. They return to
base and are inverted.
26.4223 If the interception of a portion of an
invasion force or the sea transport of ground units
results in more ground support than is allowed
(26.422), the excess air factors are not eliminated.
They return to base and are inverted.
26.4224 If Axis units are occupying Paris, British air
factors allocated to ground support in anticipation
of ground attacks by French units are eliminated if
the Allies fail to recapture Paris and the anticipated
ground attacks are aborted (48.4).
26.423 Air units which provide ground support are
eliminated by an “A” result in ground combat. If the
attacker suffers an “Ex” result he may elect to take
his losses from ground, air or bombarding fleet
units in any combination, so long as he eliminates
sufficient factors.
26.424 If a ground attack against more than one
enemy hex is being conducted (15.33), the attacker
may add ground support to his attack if his air units
are able to reach any one of the attacked hexes.
26.43 COUNTERAIR:
26.431 Air units within range of enemy air bases
may attack enemy air units at those air bases. Only
uninverted defending air factors participate in the
ensuing air combat, although air combat losses may
37
be taken from inverted air factors in the attacked
hex (26.62).
26.432 If the attacker counterairs a hex containing
only inverted enemy air units, the size of the
defending force is considered to be zero when
calculating the size DRM. In addition, nationality
modifiers are only applied if they favor the attacker
(26.6).
EXAMPLE: Two Russian air factors counterair four
inverted German air factors. The Russian player receives
a +2 DRM for size. There is no nationality modifier. If the
four German air factors had counteraired two inverted
Russian air factors, the German player would receive a +4
DRM for size and an additional +1 DRM for nationality.
26.433 After counterair combat is resolved, the
surviving factors for both sides return to base, are
inverted and may not be used for the remainder of
the game turn (EXCEPTION: 26.4331).
26.4331 If a counteraired defender had the larger
force and won the resulting air combat, the
surviving defending air factors are not inverted and
are available for further use during the game turn.
Such factors are not considered to have been
counteraired, and the restrictions on counteraired
air units do not apply to them. For multiple air
combat (26.66) where the defender had the initially
larger force, this exception is applied separately to
each air combat.
CLARIFICATION: Where a large number of air factors
intercepts an even larger defending force such that
multiple air battles are fought (26.66), the determination
of which side “won the air combat” is made separately
for each combat.
26.4332 When air attacks are being made against
naval units in port, counterair combat may occur
during each attacking sortie (26.4524).
26.434 Air units based in Malta may decline combat
when counteraired (64.2). No air combat occurs,
and both the attacking and defending air units are
inverted. For the effect of this rule on air attacks
against naval units based at Malta, see 26.4527.
26.44 INTERCEPTION OF DEFENSIVE AIR SUPPORT:
A3R rules rewrite v.3
26.441 After the defender has committed his air
units to defensive air support missions (26.51)
whether during an overrun, regular combat or
exploitation, the attacker may use uninverted air
units to intercept such support.
26.442 Interception takes place in the hex in which
the defender has placed his defensive air support.
The intercepting air must be based within four
hexes of the target hex.
26.443 The attacker may intercept with any number
of air factors. All surviving intercepting air factors
are inverted after the resolution of air combat with
the defending air factors, regardless of the
outcome.
26.444 If at least an equal number of attacking air
factors intercept air factors flying defensive air
support, the surviving defending air factors are also
inverted after the resulting air combat, regardless
of the outcome. However, if the defender had more
air factors and won the resulting air combat, the
survivors may continue their defensive air support
mission or return to base and invert, at the
defender’s option. The survivors must remain or
abort as a group. Some may not stay while others
abort. Where interception results in multiple air
battles (26.6), these are resolved exactly as in
26.4331.
26.45 AIR ATTACKS ON NAVAL UNITS:
26.451 GENERAL:
26.4511 Uninverted air units within range of enemy
naval units may attack them while they are in port
or at sea.
26.4512 When air units attack naval units, the
defender determines the defensive strength of his
naval units, rolls two dice and consults the Air
Defense Table (26.4542). The attacker then
determines the strength of his surviving attacking
air units, rolls two dice and consults the Air Attack
Table (26.4543).
26.4513 After the results of the first air sortie have
been determined, surviving attacking air units may,
if the attacker wishes, make further air sorties
against the same enemy naval units, subject to
26.4523, 26.4533 and 26.4534.
26.452 AIR ATTACKS ON NAVAL UNITS IN PORT:
38
26.4521 Uninverted air units within range of an
enemy port may attack enemy naval units in that
port. Such attacks are offensive air missions, and
are resolved during the combat phase, immediately
after the resolution of counterair missions, prior to
any interception of naval missions.
26.4522 If uninverted enemy air units are present in
the attacked hex, they must be counteraired by at
least an equal number of attacking air factors
before the naval units may be attacked. After air
combat is resolved, any surviving defending air
units are added to the air defense factors for the
attacked hex. The effects of the first air sortie are
then determined (26.454).
26.4523 After the first air sortie is completed, the
attacker may launch a second air sortie with his
surviving air factors, including air factors which
counteraired enemy air units during the first sortie,
provided at least one enemy naval factor was either
sunk or damaged in the first sortie. If the first sortie
was ineffective, no further air sorties may be flown
by those air units that turn.
26.4524 The defender has the option of committing
any surviving air factors in the port hex to the
defense of the naval units in that port hex against
the second air sortie (EXCEPTION: Malta (26.4527)).
If the defender commits his surviving air factors to
the defense of the port, the attacker must again
counterair the defending air factors with at least an
equal number of attacking air factors, and the
defending air factors which survive the ensuing air
combat are again added to the air defense of the
port. If the defender chooses not to commit his
surviving air factors to the defense of the port, they
are inverted, are not subject to further counterair
attacks and do not contribute to the defense of the
port.
26.4525 Air factors which attacked enemy naval
units during the first sortie may be used for
counterair during the second sortie, and air units
which counteraired enemy air during the first
sortie may be used to attack enemy naval units
during subsequent sorties. Air units which change
targets in this manner are still considered to be
performing a single mission (26.31).
26.4526 After the effects of the second sortie are
determined, the attacker may fly additional sorties,
following the procedure outlined above. Any
A3R rules rewrite v.3
number of sorties may be flown, subject to 26.4523.
After all sorties are flown, all surviving attacking
air units return to base and are inverted, as are all
surviving defending air units.
26.4527 Air units in Malta have the option to
decline counterair combat (26.434, 64.2). If they do,
no air combat takes place, even during the first
sortie. The defending air units are inverted and do
not take part in the defense of naval units in Malta
for the remainder of the turn. The attacking air
units which neutralized the defending air units may
be used in subsequent sorties against Malta.
26.4528 Defending air units in range of, but not in, a
port under air attack may not assist in the air
defense of the port. The attacker need only concern
himself with air units based in the port itself.
26.453 AIR ATTACKS ON NAVAL UNITS AT SEA:
26.4531 Naval units moving within range of
uninverted enemy air units during any naval
activity may be attacked by them. Naval units may
be attacked while protecting supply lines, during
naval movement, interception, counter-
interception, performing naval missions, SR, raider
movement into the SW box, or while engaged in
fleet combat. Air attacks against enemy naval units
at sea may be made by either side, regardless of
option selection.
26.4532 Naval units always move along a specified
path of hexes. If a naval force moves into a hex
within range of uninverted enemy air units, that
force is subject to an air attack in that hex. The air
attack consists of a single air sortie (EXCEPTION: If
the naval force engages in fleet combat (26.4534)).
After the results of the sortie are determined, the
surviving attacking air units return to base (but are
not yet inverted), and the naval force moves to the
next hex along its chosen path.
CLARIFICATION: If several naval activities are being
conducted separately in the same phase, the moving
player determines the order in which air and naval
interception of his naval forces is resolved. All air and
naval combat involving the first force is resolved before
air and naval combat involving the next force is resolved,
and so on, until all air and naval combat is completed.
26.4533 All uninverted air units within range of the
new hex, including survivors of a previous attack
against the same naval force, may then make
39
another air sortie against the naval force. This
process continues until the attacker runs out of air
units or calls off his attack, or until the naval force
completes its naval activity, withdraws, moves out
of range or is eliminated. The attacking air units
then return to base and are inverted.
26.45331 Air units need not attack an enemy naval
force at every opportunity. They may fly an air
sortie against the enemy naval force, decline to fly a
sortie as it enters the next hex, then resume their
attacks as the naval force enters a third hex.
Similarly, a naval force which comes within range
of air units, passes out of range, then again comes
within range may be attacked as it enters each hex
within range of the air units, provided the naval
force is still engaged in the same activity.
EXAMPLE: Britain has ground units in Gibraltar it
wishes to use in an invasion of France. A British naval
force based in Britain changes base to Gibraltar during
the movement phase, moving down the western edge of
the mapboard. It may be attacked by an uninverted
German air unit based in Vigo as it enters R8, S7, and T7,
one air sortie per hex. If the German air unit attacks, it
would be inverted after the completion of the base
change. If the German air unit did not attack during the
movement phase, it could attack the British naval force
during the combat phase as it carried out its invasion
mission. Once this new naval activity is complete, the
German air unit would be inverted. Finally, if the
German air unit still did not attack the British naval
force during its base change or invasion mission, it could
attack as the naval force SRed back to Britain. Each
naval activity gives the German air unit an opportunity
to attack the British naval force, but the air unit can only
attack during a single naval activity. The German air
unit could not attack any other enemy naval forces
during the same turn, even if they were engaged in the
same type of naval activity as the naval force actually
attacked. If two separate British naval forces base
changed to Gibraltar, only one could be attacked by that
air unit. Of course, if the air unit consisted of more than
one air factor, it could reconstitute itself as two air units,
and each could attack a different British naval force.
26.45332 Each air factor may attack only one enemy
naval force each turn. Air units which are attacking
a naval force may continue their attacks even if
that naval force combines with other naval forces
to form a larger naval force.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
26.4534 AIR ATTACKS DURING FLEET COMBAT: If
the defending naval force engages in fleet combat
in a hex in which it is also subject to air attack, one
sortie may be flown against the defending naval
force immediately before each round of fleet
combat. This reflects the fact that the movement of
the defending naval force through the exposed
hexes is impeded because of the fleet combat. This
is the only situation, other than air attacks against
naval units in port, in which naval units may be
attacked by more than one air sortie in the same
hex.
CLARIFICATION: When a naval force enters a hex in
which fleet combat is to occur, it is subject to a single
sortie air attack, then the first round of fleet combat is
resolved.
CLARIFICATION: If naval units are attacked by air units
in a naval interception hex, they may only abort after the
air attack and one round of fleet combat are resolved
(27.57). If they elect to continue the fleet combat, they
may again be subject to both an air attack and another
round of fleet combat.
26.4535 After air combat between attacking air
units and defending air units flying air cover (26.46,
26.52) is resolved, the effects of the air sortie are
determined (26.454). All defending fleet factors are
taken into account in determining the air defense
of the naval force, and all surviving attacking air
factors attack together.
26.4536 AIR ATTACKS AGAINST RETURNING FLEETS
PROHIBITED: Air attacks may not be made against
naval units which have completed their activity,
abort their activity, or are damaged and forced to
return to port.
EXAMPLE: Five German air factors attack 18 British
fleet factors. One British fleet factor is eliminated and
three are damaged. The 14 remaining British fleet factors
continue their mission and the three damaged British
fleet factors return to port. The German player may
again attack the 14 undamaged British fleet factors. The
three damaged fleet factors may not be attacked, nor
could the 14 British fleet factors, had they chosen to
abort their mission
26.4537 Air attacks against enemy sea supply lines
are carried out in the same manner as air attacks
against enemy naval units. One air sortie may be
flown against each hex of the sea supply line.
40
26.4538 Air attacks alone cannot prevent the
completion of a naval activity (EXCEPTION:
Disruption of sea supply (29.361)), unless the losses
inflicted on the naval force reduce its size below
that required for the activity.
EXAMPLE: 18 fleet factors sea escort a 5-6 armor unit.
Air attacks on the escorting fleets would not prevent the
SR unless at least nine fleet factors were eliminated and
damaged (10 fleet factors being required for sea escort of
a 5-6 armor unit - 27.62). Of course, the loss of six or
seven fleet factors to air attack might cause the SRing
player to abandon the SR rather than face further air
attacks.
26.454 RESOLUTION OF AIR ATTACKS AGAINST
NAVAL UNITS:
26.4541 Air attacks against naval units are resolved
according to the Air Defense and Air Attack Tables.
26.4542 AIR DEFENSE TABLE: Before an air sortie is
resolved, the defender rolls two dice to determine
how many attacking air factors are either
eliminated or abort their attacks. The number of air
defense factors is calculated as indicated in the Air
Defense Table. The number before the “/” indicates
the number of attacking air factors which are
eliminated. The number after the “/” indicates the
number of attacking air factors which must abort.
Air factors which abort return to their base without
loss and do not take part in that air sortie, but may
attack in subsequent sorties.
26.4543 AIR ATTACK TABLE: Once the air defense
dice roll is made, the attacker rolls two dice and
consults the Air Attack Table. Only those air factors
which have not been eliminated or aborted are
considered. The number before the “/” indicates
the number of defending fleet factors which are
eliminated. The number after the “/” indicates the
number of defending fleet factors which are
damaged.
CLARIFICATION: If German and Italian air units attack
an Allied fleet, and all the Italian air units are eliminated
or forced to abort, the Italian air nationality DRM would
not apply to the ensuing air attack dice roll because only
the air units which actually attack are taken into
account.
26.4544 Eliminated naval factors are immediately
removed from the board. Damaged naval factors are
inverted and, if at sea, immediately return to their
A3R rules rewrite v.3
port of origin without risk of further interception
(26.4536). A player may also abort the naval activity
of some or all of his force at the end of each combat
round. Naval factors which abort their activity
similarly return to their port of origin without risk
of interception.
26.4545 [Redundant]
26.4546 AIR ATTACKS AGAINST DAMAGED FLEETS
IN PORT: When naval units in port are subject to
repeated air sorties during the same combat phase
a naval force consists of damaged and undamaged
factors as a result of previous air sorties against
naval forces in a port, the effects of additional air
sorties must, if possible, be directed against
undamaged naval factors. The undamaged naval
factors bear the brunt of the air attack first. The
undamaged naval factors are first eliminated, then
damaged. Damaged naval factors are eliminated
only when all the naval factors in the force have
sustained damage. Damaged naval factors which
then sustain additional damage are eliminated.
EXAMPLE: Five British air factors attack nine Italian
fleet factors in port, eliminating two and damaging
three. The port now contains four undamaged and three
damaged fleet factors. A second air sortie again
eliminates two and damages three fleet factors. Two of
the undamaged fleet factors are eliminated and two are
damaged, leaving only five damaged fleet factors. But
since there is one more damaged factor to assign, one of
the damaged fleet factors is eliminated, leaving four
damaged fleet factors in port.
26.46 AIR COVER (OFFENSIVE):
26.461 Air units may fly air cover over naval units
during any naval activity, including movement,
offensive missions, interceptions, counter-
interceptions, sea supply, naval SRs, sea escort and
movement of raiders. Each air unit may provide air
cover for only one naval force each turn, but air
units which provide air cover for a naval force
which is changing base may continue to provide air
cover for that naval force’s activity while the naval
force remains within range, even if it joins with
other naval units in its new base to form a larger
naval force before beginning its naval activity. Air
units providing air cover during their own player
turn are performing an offensive air mission, are
inverted upon completion of the mission and may
not perform any other missions that turn.
41
CLARIFICATION: Air units fly air cover over
intercepting naval units only if the interception die roll
succeeds. If the interception fails, no air cover is
necessary since those naval units never leave port.
26.462 Air units may provide air cover for sea
supply, base changes, naval SRs and counter-
intercepting naval forces at no BRP cost, regardless
of option selection.
EXCEPTION: Air cover during a limited offensive costs
one BRP per air factor (17.3).
26.463 Air cover operates over any hex within range
of the air unit involved. If enemy air units intercept
the naval units or sea supply line in any hex for
which air cover is being provided, the covering air
units may engage some, all or none of the attacking
air factors. Once the covering player has decided
what portion of the attacking force he wishes to
engage, air combat (26.6) takes place, with the
covering air units receiving a +1 DRM.
26.464 Once air combat between the air units
providing air cover and the engaged attacking air
units is resolved, all surviving attacking air factors
then attack the target, unless the attacking player
voluntarily aborts the air sortie. The surviving air
units providing air cover play no part in the
resolution of the air sortie, but if additional air
sorties are flown by the attacker, they may again
attack some, all or none of the attacking air factors.
EXAMPLE: Five German air factors attack a British
naval force. Three British air factors are providing air
cover. The British player decides to engage three of the
attacking German air factors. The British player
narrowly wins the resulting air combat, thanks to the +1
DRM he receives, and one German air factor is
eliminated. The remaining four German air factors may
then continue their air sortie or abort, at the German
player’s option. The three British air factors may again
engage the surviving German air factors should the
German player decide to fly a second air sortie.
26.465 Air cover does not operate against enemy
naval units. Other air units must be held back to
intercept enemy naval units.
26.5 DEFENSIVE AIR MISSIONS:
26.51 DEFENSIVE AIR SUPPORT:
A3R rules rewrite v.3
26.511 During the combat phase of an enemy
offensive or attrition option, after the attacker has
announced his ground support air missions,
uninverted defending air units within four hexes of
any hex containing units which may be subject to
ground attack, including seaborne invasions and as
yet unannounced airdrops, may provide defensive
air support to those units. Air factors flying
defensive air support are added to those of the
defending ground units in determining the odds of
ground combat. The added air factors are not
affected by any DMs relating to the ground units
they are supporting. Only their basic combat
strength is added to the defense.
26.512 The defender may similarly commit air units
which have not yet flown during that game turn to
defensive air support of units being subject to
overruns (14.82), or during exploitation combat
(15.661). Defensive air support placed during
movement or regular combat has no effect on
exploitation combat, even if it were not intercepted
and no attack were made on the hex to which it was
originally committed.
26.513 Defensive air support may only be given to
ground units and may not exceed three times the
number of ground factors defending in that hex. Air
units providing defensive air support may be
intercepted by uncommitted enemy air units
(26.44). A player may not commit excess defensive
air support in anticipation of enemy interception
and air combat which, after losses, might reduce
the defensive air support to the legal limit.
26.514 If the attacker commits ground support and
the defender commits defensive air support to the
same ground battle, there is no direct air
interaction. Each side simply adds its air factors to
those of its ground units.
26.515 Air units which provide defensive air
support may be eliminated by adverse results in
ground combat. Should an “Ex” result leave the
defender with surviving factors, he may elect to
take his losses from either air or ground units or
both, in any combination, provided he eliminates
sufficient factors.
EXAMPLE: Eight German ground factors attack a French
2-3 infantry unit, which receives a +2 DM. The odds are
8:4. Four German air factors provide ground support,
making the odds 12:4. Three French air factors provide
42
defensive air support, making the odds 12:7 (1:1). A “CA”
is rolled on the CRT, and the French must counterattack
at 5:12 (1-3). They roll an “A” and both the French 2-3
and the three French air factors are eliminated. The
German ground units may occupy the French hex. The
German air factors return to base and are inverted.
26.516 Defending air units which do not fly
defensive air support may not be eliminated by an
adverse ground combat result. An air unit which is
based in an attacked hex and has not been
committed to defensive air support does not take
part in the ground combat and is simply displaced
(26.24) if attacking ground units advance into the
hex after combat.
26.517 Air units committed to defensive air support
have performed a mission even if the attacker does
not attack their hex.
26.52 AIR COVER (DEFENSIVE):
26.521 The defender’s intercepting naval units may
be provided with air cover (26.46) if uninverted air
units are available. In addition, the defender may
also provide air cover for his displaced naval units
(27.26). Defensive air cover functions in the same
manner as air cover provided by the moving player.
26.522 Air units which provide defensive air cover
are inverted after completing their activity.
26.6 AIR COMBAT: When air combat occurs, both
sides roll a die to determine combat losses. The die
roll is subject to modification as follows:
A. The larger side receives a +1 DRM for each factor
it has in excess of the smaller side.
B. Nationality modifiers are applied as shown in the
Air Force Nationality DRM Chart. When a side
consists of nationalities with different DRMs, the
lowest modifier is used.
Air Force Nationality DRMs
0 Germany, Britain, US
-1 Italy, France, Russia
-2 All others
CLARIFICATION: Free and Vichy French air units use
the same modifier as France.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
26.61 The loser in air combat (the side with the
lower air combat die roll after modification) must
eliminate air factors equal to the difference
between the modified die rolls. The winner in air
combat must eliminate half as many (rounded
down) air factors as were removed by the loser. If
the loser has eliminated inverted air factors, these
are included in the loser’s total. Thus, if the loser
removes one factor, the winner doesn’t remove any;
if the loser removes two or three factors, the
winner removes one factor; if the loser removes
four or five factors, the winner removes two
factors, and so on.
26.62 If the loser does not have enough air factors
to meet the required losses, he loses what he has
and there is no additional penalty (EXCEPTION:
Inverted defender air factors in a counteraired hex
are used to satisfy defender air combat losses once
all uninverted defender air factors are eliminated).
Such elimination of inverted air units only occurs in
air combat arising out of a counterair mission. If air
combat happens to occur in a hex which also
contains inverted air factors (as where defensive air
support is intercepted over such a hex), the
inverted air factors are not involved in the combat
and cannot incur losses.
26.63 If one side in an air battle is unable to fulfill
its loss requirements, the number of air factors
actually lost by the loser limits the number lost by
the winner. Similarly, the size of the winning force
limits the number of air factors which may be lost
by the loser.
EXAMPLES: One British air factor counterairs five
inverted German air factors. The modified British die roll
is six, the modified German die roll is one. The Germans
lose three air factors, not five, because of 26.63. Had the
British attacked with two air factors, all five German air
factors could have been eliminated.
Five British air factors counterair two German air
factors. The modified British die roll is six, the modified
German die roll is two. The Germans lose only two air
factors, not four, and the British lose only one, not two,
because the winner’s losses are calculated by halving the
defender’s actual losses.
26.64 Ties result in drawn battles. A third die roll is
made and each side loses that number of air factors,
but neither side loses more factors than were
present in the smaller force. If inverted factors are
43
involved in a counterair attack which resulted in a
tie, these are taken into account in determining the
size of the smaller force.
26.65 Air losses, as well as the number of air factors
forced to abort (26.4542), from a force of mixed
nationality must be distributed equally among the
nationalities involved, with any remnant being
taken by the nationality having the most factors
involved. If an equal number of factors were
involved, the remnant is taken from the nationality
with the lower DRM. Similarly, forces from
different air bases must distribute losses equally
amongst each other, after first distributing equally
between the nationalities involved if the entire
force is mixed. The remnant is taken from an air
base of the owning player’s choice.
26.66 MULTIPLE AIR BATTLES: Air battles involving
more than five air factors on each side are resolved
by more than one air combat die roll. The smaller
force is broken down into groups consisting of five
air factors each, with the final group consisting of
less than five air factors, if necessary. The larger
force must then engage each opposing air group
with at least an equal number of air factors. Surplus
air factors belonging to the larger force are
allocated between battles as the owner wishes.
Otherwise, each player determines the composition
of his air groups. Each air battle is then resolved
separately.
EXAMPLE: 14 German air factors counterair 10 British
air factors. Two air battles are fought. Each group of five
British air factors must be attacked by at least five
German air factors. The remaining four German air
factors may be added to either battle as the German
player sees fit. If some of the attacking air factors were
lent Italian, the German player could assign these to
whichever attacking group he wished.
26.7 PARTIAL AIR COUNTERS:
26.71 Air counters may be broken down into
smaller counters of the same nationality at any
time during play, including during an opponent’s
player turn. Similarly, smaller counters may be
recombined into larger ones at any time.
26.72 A player may never have more air factors in
play than are contained in his force pool. Subject to
this limitation, a player may construct partial air
counters. Such units need not be combined with
A3R rules rewrite v.3
other partial units into 5-4 air counters. They may
SR and operate independently.
26.73 A player may begin a scenario with his air
units broken down into partial air counters.
26.74 Although a major power may have as many
partial air counters in play as it wishes, air counters
in the same hex must be combined at the end of
their owner’s player turn if the opposing player
finds the unnecessary partial air counters
distracting.
26.75 For SR purposes, up to five air factors of the
same nationality in the same hex count as one unit.
Partial air counters on different hexes count as one
unit apiece.
EXAMPLE: Germany has one air factor in Berlin and
four air factors in Riga. If Germany SRs the air factor
from Berlin to Riga, then SRs all five air factors to
Leningrad, this counts as two SRs.
26.76 A player may conduct air missions without
actually breaking down his air units, by announcing
the missions of his air factors. If the opposing
player wishes, however, the moving player must
break down his air units in order to ensure the
accuracy of his calculations.
27. NAVAL WARFARE
27.1 NAVAL STACKING AND BASING:
27.11 Each port may base up to 36 naval factors.
Naval bases, indicated on the mapboard by an
anchor symbol, are significant only for naval
construction (27.8), and have the same basing
capacity as other ports.
27.111 A hex containing two ports is considered to
contain a single port with the capacity to base up to
72 naval factors. A two-port hex is treated as a
single port for all purposes (EXCEPTIONS: Air
defense (26.4542); raiders (44.23)).
27.112 The capacity of a port may not be voluntarily
exceeded. If overstacking occurs involuntarily, e.g.,
as a result of a failed attempt to change base during
the movement phase (27.211), excess naval units
may not be used for the remainder of the player
turn. Any naval units still overstacked by the end of
the SR phase are eliminated. If overstacking occurs
44
as result of a failed naval SR, the excess units are
eliminated immediately (27.576).
27.12 A naval unit is considered to be based on the
front which contains the ocean area on which the
port abuts, even though the port itself may be on a
different front.
EXAMPLE: A fleet based on the north German (Baltic)
coast is based on the Eastern front, even though its port
hex lies on the Western front. A fleet based at Marseilles
is based on the Mediterranean front, even though its port
hex lies on the Western front. In neither case would a
Western front offensive option or limited offensive
operation be required for the employment of the fleets on
the Eastern or Mediterranean fronts, respectively.
27.13 TWO-FRONT PORTS: Kiel, which is connected
to the North Sea by a canal, is a two-front port.
Naval units based in Kiel may conduct missions on
either the Eastern or Western front. A naval unit
based on the Eastern front may move to Kiel during
the movement phase, then perform a mission on
the Western front during the combat phase, and
vice versa. If the Allies capture Kiel, and whenever
Kiel changes hands thereafter, it ceases to be a two-
front port. This simulates combat damage to the
Kiel canal. When the canal is inoperative, naval
units in Kiel may be based on either the Western or
Eastern fronts; it is up to the players to keep them
straight. Kiel resumes its status as a two-front port
as soon as either side has controlled it for two
consecutive, complete game turns.
CLARIFICATION: Russia may not intercept Kiel-based
German naval units from its Baltic ports when they
perform a mission on the Western front.
27.14 Gibraltar is also a two-front port that is
capable of sustaining missions on both the Western
and Mediterranean fronts and has all the other
advantages of a two-front port.
CLARIFICATION: Sea transport is an offensive mission
and the governing principle is that the front which
receives the action determines the option required. In
this case, Gibraltar may be treated as either a Western or
Mediterranean front port for purposes of a sea transport
mission that debarks at Gibraltar. Thus, if Britain sea
transports units to Gibraltar from Plymouth, an offensive
on either front may be used to pay for the operation. The
same reasoning also applies to Kiel and Istanbul.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
27.15 Istanbul is also a two-front port that is
capable of sustaining missions in both the Black Sea
and the Mediterranean and has all the other
advantages of a two-front port. Supply and passage
between Istanbul and the Mediterranean is not
allowed unless all the land hexes composing the
Turkish Straits (Z33, Z34, AA31 and BB31) are
controlled by friendly forces.
27.16 Only Russian and Axis fleets may base in
Russian ports and in the Baltic States. Russian fleets
may base only in Russian-controlled ports. Russian
fleets may enter a Mediterranean port only if Russia
controls the port and the Turkish Straits are under
friendly control.
27.17 NAVAL UNITS BASED IN THE U.S. BOX: Naval
units based in the U.S. box are subject to the
following restrictions:
27.171 Fleets based in the U.S. box may carry out
sea transport and invasions (20.73).
27.172 Fleets based in the U.S. box may carry out
shore bombardment only in conjunction with a sea
invasion from the U.S. (20.732).
CLARIFICATION: In case of multiple forces invading the
same target, shore bombardment provided by U.S.-based
fleets is limited to three times the number of ground
factors from the U.S. box actually involved in invasion
combat.
27.173 American fleets based in the U.S. box may
intercept Axis fleet activity on the Western front
only after the U.S. has entered the war. Prior to U.S.
entry, U.S. fleets in the SW box may engage German
submarines, but may not pursue German raiders,
protect sea supply, or otherwise interfere with Axis
fleet activity or engage Axis air units. The U.S. box
is considered to be at maximum range on the Naval
Interception Table (27.565).
27.18 FRENCH FLEETS: French fleets may base only
in France, French colonies or captured, French-
controlled ports until Anglo-French cooperation
restrictions (49) are lifted. If France is conquered by
the Axis, all French fleets automatically move to
Marseilles prior to the diplomatic die roll for
France. They may not be attacked by either side as
they do so.
27.181 If, while Anglo-French cooperation
restrictions are in effect, French fleets are forced to
45
move because their base is captured, and no legal
French base is available on their front, they may
temporarily move to a British-controlled port on
the same front, provided no British units are in the
port. At their first movement or SR opportunity,
the French fleets must return to a French-
controlled port or be eliminated. They may perform
no other activities while based in this temporary
port.
27.2 MOVEMENT:
27.21 Naval units, including inverted naval units
(27.313), may change base during the movement
phase of offensive or attrition options. A naval unit
may move to a base which is not fully supplied, but
may not carry out any activities from the new base
unless supply is later provided to it. Base changes
are vulnerable to interception by enemy air and
naval units (EXCEPTION: 27.213). Naval units may
change base during a pass option only if no enemy
air or naval units are capable of intercepting them.
27.211 Naval units which are intercepted while
trying to change base and are defeated in the
ensuing fleet combat must return to their original
base, even if this results in overstacking in the
original base because of other, successful base
changes (27.112). The excess naval units are
inverted and may not operate from their original
base. If the excess stacking is not remedied during
the SR phase, the excess naval units are eliminated.
27.212 Naval units may only move to a new base
which is on the same front as their old base. The
new base must have been controlled by the moving
player’s side at the start of his player turn.
27.213 German fleets based in Bergen may move to
the Murmansk box without risk of interception.
Similarly, German fleets in the Murmansk box may
return to Bergen without being intercepted. If the
Allies capture Bergen while German fleets are in the
Murmansk box, the German fleets must move from
A34 to the nearest available Axis-controlled port
during the next Axis movement phase, and may be
intercepted while they do so.
27.214 If Axis units are adjacent to Suez, thereby
prohibiting SR (20.22), Allied fleets in Suez may
change base by moving off the board (to ports
elsewhere in East Africa), after which they must SR
to Basra, the India box or the South Africa box.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
CLARIFICATION: Developments in Ethiopia (Axis
variant 11) do not affect such movement.
27.22 Naval base changes are made after the staging
of air units and before the movement of ground
units.
27.221 Naval units have unlimited range on the
front on which they are based during both the
movement and combat phases, but they may not
move out of that front except by changing base to a
two-front port, or by SR during the SR phase.
CLARIFICATION: Copenhagen may be invaded by units
based in Baltic ports (27.431). If Germany invades from
Kiel, Russia may not intercept unless the invasion force
moves through at least one Eastern front sea hex.
27.23 Naval units may move through any water hex.
Naval units may move through part water hexsides,
without regard for whether the land portion of the
hex is controlled or occupied by enemy or neutral
forces, with the following restrictions:
27.231 Movement through or into the Suez canal is
prohibited if any land hex adjacent to the canal is
controlled by enemy forces or if the canal is
damaged (67.1, 67.3).
27.232 Movement through a strait containing a
crossing arrow is prohibited unless both land sides
of the strait are controlled by friendly (not neutral)
forces. Entry into a prohibited strait to carry out a
naval activity is permitted, provided the naval units
leave the strait on the same side they entered and
do not pass through.
EXAMPLE: Russia may not invade D35 if it does not
control Copenhagen.
CLARIFICATION: Naval activity between southern
Norway (including Oslo) and the Baltic is permitted only
if Copenhagen is under friendly control.
27.233 Naval units may only cross the front
boundary at Gibraltar by SR. SR is only permitted
past Gibraltar if it is controlled by friendly forces.
27.234 Naval units may not enter rivers.
27.235 Naval units may not move off board except
as expressly permitted by the rules.
46
EXAMPLE: Naval units in Gibraltar en route to Britain
may not avoid Axis air units in based in Vigo by moving
off board.
27.24 Naval units may not move or SR directly from
the Black Sea to the Baltic Sea, or vice versa.
27.25 THE U.S. BOX: Western Allied naval units may
change base to, but not from, the U.S. box during
the movement phase. Fleets in the U.S. box may
only relocate to a new base during the combat
phase (sea transport (27.422)) or the SR phase (as an
initial deployment (20.7)). Naval units moving to
and from the U.S. box enter and leave the board at
any west edge hex from A22 to EE1, inclusive.
During the SW deployment phase, fleets based in
the U.S. box may enter the SW box (42.461).
27.26 DISPLACED NAVAL UNITS: Naval units at
bases which are occupied by enemy ground units
are displaced to the nearest controlled port on the
same front with adequate basing capacity (owner’s
choice if two ports are equidistant), regardless of
the supply status of that port. If no such port exists,
the displaced naval units are eliminated.
27.261 Naval units in two-front ports (Gibraltar, Kiel
and Istanbul) which are displaced must move to the
nearest controlled port on whichever front is
selected by the owning player. This selection may
be made regardless of which front has the nearest
port. Allied naval units displaced from Suez
relocate to the South Africa box, Basra or Bushire
(67.4).
27.262 INTERCEPTION OF DISPLACED NAVAL UNITS:
The movement of displaced naval units to their
destination port may be intercepted by uninverted
enemy air and naval units. Displaced naval units
which survive enemy air and naval interception,
including naval units which are damaged or
withdraw from fleet combat, complete their
movement to their destination port, which is
considered their “port of origin” (since their actual
port of origin is no longer under friendly control).
Once fleet combat has concluded, displaced naval
units are no longer subject to interception by
enemy air units.
CLARIFICATION: Displaced naval units may withdraw
from combat after one round (26.4536), and thus are
practically subject to a single air attack while en route to
A3R rules rewrite v.3
their destination (unless they do not exercise their option
to withdraw).
27.263 Displaced naval units may operate normally
from their new port after their displacement. Such
naval units may change base during their player
turn, and if displaced to a two-front port, may
operate normally from that port.
27.27 For the purposes of air and naval
interception, naval movement through the Suez
canal passes through hexes MM30 and LL31.
27.3 EMPLOYMENT:
27.31 During any full game turn, fleets may perform
any one, but no more than one, of the following
functions:
27.311 Protect a sea supply route, regardless of
option selection (29.34).
27.312 Conduct an offensive mission (shore
bombardment, sea transport, or invasion) during an
offensive option or limited offensive operation in a
combat phase.
27.313 Intercept opposing naval units (during either
player’s turn). Unsuccessful attempts at
interception do not count as a naval function.
27.314 Perform sea escort or provide additional
protection for naval SRs (during the SR phase).
27.315 Escort a Murmansk convoy (during the SR
phase (37)).
27.316 Move to the SW box as a raider (German
fleets only (44.2)).
27.317 Intercept raiders moving to the SW box
(Allied fleets only (44.3)).
27.318 Operate in the SW box against German
submarines (Allied fleets only). While in the SW
box, Allied fleets may perform several additional
roles (20.843, 20.85, 42.461, 42.525, 44.41).
27.319 After performing any of the above functions,
the fleet counter is inverted until the end of the
current game turn.
27.32 A naval unit may change base during the
movement phase and still perform any one of the
above functions (EXCEPTION: Allied fleets operating
47
against German submarines must remain in the SW
box for the entire game turn). A naval unit which
has performed one of the above functions during
the movement or combat phase may still be SRed
during the SR phase. Fleets which provide sea
escort may also SR to the same port as the units or
BRPs they are carrying (27.64). Fleets which escort a
Murmansk convoy may not be SRed in that player
turn.
27.33 After the movement phase, a naval unit may
not change base again until the SR phase. Naval
units which leave their base during the combat
phase must return to that same base (EXCEPTION:
Sea transport (27.422)), as must any naval unit
which intercepts an enemy naval activity. In the
course of any one combat phase, a given naval unit
may not return to its base and leave again, nor
enter any other port more than once (except to
debark units in case of an aborted mission), nor
enter the sea portion of more than one hex targeted
for sea transport or invasion, (unless an alternate
route to its destination is unavailable) even though
it takes no action there. Naval units which change
base may not voluntarily return to their original
base during the same movement phase.
27.34 Naval units are inverted in their turn of
construction and may not perform any of the 27.31
functions during the game turn they are placed on
the board.
27.35 Naval units protecting sea supply (29.34)
move with the supply line they are protecting, then
return to their original port. This takes place
during the movement phase, after the movement of
naval units, or at the end of the combat phase.
Otherwise such naval units may not leave their base
unless they are SRed later in the turn.
27.36 RANGE: When determining the range of naval
units, their port hex is not counted as the first hex,
even though naval units are considered to enter the
water portion of their port hex for interception
purposes.
27.37 The restrictions of 27.23 governing the
movement of naval units also apply to naval units
carrying out other naval activities.
27.41 SHORE BOMBARDMENT:
27.411 Shore bombardment may be used during an
offensive option or limited offensive operation to
A3R rules rewrite v.3
support any invasion by ground units, or to support
a non-exploitation attack by ground units,
including dropped airborne units, against a coastal
fortress (Gibraltar, Malta, Leningrad, Sevastopol) or
a one-hex island. Shore bombardment may not be
used to support attacks other than as set out above,
or be used to support attacks across crossing arrows
unless the target hex is also a one-hex island (Scapa
Flow, one-hex Danish islands). The presence of an
enemy 9-factor fleet in the target hex does not
prevent the use of shore bombardment in a non-
invasion attack.
27.412 For every three fleet factors providing shore
bombardment, one combat factor is added to the
strength of the attacker’s ground units when
determining the odds for ground combat.
27.413 The total number of combat factors added to
a ground attack by shore bombardment may not
exceed three times the total number of attacking
ground factors involved in the attack. This
limitation is distinct from the limitation on ground
support from air units (26.422).
27.414 The attacker may combine ground support
from air units with shore bombardment to assist his
attacking ground units.
EXAMPLE: A 3-4 infantry unit invades a beach hex. No
more than 27 fleet factors may provide shore
bombardment (adding nine combat factors to the attack
(27.412)). An additional nine air factors could provide
ground support.
27.415 Fleets which provide shore bombardment
may be eliminated as a result of ground combat in
the same manner as any other units. However, for
every three fleet factors providing shore
bombardment, only one is removed to satisfy
ground combat losses, even after an “A” result. The
attacker may freely choose from among
participating ground, air and naval units when
satisfying ground combat loss requirements.
EXAMPLE: Two invading 3-4 infantry units and 36 fleet
factors providing shore bombardment (6 + 12 = 18) attack
a 2-5 armor unit on a beach hex (2x3 = 6) at 3:1 odds. If
an “Ex” result occurs, the defender loses his 2-5 armor
unit and the attacker loses both infantry units, or one
infantry unit and three fleet factors, or six fleet factors
(his choice). If the defender had a 3-3 infantry unit and a
1-3 infantry unit, the odds would be 18:12 = 1:1. If an “A”
48
result occurred, the attacker would lose his two infantry
units and 12 fleet factors. The other 24 fleet factors would
return to port. If an “Ex” result occurred, the attacker
could choose to lose both 3-4 infantry units and six fleet
factors, or one 3-4 infantry unit and nine fleet factors or
12 fleet factors.
27.4151 The provisions of 27.5715 (proportional
losses imposed on mixed nationality fleets) only
apply to fleet combat and do not affect losses taken
by bombarding fleets.
27.42 SEA TRANSPORT:
27.421 Fleets may sea transport ground and air
units from one controlled port to another
controlled port on the same front. Two fleet factors
are required to transport each ground or air factor
(EXCEPTION: Sea transport from the U.S. box
requires four fleet factors for each ground or air
factor (20.731)). A unit may not be sea transported
from one port to another, then sea transported
again from the new port.
27.422 Fleets need not be based at the port of
embarkation. During the combat phase, they may
move from their base to the port of embarkation,
then to the port of debarkation, then, if the moving
player wishes, back to their original base. A sea
transport mission may have more than one port of
embarkation, but only one port of debarkation.
Fleets carrying out sea transport may end the
combat phase in either their original base or in the
port of debarkation. Different ports of debarkation
require independent missions.
CLARIFICATION: Fleets may not conduct a sea transport
mission without embarking any ground or air units, in
order to move to the “port of debarkation.” But
undamaged, undefeated fleets may continue to the port
of debarkation even after enemy action has caused the
loss of all the units that they originally embarked.
27.4221 If fleets on a sea transport mission are
intercepted and defeated in fleet combat before
arriving at the port of embarkation, they return to
their original base. If interception and defeat in
fleet combat occurs after the embarkation of the
transported ground or air units, the transporting
fleets and the units they are carrying return to the
port of embarkation, the transported units debark,
and the transporting fleets return to their original
base. Subject to the normal rules of supply and
A3R rules rewrite v.3
front options, ground units incur the usual
movement factor cost for debarking (27.423) after a
failed sea transport, but otherwise may move and
attack normally. Air units which are forced to
return to their port of embarkation after a failed
sea transport are inverted.
27.423 GROUND UNITS: Ground units may move
their full movement factor during the player turn
in which they are sea transported. There is no
movement cost to embark, unless the port of
embarkation is in an enemy ZoC, in which case
there is a movement cost of two movement factors.
This applies even if the ground unit and the
transporting fleet begin the turn in the port of
embarkation. Ground units may overstack in the
port of embarkation. But if the sea transport
mission failed and the units did not have sufficient
movement capability to remedy the overstacking
after returning to the port of embarkation, some
units would be eliminated.
27.4231 DEBARKATION: Debarkation costs one
movement factor, whether or not the port of
debarkation is in an enemy ZoC. Therefore, ground
units which were unsupplied at the start of their
turn may not be sea transported. Ground units
which have not exhausted their movement factor
may move after debarkation. Ground units may
engage in combat after debarkation.
EXAMPLE: A 4-5 armor starts its turn next to a port. It
moves to the port hex (one movement factor), embarks
(no movement cost), and debarks at a distant port (one
movement factor). It may then spend three additional
movement factors to move from the port of debarkation
and may also attack. It may even conduct an overrun,
but only in conjunction with ground units sea
transported with the same mission as itself (14.871).
27.424 AIR UNITS: Air units may be sea transported.
The air unit must begin the player turn in the port
of embarkation. The port of debarkation is treated
as the air unit’s new base. A transported air unit
may not stage, either before or after sea transport.
Air units may not be transported into a port if the
transportation would result in an overstacking of
air factors in the port of debarkation. Transported
air units may fly four hexes from the port of
debarkation to conduct ground support or to
intercept defensive ground support. There is no
reduction in range to reflect the movement cost of
debarking, which only applies to ground units.
49
27.4241 Air units which have been sea transported
may only provide ground support or intercept
enemy defensive air support during the combat
phase in which they are transported. They may not
counterair, attack enemy naval units or carry out
any other missions.
27.425 All sea transport must be concluded prior to
the resolution of any ground combat.
27.426 Both ports of embarkation and debarkation
must have been under friendly control at the start
of the transporting player’s player turn.
27.427 Sea transport may not be used to land forces
on a bridgehead counter unless the bridgehead hex
also contains a port (EXCEPTION: Allied variant 22).
27.43 SEABORNE INVASIONS:
27.431 Invasions may be directed against any beach
hex, Gibraltar or any single hex white island.
Copenhagen and I31 may be invaded only by naval
units based in Baltic ports or Oslo. Ground units
defending against invasion receive a +1 DM, even if
simultaneously attacked from an adjacent land hex
or by airborne drop (15.23B).
27.432 No invasion may be carried out if the target
hex contains a 9-factor fleet, even if inverted, at the
moment of invasion. (EXCEPTIONS: 9-factor fleets
in Lorient or Famagusta do not prevent invasion, as
the beaches in those hexes are on a different
coastline from the ports). Air attacks against such a
9-factor fleet earlier in the combat phase could
reduce the fleet and allow the invasion. If no
ground units were in such a hex, an airborne drop
could drive the defending fleet out and permit
invasion, although this would prevent the
placement of a bridgehead counter because the
invader would control the invasion hex before the
actual invasion occurred (28.112). If the airborne
drop were not actually made, the invasion would be
aborted.
27.4321 If the target hex contains enemy naval
factors, but not a 9-factor fleet, invasion is
permitted and the enemy naval factors are
displaced to the nearest friendly port on the same
front if the invading ground units gain control of
the target hex (27.26). Prior to displacement, the
enemy naval factors may attempt interception
(27.5).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
27.4322 Seaborne invasions which involve naval
movement on either the Western or Eastern front
are prohibited during Winter turns. Usually this
will be the front which contains the target hex of
the invasion, but not always. Winter invasions of
T10 (in Portugal) and Casablanca are prohibited,
while a winter invasion of U19 (in southern France)
is allowed (since the fleets would move through the
Mediterranean front to reach the beach hex).
27.433 Three fleet factors are required to carry each
invading ground factor, provided the invasion hex
is no more than seven hexes by sea from a fully
supplied port controlled by the invading side at the
beginning of his player turn. The port need not be
used in the invasion - it need only exist. If no such
port exists, six fleet factors are required to carry
each invading ground factor. Invasions from the
U.S. box always require six fleet factors to carry
each invading ground factor, regardless of the
presence of a friendly port (20.732). Air factors may
not be carried by invading fleets.
EXAMPLE: If the Allies control and were able to trace a
sea supply line to Malta, three fleet factors would be
required to carry each ground factor for an invasion of
CC26 (in Albania), as CC26 is seven hexes by sea from
Malta. Six fleet factors would be required to carry each
ground factor for an invasion of W24 (in the Adriatic).
27.4331 Any number of ground units may
participate in an invasion, up to the capacity of the
invading fleets, but no more than two of those
ground units may initially attack the target hex by
sea. Airborne units which drop on the target hex
and ground units adjacent to the target hex by land
may join with the invading forces in attacking the
beach hex. The invading units may receive shore
bombardment factors from any excess naval factors
not carrying ground units; they may also receive
ground support from any air units within range
(26.42).
27.4332 If fleets which originally had been carrying
invading ground units incur losses from
intercepting enemy air or naval units which result
in the loss of one or more ground units, any excess
fleet factors may be used for shore bombardment to
support an invasion by surviving ground units.
27.434 Invading ground units must start their turn
in a fully supplied port. Unlike ground units which
are sea transported, they may not move to the port
50
of embarkation. The invading fleets must start the
combat phase in the port of embarkation. Fleets
may change base to the port of embarkation during
the movement phase of the turn of invasion.
27.435 If at least one of the invading ground units is
an armor unit that participates in invasion combat,
and at least one initially attacking unit survives to
occupy the invasion hex, a breakthrough may be
achieved on the invasion hex. Additional armor
units in reserve aboard the invasion fleet could
then exploit. Armor units adjacent to the invasion/
breakthrough hex may also exploit, but only if the
invasion hex had also been attacked by land in
combination with the invasion. In this case, the
required armor unit may come from either the
invasion force or the adjacent land units.
Breakthrough and exploitation from an invasion
hex is allowed even if the invasion hex was
undefended (15.9).
27.436 Invading ground units that attack the target
hex and survive the ensuing combat must occupy
the invasion hex. If the target hex was enemy-
controlled and the invasion succeeds (at least one
initially attacking ground unit survives and lands),
a bridgehead counter may be placed (28.11). Ground
units aboard the invasion fleet which did not
participate in the attack may then be placed on the
bridgehead, up to the five-unit stacking limit. If the
target hex contained no enemy ground units,
success is automatic and a bridgehead counter may
be placed (EXCEPTION: Invasions of friendly hexes
(28.112)).
27.4361 If the attacker is unable to occupy the
invasion hex with a ground unit which engaged in
invasion combat, all additional ground units
waiting to land must return to port. In addition,
these units have the option to return to port even
when the invasion succeeds.
27.437 The attacker may not take exchange losses
from embarked units which did not participate in
his initial attack or from fleets carrying the
invasion force, nor does he lose them to an 'A'
result. Exchange losses may be taken from fleets
providing shore bombardment (27.415).
27.438 REINFORCING A BRIDGEHEAD: A bridgehead
hex which does not contain a port may not be
reinforced by SR by sea or by sea transport
(EXCEPTION: Allied variant 22). The attacker could
A3R rules rewrite v.3
reinforce such a bridgehead with ground units by
conducting invasions into the hex in subsequent
turns. Air units may SR by air into such a
bridgehead and an airbase could be constructed in,
but not SRed into, the hex.
27.5 INTERCEPTION:
27.51 When a player undertakes any naval activity,
the opposing player may attempt to intercept with
any of his naval units based on the same front.
Naval activity includes attempted sea supply (with
or without protecting naval units), movement of
naval units during the movement phase (base
changes), missions during the combat phase, SRs by
sea (of units, BRPs and naval units themselves),
movement of raiders to the SW box and
interceptions of enemy naval activities.
Interceptions may not be attempted unless the
countries involved are already at war; a player may
not declare war during his opponent’s turn in order
to intercept.
CLARIFICATION: German air and naval units in the
Murmansk box may not intercept Allied naval activity on
the Western front.
27.52 Whenever the defender requests, the attacker
must indicate the exact course of hexes taken by
fleets carrying out a naval activity. The defender
then may select a hex in which he will attempt to
intercept that activity. He may select the hex in
which the attacker’s naval units are based (since
they enter the water portion of that hex as soon as
they leave port), the destination hex, or any
intermediate hex.
27.521 Naval activity from or into a two-front port
(Gibraltar, Kiel and Istanbul) may only be
intercepted on the front in which the activity
occurs. For interception purposes, a two-front port
is treated as being on one front or the other,
depending upon the use being made of it.
EXAMPLE: Fleets changing base from Gibraltar to
Britain could be intercepted by fleets based on the
Western front, but not by fleets based in the
Mediterranean. Fleets conducting sea transport from
Alexandria to Gibraltar could only be intercepted by
fleets based in the Mediterranean.
27.53 Naval interception of a given naval force may
be attempted at only one point along the route
51
selected by that naval force to carry out its naval
activity.
EXCEPTION: A naval unit which SRs across a front
boundary may be intercepted separately on each front.
Thus, an SR from Britain to Gibraltar is considered to be
distinct from the continued SR of the same naval force
from Gibraltar to Egypt and an interception attempt is
permitted on each leg. Note that each interception will
result in a separate fleet battle, even if both were made
in the Gibraltar hex.
27.531 Each time a naval force attempts to carry out
a naval activity, it may be intercepted, even if some
or all of it has been intercepted earlier in the same
turn while carrying out a different naval activity. A
naval force which joins with other naval units in
the course of a single naval activity creates a new
naval force, which is subject to naval interception
even if some or all of its components were
intercepted before they combined. However, if a
naval force sails to a port containing a second naval
force in order to combine into a new naval force in
that port hex, the naval force which remained in
port until the first naval force arrived may not be
intercepted separately. Naval forces may thus be
picked up without being subject to interception
until they have joined the combined force.
EXAMPLE: Italian fleets sail independently from
Taranto, Tripoli and Tobruk, rendezvous south of Crete,
and proceed on their mission. The Allies could attempt
three different interceptions against the three groups
prior to their rendezvous, or one interception afterward.
Had the Italians combined their fleets by sailing the
Taranto fleet to Tripoli, then both fleets to Tobruk, then
all three fleets on their mission, the Allies could have
intercepted the Taranto fleet, and/or the combined
Taranto and Tripoli fleets, and/or all three fleets, but the
Tripoli and Tobruk fleets could not have been intercepted
separately. To be clear, the Allies could have intercepted
the Taranto fleet and then separately intercepted the
combined Taranto/Tripoli fleet as it sailed to Tobruk.
CLARIFICATION: Fleet waiting to be picked up may
continue the mission even if the first naval force is
defeated and turned back.
EXAMPLE: Italian fleets based in Taranto sail to
Messina, carrying an infantry unit, and intending to join
with other fleets and ground units in Messina and invade
Malta. The British intercept and defeat the Taranto fleet
A3R rules rewrite v.3
before it reaches Messina. The units in Messina may still
invade Malta.
27.532 The defender’s air units may attack the
attacker’s naval units at any hex or hexes along
their route, including a hex where naval
interception occurs. If air and naval interception
occur in the same hex, one air sortie is resolved
before each round of fleet combat (26.4534).
27.54 Fleets may be broken down into smaller units
prior to interception attempts. Naval units based in
the same hex may attempt separate interceptions
against different enemy targets, but may attempt
only one interception against the same enemy
target. Some naval units may be held back to
combat enemy counter-interception (27.56). If
naval units from more than one base attempt to
intercept the same enemy target, they must select a
common hex at which interception will be
attempted.
CLARIFICATION: All fleets based at the same port,
regardless of nationality, may only make one attempt to
intercept the same enemy naval activity.
27.541 If two or more naval activities originate in
the same port, and the defender intercepts in that
hex, all naval activities are intercepted and a single
naval battle takes place between the intercepting
force and the naval forces involved in the naval
activities. Similarly, if two or more naval forces
combine in a target hex, interception in that hex
results in a single battle between the intercepting
force and all the attacking forces in the target hex.
The same concept applies when two or more naval
activities are attacked by air units at the origin or
the target hexes.
EXAMPLE: Three British submarines intercept sea
supply to Libya, and two British submarines intercept
sea supply to Sardinia. Five Italian air factors attack the
British submarines as they leave Malta (64.42) and
achieve a “1/3” result. Both losses and damage are
allocated as equally as possible between the two forces,
with the larger force receiving any remnant. The
determination of “larger force” is made at the outset and
again after eliminated factors are removed. Thus, the
Libya mission loses one factor, leaving both forces with
an equal number of factors. The British player then
chooses the force that will have two factors damaged.
52
27.542 If two naval activities cross paths in a single
hex, they are considered to have passed through
the hex at different times. A single interception in
that hex may be directed against either naval
activity, but not both. If the defender wished to
intercept both naval activities, he would have to
intercept each naval activity separately and fight
two separate naval battles.
27.543 If two naval activities trace a path with more
than one contiguous hex in common, any
interception in such a common hex results in the
interception of both naval activities and a single
naval battle. If the defender wished to intercept
only one of the naval activities, he must select an
interception hex which contained only the naval
activity he wished to intercept.
EXCEPTIONS: Naval SRs (20.23) are sequential and must
be intercepted separately, except that the moving player
may allow SRs to the same destination to proceed
together for protection, in which case these missions are
intercepted together. See also sea escort (27.623). Raiders
(44.23) also move separately and must be intercepted
individually even if moving from a double port.
27.55 The moving player must indicate all naval
base changes he will make before the defender
decides whether and where to attempt
interception. Similarly, during the combat phase,
the attacker must announce all naval missions he
will undertake, including the destination of each
mission and which ground units, if any, are aboard
his fleets, before the defender makes any
interception decisions. All naval SRs which are
subject to interception are handled in the same
manner (20.23). All interception attempts must be
declared before any die rolls are made.
27.551 NAVAL INTERCEPTIONS AND AIR ATTACKS:
The defender announces and commits to naval
interceptions before resolving any air attacks
against the attacker’s naval activities. If the
attacker’s naval force turns back after undergoing
air attack, the defender’s intercepting naval force
does not engage the attacker’s naval activity,
returns to port and is inverted.
27.56 COUNTER-INTERCEPTIONS: The foregoing
does not prevent the attacker from attempting to
counter-intercept the defender’s intercepting naval
units with his own uncommitted naval units. A
naval unit is considered to be uncommitted if it is
A3R rules rewrite v.3
uninverted and is not engaging in the type of naval
activity being carried out at that stage of the turn.
Thus a naval unit that changed base this turn
cannot counter-intercept an enemy naval unit
which intercepts another base change.
27.561 Counter-interception takes place before the
defender’s naval units complete their interception.
Counter-interceptions are carried out in the same
manner as interceptions. If counter-interception
takes place in the hex selected by the defender for
his interception, only the counter-intercepting
naval units would engage in fleet combat with the
intercepting naval units. The naval units being
intercepted would not join in this naval battle. If
the intercepting naval units defeat the counter-
intercepting naval units, they may move to the
interception hex and engage the intercepted naval
units or abort the interception and return to port,
at the owning player’s option.
27.562 Counter-interceptions may be made by naval
units belonging to allies of the nation conducting
the intercepted naval activity, regardless of the
option the ally selected on that front. Uncommitted
air units belonging to the nation conducting the
intercepted naval activity or an ally, if in range,
may attack the intercepting naval units, regardless
of front options.
27.563 All air and naval counter-interceptions are
announced after the defender has made all
interception die rolls, but before any naval battles
resulting from successful interception have been
resolved. Fleet combat is resolved in inverse order.
The naval units sailing last resolve their
interceptions, including fleet combat, first.
27.564 Theoretically, a defender who has held back
naval units could counter-counter-intercept the
attacker’s counter-interceptors, and so on, until
one player or the other had no more uncommitted
naval units.
27.565 NAVAL INTERCEPTION TABLE: To determine
whether a naval interception succeeds, the
defender counts the hexes along his chosen route,
from his naval base(s) to the interception hex, not
counting his port hex. The success or failure of
naval interceptions is determined by rolling one die
for each intercepting force and consulting the
appropriate row of the Naval Interception Table.
53
CLARIFICATION: Uninverted French air factors always
modify British interception rolls (and vice versa)
regardless of Anglo-French cooperation limits (49.56). But
Russian and Western Allied air units do not modify each
others’ naval interception rolls.
CLARIFICATION: Air units assigned to defensive air
support modify interception die rolls. Air units assigned
to ground support are committed by the time counter-
interception die rolls are made and do not modify
counter-interception die rolls.
27.566 Naval units which fail to intercept are not
subject to counter-interception by enemy air or
naval units, are not inverted and may be used for
other purposes during the remainder of the game
turn, but they may not again try to intercept during
the current phase. A fleet which failed to intercept
an enemy base change could thus attempt to
intercept enemy fleet activity during the ensuing
combat or SR phases.
27.567 Naval units which have been committed to
intercept an enemy naval force, but do not engage
in combat because the enemy naval force was
eliminated or aborted its naval activity as a result of
an earlier interception, are considered to have
engaged in combat and are inverted. Similarly, air
units which have been committed to interception
but discontinue their attack for whatever reason
are inverted.
27.568 Naval units based in the U.S. box are
considered to be at maximum distance for
interception attempts.
27.569 If Britain and France both wish to intercept
the same enemy naval activity while Anglo-French
cooperation restrictions are in effect (49.47), the
player with more fleet factors on the front in
question prevails. The same applies to interceptions
by the Western Allies and Russia (50).
27.57 FLEET COMBAT: If interception succeeds, fleet
combat occurs.
27.571 FLEET COMBAT TABLE: Fleet combat consists
of one or more combat rounds. In each round of
fleet combat, each side rolls two dice and consults
the Fleet Combat Table. Each side’s fleet combat
dice roll is modified by the nationality of the naval
units engaged and the nature of the defender’s
naval activity. The number before the slash
indicates the number of enemy fleet factors which
A3R rules rewrite v.3
are eliminated. The number after the slash
indicates the number of enemy fleet factors which
are damaged and return to their port of origin.
CLARIFICATION: If a force consisting of two factors
suffers a 1/2 result, one factor is eliminated and one
factor is damaged. Additional damage is ignored.
EXAMPLE: 16 Italian fleets engage 12 British fleets. The
Italians roll two dice and consult the 16-18 row of the
Fleet Combat Table. The British roll two dice and consult
the 10-12 row of the Fleet Combat Table. The Italians
subtract two from their dice roll, and the British add two
to theirs (to reflect the nationality difference). If the
British were conducting an invasion when interception
and fleet combat occurred, the Italians would only
subtract one and the British would only add one.
27.5711 Fleet combat dice rolls are made
simultaneously. The size of the forces engaged is
calculated before any losses are incurred.
27.5712 DRMs are applied to fleet combat according
to the nationality of the respective combatants.
[See the Naval Nationality Table]
27.5713 Fleets conducting sea transport or invasion
missions (including fleets intended for escort or
shore bombardment), protecting sea supply,
providing sea escort or escorting a Murmansk
convoy receive a -1 DRM on their fleet combat dice
roll, and their opponents receive a +1 DRM on their
fleet combat dice roll.
CLARIFICATION: The modifier applies even if the fleets
have not yet embarked any units.
27.5714 Eliminated naval factors are immediately
removed from the board. Damaged naval factors
return to their port of origin, are repaired
automatically at no BRP cost (27.84) and are
inverted. A player also may abort the naval activity
of some or all of his force at the end of each combat
round. Aborting naval units, whether damaged or
undamaged, are not subject to enemy air or naval
interception. Neither are naval units which have
completed their activity.
27.5715 Fleet losses from a force of mixed
nationality must be distributed equally among the
nationalities involved, with any remnant loss which
cannot be divided equally being taken by the
nationality having the most factors involved or, if
54
equal factors were involved, the nationality in the
lower category (a die roll if tied). British
submarines based in Malta (64.4) are treated in the
same manner. If engaged in fleet combat in
combination with Allied fleets, losses are split
equally between the submarines and the fleets.
Eliminated and damaged factors are apportioned
separately. Apportionment is carried out at the end
of each round of fleet combat.
CLARIFICATION: In the case of two different naval
activities that have engaged in combat together (27.543),
each of which contains multiple nationalities, losses are
divided equally between the two activities first, then
between the nationalities in each force.
27.5716 Losses are also proportioned equally
between inverted and uninverted fleet factors.
27.572 Intercepting or counter-intercepting naval
units (but not naval units which are intercepted
while carrying out a naval activity) may break off
combat without making a fleet combat dice roll.
Such fleets are subject to one enemy fleet combat
dice roll, and the losses they incur are halved
(round fractions up).
27.573 ADDITIONAL ROUNDS OF FLEET COMBAT:
After the first round of fleet combat is concluded, a
second round of fleet combat occurs if neither side
withdraws. A player may elect to fight another
round of fleet combat if allowed to do so by the
Fleet Staying Power Table.
EXAMPLE: If Britain and Italy engage in fleet combat,
and the Italians lose the first round, they must withdraw
and the fleet battle ends. If the British lose the first round
of fleet combat, they may elect to remain and fight
another round.
CLARIFICATION: If German and Italian fleets are
fighting as allies in the same fleet battle and they lose the
first round of fleet combat, the Italians go back to port,
but the Germans may stay for a second round of fleet
combat if they wish.
27.5731 The losing side in a round of fleet combat is
the side which had more fleet factors eliminated.
(EXCEPTION: If one side is completely eliminated or
damaged, it loses regardless of the losses inflicted
on the opposing force.) Damaged fleet factors are
taken into account only if both sides had the same
number of fleet factors eliminated. If both sides had
the same number of fleet factors eliminated and
A3R rules rewrite v.3
damaged, the round is a draw and both sides may
elect to fight another round of fleet combat. Losses
from air attacks are not considered when
determining the loser in fleet combat.
27.5732 After each round of fleet combat, either
side may voluntarily withdraw. The loser of the
previous round of fleet combat announces his
intention first (the moving player in the event of a
tie). If a player withdraws from fleet combat, he is
considered to have lost the fleet battle (27.574).
CLARIFICATION: If two naval forces engaged in distinct
activities combine for fleet combat (27.543), one force
may voluntarily withdraw while the other remains for a
second round of fleet combat.
27.5733 No additional units may join in a fleet
combat during subsequent rounds (EXCEPTION:
Murmansk convoys (37.551)). Air units which have
intercepted fleets in a hex in which fleet combat is
occurring may make one air sortie immediately
before the start of each round of fleet combat
(26.4534).
27.574 CONCLUDING FLEET COMBAT: The loser of a
fleet battle is the side which withdrew from the
battle or was completely eliminated. A player may
lose one, or possibly more than one, round of fleet
combat and still emerge as the winner in a fleet
battle, provided his forces had the staying power to
continue fighting (27.573). The loser of a fleet battle
must immediately return to port; any activity in
which it may have been involved and not yet
accomplished is canceled for that turn. Naval units
which were attempting a base change return to
their original base, but are not inverted and may
operate without impairment from that base if
otherwise able to do so.
27.575 After the resolution of fleet combat,
surviving intercepting naval forces return to port
and are inverted. A victorious intercepted force
may continue its naval activity or choose to abort
that activity and return to its port(s). In this case,
victorious fleets conducting a mission or protecting
sea supply would be inverted after they abort, but
fleets changing base or SRing would not.
27.576 When a naval force carrying ground or air
units returns to port, either because it lost a naval
battle or because it chose to abort its naval activity,
the ground and air units must be landed at that
55
port. Any overstacking that results from such a
return to port must be remedied by the end of the
player’s SR phase, or the excess units are
eliminated. Such overstacking of naval units results
in the immediate elimination of the excess naval
units, as they may not attempt a second SR during
that SR phase (20.82).
27.577 If interception and fleet combat or air
attacks reduce the number of fleet factors involved
in sea transport, invasion or the sea escort of units
or BRPs below the number required, the excess
units/BRPs are immediately eliminated as
necessary to reflect the naval force’s reduced
carrying capacity. Damaged fleet factors are not
counted when determining a naval force’s carrying
capacity. The units/BRPs may not be saved by
aborting the activity, and the units/BRPs are lost
even if the naval losses were incurred in a port of
embarkation or a destination hex. Air units may be
broken down to accept losses.
27.6 SEA ESCORT:
27.61 Fleet factors must provide sea escort for
ground units, BRP grants or, in some cases, air units
(20.31) that SR across water (EXCEPTIONS: Crossing
arrows, initial deployments and American BRP
grants to Britain and France).
27.62 For each ground or air factor SRed across
water, two undamaged fleet factors are required for
sea escort. A 1-3 infantry unit thus requires two
fleet factors; and a 5-6 armor unit requires ten fleet
factors.
27.621 For every two BRPs SRed across water, one
undamaged fleet factor is required for sea escort
(EXCEPTION: American BRP grants to Britain and
France (20.611)).
27.622 Naval SRs, including initial deployments and
BRP grants, may be intercepted (20.8) (EXCEPTIONS:
Initial deployments to the South Africa box (Allied
variant 18) and American BRP grants to Britain and
France (20.61)). If the number of fleet factors
providing sea escort for a ground or air unit drops
below that required (27.62), the unit is eliminated.
If the number of fleet factors providing sea escort
for a BRP grant drops below that required (27.621),
two BRPs are eliminated for each missing fleet
factor. Special rules apply to Murmansk convoys
(37).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
27.623 A player may, at no SR cost, assign more
than the required minimum number of fleet factors
to sea escort, in order to increase the chances of
successfully completing the SR. Fleets which
provide such additional protection for naval SRs
must be based in the same port as the fleets they
are protecting (EXCEPTION: Murmansk convoys
(37.2)) and are inverted at the end of the SR phase.
27.624 Units and BRPs being sea escorted must be
able to SR by land to the port in which the sea
escorting fleets are based at the start of the SR
phase.
27.63 Fleets used for sea escort may not be used for
any other purpose during the same game turn,
although they may change base during the
movement phase prior to providing sea escort.
EXAMPLE: A British 3-4 infantry unit is in Bergen. The
Allied player wishes to SR the unit from Norway to
Britain. At least six British fleet factors are required for
sea escort. If these fleet factors are based in Britain at the
start of the SR phase, they can SR to Bergen, but cannot
provide sea escort for the infantry unit in Bergen until
the following turn. Planning ahead, the British might
have moved the required fleet factors to Bergen during
the movement phase, then used them for sea escort that
same turn. If German fleets intercept the sea escort of the
infantry unit and win the resulting fleet combat, the
infantry unit would remain in Bergen (unless the British
had fewer than six surviving fleet factors, in which case
the infantry unit would be eliminated regardless of who
won the fleet combat).
27.64 Fleets which provide sea escort may
themselves be SRed, but only to the same
destination as the units or BRPs they are escorting.
Fleets conducting sea escort may thus end the SR
phase either in the port in which they were based at
the start of the SR phase or in the port to which the
units or BRPs they were sea escorting are SRed. In
the latter case, the cost of SRing the fleets, as well
as the units or BRPs, is counted against the owning
major power’s SR capacity.
27.65 Fleets providing sea escort may not leave
their front, but a chain of sea escort is allowed.
Thus one fleet may provide sea escort for a unit
SRing from Britain to Gibraltar, while a Gibraltar-
based fleet provides sea escort through the
Mediterranean. This counts as a single SR against
the SRing major power’s SR capacity, even though
56
two fleets took part in the SR. Kiel and Istanbul may
also serve as front-to-front transfer points.
EXAMPLE: At the cost of one SR, a British ground unit
could deploy from Port Said to Marseilles, then overland
from Marseilles to Brest, and then continue by sea from
Brest to Plymouth. This SR would need sea escort fleets in
both Port Said and Brest. If the SR were turned back on
the Brest-to-Plymouth leg, the unit would abort back to
Brest, not Port Said.
27.66 Hostile units in hexes adjacent to Gibraltar do
not prohibit the SR/sea escort of units through,
into or out of Gibraltar. Naval units, whether
providing sea escort or being themselves moved by
SR, may not move through the Turkish Straits
unless both sides of both crossing arrows are under
friendly control. Similarly, naval SRs are not
permitted from the North Sea or Oslo into the Baltic
unless Copenhagen is under friendly control.
Otherwise, enemy ground units and hex control do
not bar naval SRs except through crossing arrows,
although SR by sea could not terminate in a hex
adjacent to enemy units.
27.67 The sea escort portion of an SR must begin
and end in supplied, controlled ports (EXCEPTIONS:
A fleet based elsewhere on that front may SR
ground and air units into and out of controlled
islands without ports, but only if the island is not
connected to another body of land by a crossing
arrow. This exception does not apply to non-island
areas without ports. Allied variant 22 allows SRs
into and out of bridgeheads).
27.7 PARTIAL NAVAL COUNTERS:
27.71 Naval counters may be broken down into
smaller counters of the same nationality at any
time during play, including during an opponent’s
player turn. Similarly, smaller counters may be
recombined into larger ones at any time. The
number of partial naval counters available in the
game do not prevent fleets from breaking down.
27.72 A player may never have more naval factors
in play than are contained in his force pool. Subject
to this limitation, a player may construct partial
naval counters.
27.73 A player may begin a scenario with his naval
units broken down into partial naval counters.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
27.74 Although a major power may have as many
partial naval counters in play as it wishes, naval
counters in the same hex must be combined at the
end of their owner’s player turn if the opposing
player finds the unnecessary partial naval counters
distracting.
27.75 Fleet counters of the same nationality in the
same hex, up to nine factors, count as one unit for
all purposes, including SR. Partial fleet counters on
different hexes count as one unit apiece. Wherever
rules require a “9-factor fleet”, this refers to nine
fleet factors belonging to the same nationality, as
the partial fleet counters could be combined into a
single, 9-factor fleet counter.
EXAMPLE: A stack consisting of six, two and one factor
fleet counters of the same nationality could combine into
a 9-factor fleet, but four Spanish and five Italian fleet
factors would not act as a 9-factor fleet even if they were
based in the same port and would not prevent an enemy
invasion (27.432).
27.76 A player may conduct naval missions without
actually breaking down his naval units, by
announcing the missions of his naval factors. If the
opposing player wishes, however, the moving
player must break down his naval units in order to
ensure the accuracy of his calculations.
27.8 CONSTRUCTION:
27.81 When a 9-factor fleet is available as an
allowable build, a player may choose to construct
some or all of the available fleet factors. Each fleet
factor costs three BRPs to build.
27.82 Naval units may only be constructed in naval
bases, as indicated on the mapboard by an anchor
symbol. Apart from the normal rules governing unit
construction, there are no restrictions on the
number of fleet factors which may be constructed
in a single turn from allowable builds. The
reconstruction of fleet factors lost in combat,
however, is limited by the reconstruction ability of
the various naval bases, as below:
Germany (Kiel/Hamburg): 2
Italy (Trieste or Genoa): 1
France (Lorient or Marseilles): 1
Russia (Leningrad or Sevastopol): 1
Britain (Rosyth): 2 + (Canada): 1
US (1942 or earlier): 3 (1943+): 4
57
27.83 All naval units are placed on the board
immediately upon construction or reconstruction.
27.84 REPAIR OF DAMAGED FLEETS: Damaged fleets
are automatically repaired, at no BRP cost
immediately after they return to port at the
conclusion of the air and fleet combat which caused
the damage. After repair, damaged naval units are
treated in the same manner as newly constructed
naval units. They remain inverted for the
remainder of the turn, but can be SRed and are
taken into account in determining whether enemy
invasion of their hex is possible. Any number of
damaged naval factors may be repaired each turn.
Such repairs do not count against the
reconstruction limits in 27.82.
EXAMPLE: British fleets based in Malta intercept an
Italian invasion of Malta. Several damaged British fleet
factors return to Malta, and the Italian invasion
succeeds. The British fleets are displaced normally (27.26)
because they were repaired immediately upon their
return to Malta.
27.85 Turkish, Spanish, Vichy French, Swedish and
Free French naval units may be repaired if
damaged, but may never be rebuilt once eliminated.
28. BRIDGEHEADS
28.1 Each major power is provided with a specified
number of bridgehead counters (28.3). A bridgehead
counter may be placed on the following hexes:
28.11 INVASIONS: A beach hex occupied by a
successful seaborne invasion, provided the
following conditions are met:
28.111 The hex was occupied by a surviving,
attacking seaborne invading unit or an airborne
unit dropped on the hex in conjunction with a
seaborne invasion; and
28.112 The hex was controlled by a hostile major
power or minor country when invaded, whether or
not it contained a defending unit; or was a friendly
hex the invader could not possibly fully supply
during the initial supply determination phase of his
player turn. A partially-supplied hex would qualify
because the placement of a bridgehead counter
provides unlimited supply (29.218). A bridgehead
may not be placed for supply purposes in a supply
zone (29.332) which contained a hex which was
capable of receiving sea supply during the
A3R rules rewrite v.3
preceding initial supply determination phase, even
if the presence of enemy air and naval units made
such sea supply a practical impossibility.
28.12 RIVER CROSSINGS: A river or crossing arrow
hex successfully occupied by attack during an
offensive option or limited offensive operation,
provided no attacking units were already across the
river or crossing arrow adjacent to the hex in
question (EXCEPTION: Dropped airborne units). A
bridgehead counter may be placed in Maginot or
West Wall hexes if all the non-airborne attacking
units were on the other side of the Rhine.
Bridgeheads may thus be placed when the
defending units received a +1 DM for the river or
crossing arrow, or where they failed to receive this
+1 DM only because they were simultaneously
attacked by dropped airborne units.
28.13 OVERRUNS: A hex entered as a result of an
overrun (14.8), provided the overrun was conducted
across a river or crossing arrow. In this situation, a
bridgehead counter may be placed on the board
immediately after the conclusion of the overrun.
28.2 The attacker places the bridgehead counter on
the board immediately upon the post-combat
advance of his first ground unit into an eligible hex.
He may then continue to advance other eligible
units into the bridgehead hex, up to the bridgehead
stacking limit. An attacker who chooses not to place
a bridgehead counter in an eligible hex may not
later change his mind and place one there.
28.3 NATIONALITY: Each major power is provided
with bridgehead counters as follows: Germany,
Britain and the U.S.: 3; Russia: 2; Italy and France: 1.
In addition to the requirements set out in 28.1, a
major power may place one of its bridgehead
counters on the board only if at least one of the
surviving attacking units which entered or
occupied the defender’s hex belonged to that major
power or one of its minor allies or associated minor
countries. Lent Italian units may place either a
German or Italian bridgehead.
28.4 REMOVAL OF BRIDGEHEAD COUNTERS: A
bridgehead counter may be removed whenever the
player who placed it desires, even if to switch the
bridgehead counter for use on another hex. A
player may await the outcome of combat or an
impending invasion before removing an existing
bridgehead.
58
28.41 A bridgehead counter must be removed when:
A. The hex it occupies comes under enemy control.
B. It is not fully supplied at the end of any post-
combat supply determination phase following the
turn in which it is placed.
C. No enemy units are within four hexes of it by
land at the end of the owner’s player turn, and its
removal would not worsen the owning player’s
supply situation.
28.5 STACKING: Up to five ground units (plus an
airborne) may occupy a bridgehead. (EXCEPTION:
More than five armor units may occupy a
bridgehead during the combat phase if it is also a
breakthrough hex (15.7)). Only two ground units
may attack out of a bridgehead (EXCEPTIONS:
Airborne, British in London). All five are counted if
in contact with the enemy during an attrition
option. If a bridgehead is adjacent to two fronts,
some of the units may make an offensive attack on
one front while the remainder are counted for
attrition on the other front. All five defend against
enemy offensive attacks; all five counterattack if
required.
28.51 After a beachhead is removed, units still
overstacked at the end of the owner’s player turn
are eliminated. The owner chooses the units which
are eliminated.
28.6 Bridgeheads may not be selected for attrition
occupation (16.5). Infantry and replacement units
defending in bridgeheads are not subject to a
negative DM when attacked by exploiting armor
(15.24A).
28.7 A bridgehead placed by seaborne invasion is an
unlimited supply source during the post-combat
supply determination phase of the player turn in
which it is placed (29.218).
LOGISTICS
29. SUPPLY
29.1 OVERVIEW:
29.11 All units require supply. Units which are not
supplied have their abilities impaired and may face
elimination (29.5).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
29.12 Hexes also must be supplied to allow unit and
airbase construction, the basing of air and naval
units and SR (29.61).
29.13 Supply is traced from supply sources, along a
land and/or sea supply line, to the units or hexes
being supplied (29.3). Some supply sources are
unlimited and may supply units of any type, while
others are limited and may only supply certain
types of units (29.2).
29.14 The supply status of units and hexes is
determined twice during each player turn (29.4).
Initial supply determination takes place during the
movement phase, after the movement of air and
naval units, but before the movement of ground
units (29.42). Post-combat supply determination
takes place during the post-combat adjustment
phase, immediately before unit construction
(29.43).
29.15 Units which are out of supply are isolated.
Hexes which are out of supply are unsupplied. Both
units and hexes may be partially supplied if they
are able to draw supply from a limited supply
source.
29.16 Units which are isolated at the end of the
initial supply determination phase may not move or
carry out missions during the movement and
combat phase of their player turn. Ground units,
airbases and bridgeheads which are still isolated at
the end of the post-combat supply determination
phase are eliminated. Air and naval units are never
eliminated because of isolation.
29.2 SUPPLY SOURCES:
29.21 UNLIMITED SUPPLY SOURCES:
29.211 An unlimited supply source is capable of
supplying all types of units.
29.212 Berlin and Rome are unlimited supply
sources for all Axis units. If Axis variant 1 is played,
Famagusta is an unlimited supply source for all Axis
units. If Axis variant 25 is played, Berchtesgaden is
an unlimited supply source for Axis units.
29.213 London, Paris, Suez, Basra and Bushire (if the
Persian BRP route has been activated (38.2)) are
unlimited supply sources for all Western Allied
units.
59
29.2131 Gibraltar is an unlimited supply source only
for all Western Allied units in Gibraltar.
29.214 The U.S., South Africa, India and Siberia
boxes are unlimited supply sources for all units in
them. Sea supply may be traced from the U.S. box to
Western Allied units in Europe even if the U.S. is
not at war with the Axis.
29.215 Moscow and the playable Russian hexes
along the eastern edge of the board between D64
and Z53, inclusive, are an unlimited supply source
for Russian and Russian minor country units.
29.2151 All Russian-controlled ICs are unlimited
supply sources only for Russian and Russian minor
country units in them (34.5).
29.216 While a major power is conquered, its capital
is no longer an unlimited supply source (29.222). If
the major power re-enters the war, its capital
resumes its supply source status.
29.217 An unconquered minor country capital is an
unlimited supply source for all the units of that
minor country, but is only a limited supply source
for units belonging to other countries, including a
major power ally (29.223).
29.218 A bridgehead placed by seaborne invasion is
an unlimited supply source during the post-combat
supply determination phase of the player turn in
which it is placed (28.7). Bridgeheads do not act as
supply sources in subsequent turns, although a sea
supply line may be traced through a bridgehead
(29.33).
29.22 LIMITED SUPPLY SOURCES:
29.221 A limited supply source is a supply source
which is capable of supplying only the infantry
component of ground units. A limited supply source
is incapable of supplying air and naval units or the
mechanized or airborne portion of ground units.
29.222 The capital of a major power which has been
conquered is a limited supply source for units of the
major power which controls it, all minor countries
controlled by that major power and all allied major
powers and their minor countries (EXCEPTION:
Moscow (29.262)).
29.223 A minor country capital is a limited supply
source for units of a major power to which it is
A3R rules rewrite v.3
associated or allied, or which otherwise controls it,
all minor countries controlled by that major power
and all allied major powers and their minor
countries (EXCEPTION: 29.261).
29.224 A colonial capital (Algiers, Al Kuwait,
Amman, Baghdad, Cairo, Damascus, Jerusalem,
Rabat, Tirane, Tripoli, Tunis) is a limited supply
source for units of the major power which controls
it, all minor countries controlled by that major
power and all allied major powers and their minor
countries (EXCEPTION: 29.261).
CLARIFICATION: While Vichy is inactive,Vichy colonial
capitals may act as limited supply sources for all Axis
units, but using them to supply non-Vichy units may
trigger an adverse diplomatic modifier.
29.225 West Wall hexes, provided they have fortress
status, are a limited supply source for German units
in them only.
29.226 Maginot hexes, provided they have fortress
status, are a limited supply source for Western
Allied units in them only.
29.227 Malta is a limited supply source only for
Western Allied units in Malta, provided the Western
Allies control at least one other fully supplied port
in the Mediterranean (64.3).
29.228 Sevastopol is a limited supply source only for
Russian units in Sevastopol, provided Russia
controls at least one fully supplied port in the Black
Sea.
29.23 Fortress hexes are not supply sources unless
otherwise specified. Russian units in Leningrad are
supplied by the IC in that city. If the IC is destroyed,
Leningrad is not a supply source, even if it remains
a fortress. The same is true if Stalingrad is a fortress
by virtue of Allied variant 14. Air and naval units in
Malta and Sevastopol must draw supply from other
supply sources, as they are not automatically in
supply.
29.24 Where a hex is a supply source only for the
units in that hex, those units may move out of the
hex once their supply status has been determined.
EXAMPLES: A ground unit in Gibraltar at the start of a
player turn is supplied and may move out of Gibraltar.
Air and naval units in Gibraltar may perform missions
and intercept enemy naval activity. Russian ground
60
units which begin their turn in an IC may move out of
the IC, but Russian units which were not otherwise
supplied may not move into the IC to improve their
supply status, nor may they draw supply from the IC.
29.25 Greek units on Greek islands and Spanish
units in Spanish Morocco are automatically in
limited supply. Spanish units in Spanish islands and
Swedish units in Swedish islands are not.
29.26 RESTRICTIONS ON SUPPLY SOURCES:
29.261 WESTERN ALLIED AND RUSSIAN SUPPLY
SOURCES: Western Allied units may not be supplied
from Russian supply sources, and vice versa. This
prohibition extends to colonies and minor
countries associated with, allied to or otherwise
controlled by the Western Allies and Russia (50.5).
29.262 AXIS SUPPLY FROM RUSSIAN SUPPLY
SOURCES: Axis units may not draw supply from
Moscow, the Russian hexes on the eastern edge of
the board or captured ICs. Other Russian supply
sources, such as minor country capitals controlled
by Russia, become Axis supply sources once they
come under Axis control.
29.3 SUPPLY LINES:
29.31 A supply source may supply any number of
units and hexes.
29.32 A unit or hex is supplied (although not
necessarily fully supplied - see 29.52) if it can trace
a supply line from a supply source. A supply line
consists of a line of controlled hexes, free of enemy
ZoCs, from a supply source to a unit or hex. The
supply source or the unit or hex being supplied may
be in an enemy ZoC, provided all hexes in the
supply line itself are free of enemy ZoCs.
(EXCEPTION: Supply may not be traced from a
bridgehead, even while it is a supply source
(29.218), if it is in an enemy ZoC).
29.321 A supply line may not be traced directly
from a supply source to an adjacent hex if both the
supply source and the hex are in the ZoC of the
same enemy armor unit. It could be traced out of
the supply source to a different hex not in the ZoC
of the same armor unit, then back to the adjacent
hex. If the supply source is also a fortress, with
fortifications facing an adjacent enemy armor unit,
the enemy ZoC would not extend into the hex
containing the supply source and this restriction
A3R rules rewrite v.3
would not apply. Similarly, a supply line may be
traced through a hex containing a fortress.
29.322 A supply line may be traced over hexes
controlled by the major power tracing the supply
line, any of its associated or allied minor countries,
or any of its major power allies or their associated
or allied minor countries. A major power may not
prevent an ally from tracing a supply line over
hexes it controls.
29.323 Supply lines may not be traced through
enemy partisans. A supply line may be traced
through a hex containing a friendly partisan, but
only if the hex was already controlled by the
supplying side before the partisan occupied it.
29.324 A supply line may cross over water at a
crossing arrow without risk of interception. This is
not considered to be sea supply (29.33).
29.325 A supply line, whether over land or water
(29.33), may be of unlimited length, but may not go
off the board. It must be traced on hexes which
appear on the board.
29.33 SEA SUPPLY:
29.331 Supply lines may be traced over water. A
supply line over water begins in a supplied port, is
traced over sea hexes and ends in a port or
bridgehead placed as a result of seaborne invasion
(EXCEPTION: One-hex islands without a port or
bridgehead may also be supplied by sea). A land
supply line may also be traced from the port or
bridgehead in which a sea supply line terminates.
The requirement that all land portions of a supply
line consist of controlled hexes free of enemy ZoCs
(29.32) does not prevent units in a port or
bridgehead in an enemy ZoC from receiving supply
by sea, but the ZoC would prevent any continuation
of the supply line past the port or bridgehead.
29.3311 A sea supply line may not be traced through
a strait containing a crossing arrow unless both
land hexes connected by the crossing arrow are
controlled by the tracing power, a minor country
associated with or allied to it, a major power ally or
a minor country associated with or allied to such a
major power ally.
29.3312 ZoCs only affect the land portion of a
supply line.
61
EXAMPLE: Hostile armor in Calais or Harwich cannot
affect sea supply through the English Channel.
29.3313 Sea supply lines may be traced across front
boundaries, but naval units may not protect sea
supply lines outside their own front. Thus, fleets in
the SW box could protect sea supply from the U.S.
to Gibraltar, but not from Gibraltar into the
Mediterranean.
EXAMPLE: If the Allies wish to trace sea supply from the
U.S. box through Gibraltar to Oran, they must trace two
supply lines in the Atlantic: one from the U.S. which ends
in Gibraltar, and one from the U.S. to Gibraltar which
continues to Oran. The Allied player can trace the U.S.-
to-Gibraltar legs of both supply lines over the same
hexes, and use the same SW box fleets to escort them
both. If the Axis intercepted and defeated this combined
supply line, it would cut supply to both Gibraltar and
Oran. The Allied player must use fleets based in Gibraltar
to escort the Gibraltar-to-Oran leg.
29.332 SUPPLY ZONES: Each area of contiguous,
controlled hexes which can be supplied from the
same port or bridgehead is considered to be a single
supply zone. The supplying player may trace only a
single sea supply line to one designated port or
bridgehead in each supply zone.
EXAMPLE: An Axis sea supply line is traced to Libya to
supply Axis air and armor units in North Africa. The sea
supply line must be traced to either Tripoli or Tobruk,
but not both. The situation would be different if a British
armor unit had invaded at MM19, splitting Libya into
two supply zones. Both ports could then receive supply.
29.333 There is no limit to the number of units
which may be supplied by sea. Sea supply from a
limited supply source (29.22) provides only partial
supply.
29.334 It is presumed that the moving player will
sea supply all units and hexes in controlled, but
otherwise unsupplied or partially supplied, areas if
it is possible to do so. The burden is on the opposing
player to affirmatively state any intention to
disrupt a sea supply line. The opposing player may
require that the moving player indicate the exact
hexes through which sea supply is being traced, so
that he can decide whether he will attempt to
intercept the sea supply (29.35). The moving player
must assign units to the protection of sea supply
A3R rules rewrite v.3
(29.34), which is optional, before any interceptions
of sea supply are attempted by the opposing player.
29.34 PROTECTION OF SEA SUPPLY:
29.341 Fleets are not required to provide sea supply.
However, since sea supply may be intercepted, a
player may, if he wishes, designate fully supplied,
uninverted naval units based in a port from which
sea supply is being traced to protect that sea supply
line. Naval units based in ports other than that
from which a sea supply line is being traced may
not protect the sea supply line, although they may
attempt to counter-intercept any enemy naval
interception of the sea supply line.
29.342 Naval units may be designated to protect sea
supply lines during either the initial supply
determination phase or the post-combat supply
determination phase, at no BRP cost and regardless
of option selection. But see 29.44 for limits on post-
combat supply.
29.343 Allied fleets in the SW box may defend Allied
sea supply lines from the U.S. to Europe. If more
than one sea supply line is being traced, the Allied
player must indicate which fleets are protecting
which supply line before Axis air or naval attacks
on the sea supply line are attempted.
29.344 Uninverted air units may also be designated
to provide air cover for a sea supply line. Air units
which provide air cover for a sea supply line are not
considered to be performing a mission, and no BRP
expenditure is required, but the units may do
nothing else during that game turn and are
inverted for the remainder of the game turn once
supply determination is completed.
29.35 INTERCEPTION OF SEA SUPPLY:
29.351 After the supplying player has assigned air
and naval units to sea supply protection, sea supply
may be intercepted by uninverted enemy air and
naval units during the initial supply determination
phase.
CLARIFICATION: A Russian fleet in Leningrad may not
intercept German sea supply from Kiel to Oslo provided
the Germans trace their supply line through western
front hexes until they are north of Copenhagen, then
through eastern front hexes to Oslo (27.232).
62
29.352 The intercepting player may attempt naval
interception (27.5) in one of the sea hexes over
which supply is being traced (29.334). If his naval
interception die roll is successful, the supplying
player may attempt counter-interception of the
intercepting enemy forces with available naval
forces (27.56), and may also use uninverted air units
to attack the intercepting naval units should they
come within range (26.453). If the intercepting
naval force defeats the counter-intercepting naval
force in fleet combat, it may move to the indicated
interception hex and intercept the sea supply line
or abort the interception and return to port, at the
owning player’s option.
29.353 If the supplying player designated any naval
forces to protect the sea supply line (29.34), fleet
combat then takes place between the intercepting
naval forces and the naval forces designated to
protect the sea supply line. Fleet combat is resolved
normally (27.571). If naval forces designated to
protect sea supply are defeated, they return to port.
29.354 All fleet combat losses incurred by the
supplying player are first taken from naval forces
designated to protect the sea supply line. If there
are insufficient protecting forces to absorb such
losses, or if the sea supply line was undefended, the
sea supply line is disrupted (29.36).
29.355 Air units may also intercept sea supply lines.
The procedure followed is the same as when air
units intercept naval units (26.453). If air cover has
been provided for the sea supply line, air combat
occurs between the air factors providing air cover
and some or all of the intercepting air factors
(26.46) before the intercepting air units attack the
sea supply line. If naval forces have been designated
to protect the sea supply line, they are attacked
normally by the intercepting air units. As with
interception by naval forces, losses from air attacks
are first inflicted on any naval forces protecting the
sea supply line. If any losses are taken from the sea
supply line itself, sea supply is disrupted (29.36).
29.36 DISRUPTION OF SEA SUPPLY:
29.361 A sea supply line is disrupted whenever it
incurs any damage from enemy air or naval
interception, or if the fleets assigned to protect it
are defeated in fleet combat. If this occurs, the sea
supply line is cut and no supply is provided to the
units and hexes which were to have received supply
A3R rules rewrite v.3
via that sea supply line. A player may also
voluntarily abandon an attempt to sea supply at the
end of a round of fleet combat. The disruption of
sea supply does not result in the loss of any BRPs,
although it may result in the elimination of isolated
ground units.
29.362 If all the intercepting fleets are also
eliminated or damaged in the final round of fleet
combat, the protecting naval force has not been
“defeated,” and the sea supply line is not disrupted,
unless the final round of fleet combat inflicted
more damage than the protecting force could
absorb. Otherwise, disruption is automatic, even if
the intercepting fleets were also under attack from
enemy air units, as no additional air sorties against
the intercepting fleets would be allowed because no
additional rounds of fleet combat would take place.
Naval interception of an undefended sea supply line
may fail in the face of an enemy air attack if all the
intercepting fleets are eliminated or damaged
before reaching the supply line. Air attacks against
an undefended sea supply line may also fail, as only
one air sortie per hex is permitted and an attack by
one air factor may fail to inflict the necessary
damage on the sea supply line.
29.4 SUPPLY DETERMINATION:
29.41 The supply status of units and hexes is
determined twice during each player turn. This
determination only applies to units belonging to
and hexes controlled by the moving player. The
supply status of units and hexes does not change
during the opposing player’s turn.
29.42 Supply status is initially determined during
the movement phase, after the movement of air
units, counterair attacks and the movement of
naval units.
29.421 At the beginning of a scenario, all units and
all controlled hexes are considered to be in
unlimited supply before a player's initial supply
determination phase, regardless of their location.
29.43 The supply status of units and hexes which
were isolated or partially supplied at the end of the
initial supply determination phase is also
determined at the end of the post-combat
adjustment phase. At this time, supply may be
traced to units which had been isolated by enemy
attacks and to hexes which had been under enemy
63
control until their acquisition during the supplying
player’s movement and combat phase, as well as to
areas which could not previously receive sea supply
because of the absence of a port or bridgehead.
CLARIFICATION: If sea supply is successfully traced to a
supply zone during the initial supply determination
phase, newly-captured hexes contiguous to that zone are
also supplied during the post-combat supply
determination phase. Once a supply zone has been
supplied, the zone itself acts as a supply source during
the post-combat supply determination phase.
29.44 During the post-combat supply phase, supply
may not be traced to areas other than those
referred to in 29.43. A player may not attempt sea
supply to a supply zone during the initial supply
determination phase, then again try to supply that
supply zone during the post-combat supply
determination phase, nor may he defer sea supply
to a supply zone until the post-combat supply
determination phase if sea supply could have been
traced to that supply zone during the initial supply
determination phase.
CLARIFICATION: Where a supply zone expands as a
result of the capture of an additional port, the
prohibition against trying to trace sea supply twice to
the same supply zone in one turn no longer applies.
29.45 Units and hexes which are supplied during
either the initial supply determination phase or the
post-combat supply determination phase of a
player’s turn remain supplied until the end of the
initial supply determination phase of that player’s
next player turn. Thus a ground unit which is
supplied during the initial supply determination
phase may enter an unsupplied hex without
adversely affecting its supply status. Uninverted air
and naval units supplied during either supply
determination phase may intercept enemy naval
activities during the opposing player turn.
Uninverted air and naval units may also protect
their own sea supply lines during the initial supply
determination phase, provided they are operating
from bases which were supplied during their
previous player turn.
EXAMPLE: Russia and Germany are at war. Russian
units enter Rumania, but fail to capture Bucharest.
Germany counterattacks and German armor units cut
the Russia forces in Rumania off from their supply
sources, although Russia retains control of Constanta. A
A3R rules rewrite v.3
German armor unit also cuts Sevastopol off from the
eastern edge of the board, while Turkish units capture
Batum. The Russian navy is based in Sevastopol.
a) If the Russian eliminate the German armor and restore
supply to Sevastopol, they may trace sea supply to
Constanta in the post-combat supply determination
phase, but the Russian fleets in Sevastopol may not
protect that sea supply line because they were
unsupplied during the initial supply determination
phase.
b) If the Russians had captured Bucharest, putting their
Rumanian pocket in limited supply, they could have
traced limited supply from Bucharest to Constanta to
Sevastopol during the initial supply determination phase
and the Russian fleets could have protected that supply
line provided that Sevastopol was supplied in the
previous Russian turn.
c) If the Russians succeeded in tracing limited supply
from Constanta to Sevastopol, failed to eliminate the
German armor unit in T39, but recaptured Batum from
the Turks, they could not then trace full supply from
Batum to Sevastopol in the post-combat supply
determination phase. On the other hand, they could try
to trace full supply from Batum to Constanta, and if they
succeeded, Sevastopol would also be fully supplied. The
supply status of the Rumanian pocket and Sevastopol
would both depend on successfully tracing sea supply
from Batum to Constanta. No second sea supply line
would be traced from Constanta to Sevastopol.
29.5 UNIT SUPPLY:
29.51 SUPPLIED UNITS:
29.511 Units which draw supply from an unlimited
supply source are fully supplied and function
without impairment. Throughout these rules,
whenever reference is made to a requirement that a
unit be “supplied”, this means supplied from an
unlimited supply source.
29.52 PARTIALLY SUPPLIED UNITS:
29.521 A limited supply source only supplies the
infantry component of ground units and does not
supply any other units. Units which draw supply
from a limited supply source are partially supplied
and suffer from the following impairments:
A. Infantry units have their movement factor
limited to three (this only affects American and
64
some British infantry units - all other infantry units
have a movement factor of three in any case).
Replacement units are unaffected.
B. Armor units lose their mechanized portion and
act as infantry units. Their movement factor is
reduced to three, they have no ZoC, may not create
breakthroughs or exploit and are subject to a -1 DM
if attacked during exploitation by enemy armor
(15.24A). Their combat factor is unaffected. A 4-6
armor unit would thus be treated as a 4-3 infantry
unit.
C. Airborne units may not airdrop.
D. Air and naval units, airbases and bridgeheads are
unsupplied (29.532).
29.53 UNSUPPLIED UNITS:
29.531 Ground units may not move during the
movement phase, and while they may attack, they
may not advance after combat. Armor units act as
infantry units, have no ZoC and may not create
breakthroughs or exploit. Ground units are counted
in attrition totals, but may not advance into hexes
gained from attrition. Ground units may not SR.
29.532 Air and naval units may not carry out
missions, interceptions or any other activities from
unsupplied bases. Air and naval units may move to
and from unsupplied bases, but may not SR to such
bases (29.61F). Air units in unsupplied bases are
inverted before combat if counteraired.
29.54 ELIMINATION OF UNSUPPLIED UNITS:
29.541 Ground units, airbases and bridgeheads
which are unsupplied during an initial supply
determination phase are eliminated at the end of
the post-combat supply determination phase if still
unsupplied. Hex control is unaffected by their
removal.
CLARIFICATION: An air unit based on an airbase that is
removed under this rule is eliminated.
29.542 The restoration of supply to isolated units
must take place during a supply determination
phase to take effect. Supply may not be traced to
units or hexes at any other time.
EXAMPLE - SUPPLY BY LAND: In Summer 1941,
Germany, moving first, invades Russia and isolates a
number of Russian ground units. During the initial
supply determination phase of die Russian Summer 1941
player turn, supply cannot be traced to these units. The
A3R rules rewrite v.3
units therefore suffer the impairments set out in 29.531.
If Russian counterattacks during the Russian player turn
break the encirclement, these units receive supply during
the post-combat phase adjustments supply
determination phase of the Summer 1941 Russian player
turn, and their abilities are fully restored. If a supply line
could not be traced to the encircled units during either
supply determination phase, the units would be removed
at the end of the post-combat supply determination
phase of the Russian Summer 1941 player torn.
EXAMPLE - SUPPLY BY SEA: The Axis move first,
Britain controls Crete. During the SR phase of the
Summer 1941 Axis player turn, the Axis SR a number of
air factors to Athens in order to cut supply to a British 3-
4 infantry unit in Crete. During the initial supply
determination phase of the Allied Summer 1941 player
turn, the Allied player attempts to sea supply Crete, but
the Axis air units are too strong and the sea supply line is
cut. The British 3-4 infantry unit remains isolated and
will be eliminated at the end of the post-combat supply
determination phase of the Allied Summer 1941 player
turn because, if the Allies invaded Crete they could not
place a bridgehead in it (28.112), and sea supply could
not again be attempted to Crete until the following
player turn (29.44).
29.543 REBUILDING ISOLATED UNITS: Units which
are eliminated due to isolation may not be rebuilt in
the game turn in which they are eliminated.
29.544 Air and naval units are never eliminated
because of isolation (EXCEPTION: 29.541).
29.55 UNITS WHICH ARE AUTOMATICALLY
SUPPLIED:
29.551 Partisans are always in supply.
29.552 Exploiting armor units, even if they did not
move during exploitation, are automatically in
supply during the game turn following their
exploitation. Such units may not exploit again
during that turn unless they are supplied normally
(15.63, 15.8).
29.553 Airborne units which have airdropped are
automatically in supply during the game turn
following their airdrop. Such units may not airdrop
again during that turn unless they are supplied
normally (24.31).
29.554 Armor and airborne units which are SRed in
the same player turn as their exploitation (29.552)
65
or airdrop (29.553) are no longer automatically
supplied and must be supplied normally.
29.555 Bridgeheads are in supply, and are unlimited
supply sources, in the turn they are placed (28.7,
29.218).
29.6 HEX SUPPLY:
29.61 Certain activities may not be carried out in or
through hexes which are unsupplied:
A. Airbases may only be constructed in fully
supplied hexes.
B. Air units may only carry out missions and
interceptions from fully supplied airfields.
C. Naval units may only protect sea supply lines,
carry out missions and interceptions and provide
sea escort from fully supplied ports.
D. Units may only be constructed in fully supplied
hexes (EXCEPTION: British submarines in Malta
(64.4)).
E. Ground units may only SR out of, into or through
fully or partially supplied hexes.
F. Air and naval units may SR out of unsupplied or
partially supplied hexes, but only into or through
fully supplied or sea hexes.
CLARIFICATION: Air units may SR over unsupplied
hexes (20.21).
29.62 Ground units may move into unsupplied
hexes, advance into such hexes after combat, sea
transport into or invade unsupplied hexes without
becoming unsupplied during that player turn. In
many cases, these activities will involve entry into
unsupplied hexes, as the hexes will have been
enemy-controlled. The capture of such hexes does
not necessarily mean that they are supplied.
30. OIL
30.1 Axis oil supplies are interrupted if the Axis are
unable to trace an oil supply line over neutral or
Axis-controlled land hexes, free of Allied ZoCs, from
Ploesti to an objective in Germany. Allied units,
including armor units, adjacent to Ploesti do not
automatically cut the oil supply line. The oil supply
line is cut if the Allies (but not neutral Rumania or
neutral Russia) control Ploesti or occupy sufficient
territory between Ploesti and Germany.
30.2 Whether the oil supply line is cut is determined
at the start of each Axis player turn. If oil supplies
A3R rules rewrite v.3
are interrupted, one of the following effects must
be implemented by the Axis each turn the
interruption continues, until all five are in effect.
The German player decides the order of
implementation, selecting an additional effect each
turn, and may not change his decision once made.
The effects are:
A. The Allied Strategic Warfare Effects dice roll
(42.5321) is increased by two.
B. The Axis Strategic Warfare Effects dice roll
(42.5222) is decreased by two.
C. Axis fleets are inverted and may not move,
conduct missions, SR, protect sea supply or provide
sea escort.
D. Axis air units are inverted and may not move, fly
offensive or defensive missions or SR, except during
an Axis player turn in which an Axis offensive
option has been chosen and the Allied player turn
immediately following, and only on the front
selected. A limited offensive removes this
restriction only for the air units included in the
limited offensive.
E. Axis armor units, including those which
exploited in the previous turn, are treated as
infantry units (15.242, 23.2) except during an Axis
player turn in which an Axis offensive option has
been chosen and on the Allied player turn
immediately following, and only on the front
selected. A limited offensive removes this
restriction only for the armored units included in
the limited offensive.
CLARIFICATION: If a 30.2D effect is ongoing, the Axis
must pay for a limited or full offensive to perform an air
activity which normally has no BRP cost, such as staging,
attacking enemy fleets at sea, protecting a supply line or
SRing. The same applies to armor units if 30.2E is in
effect.
EXAMPLES: 30.2D is in effect. Germany selects an
offensive option on the Western front and an attrition
option on the Mediterranean front. Germany then builds
an air unit in Berlin. Germany may only SR that air unit
to the Mediterranean if it pays for a limited offensive for
that unit.
30.2E is in effect and Germany selects an offensive option
on the Mediterranean front and an attrition option on
the Western front. German armor units on the Western
front may move to a breakthrough hex on the
Mediterranean front and exploit on that front only if
66
Germany first paid for a limited offensive on the Western
front for those armor units.
30.3 Effects 30.2A (strategic bombers) and 30.2B
(submarines), once incurred, affect SW resolution in
all subsequent SW resolution phases until they are
reversed (30.5).
CLARIFICATION: German air units in the SW box are
not affected by 30.2D. Instead, they are subject to 30.2A.
30.4 In addition to some or all of the above effects,
the German and Italian SR capacities both drop by
one each turn oil supplies are interrupted (20.11,
20.12). These effects are cumulative and without
limit. An oil shortage may eventually completely
eliminate Axis SR capability.
30.5 If oil supplies are restored, the German player
selects and reverses one oil shortage result that is
currently in effect at the start of each Axis player
turn until all effects are negated. In addition, both
the German and Italian SR capacity rises by one
each turn.
31. WEATHER
31.1 During all Spring turns, overruns and
exploitation movement and combat are prohibited
on the Eastern front. This prohibition applies to
both Axis and Allied forces.
31.2 A winter die roll is made at the beginning of
every Winter game turn, whether war has broken
out between Russia and Germany or not.
31.21 The Axis player may play variant 19 to modify
a winter roll before Russia and Germany go to war,
or hold it in reserve for later use, at his option.
Regardless of when the variant is played, its
modifier applies to every winter roll made
afterward.
31.22 With respect to the successive winter DRM,
winter rolls made prior to the outbreak of war
between Germany and Russia do not modify rolls
made after war breaks out. A Winter turn in which
war breaks out between Germany and Russia is
counted, as are Winter turns after a Russian
surrender. In the 1942 scenario, one winter has
already occurred, so a -1 modifier applies to the
winter die roll. In the 1944 scenario, three winters
have already occurred, so a -3 modifier applies.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
[See the Winter Table]
31.23 The Axis may always declare an offensive
option and conduct full offensive operations in
areas west of the Pact line, including against Poland
in Winter 1939, should this be necessary. If there
are Axis units east of the Pact line, their activities
must be consistent with those conducted by Axis
units west of the Pact line. For example, if Axis
offensive options east of the Pact line are
prohibited by a winter result and the Axis wish to
select an offensive option for the Eastern front for
their units west of the Pact line, Axis units east of
the Pact line would have to pass.
CLARIFICATION: During a winter result of “5”, an Axis
armor unit just west of the Pact line exerts a ZoC into all
adjacent hexes, including those east of the line. Axis
armor units that exploited in the previous turn still
benefit from exploitation supply (29.552) no matter
where they are even though they are counted as infantry
units in all other respects.
CLARIFICATION: Even when a winter roll prohibits
airdrops, an airborne unit in the Eastern front could still
be airdropped onto a Western front hex.
EXAMPLE: During a winter result of “5”, an Axis armor
unit may move three hexes through Turkey, then move
another three hexes inside Russia, and vice versa.
EXAMPLE: Germany invades Russia in Winter 1941. At
the same time, the Axis player declares that he holds Axis
variant 19 and is using it this turn (31.21), thus giving
him a -2 modifier for the winter die roll. The die roll is a
“5”. Axis forces suffer 5 - 2 = 3 level winter effects, while
the Russian forces suffer 5 - 6 = -1 level effects. Axis
forces may not conduct any offensive operations, nor
may they airdrop, overrun or exploit, but Axis infantry
units defend normally. Meanwhile, the only restriction
on Russian units is that Russian armor units may move
only three hexes during exploitation.
If the winter die roll had been a “3”, the Axis could select
an offensive option, but could not conduct airdrops,
overruns or exploitation, while the Russians would be
entirely unaffected.
During the Winter 1942 turn, the Axis will benefit from a
-3 modifier.
31.3 Seaborne invasions which involve naval
movement on either the Western or the Eastern
front are prohibited during Winter turns (27.4322).
67
ECONOMICS
32. THE YEAR START SEQUENCE (YSS)
32.1 The YSS takes place between the end of each
Winter turn and the start of each Spring turn. It
consists of BRP calculations (33), determination and
allocation of DPs (59), and SW construction (42.2)
and allocation (42.3). In addition, certain variants
may be played by both sides.
32.2 No YSS precedes the start of either the
Campaign Game or the 1939 scenario, although DP
allocations are made prior to the start of the Fall
1939 game turn. The initial BRP levels for the major
powers taking part in the 1940, 1941, 1942 and 1944
scenarios have already been calculated and are set
out in the Appendix dealing with the scenario in
question.
33. BRP CALCULATIONS
33.1 BRP BASES: BRP totals are calculated
separately for each major power during each YSS.
At the start of each scenario, each major power has
a BRP base, which represents the resources of its
national economy. This BRP base may increase or
decrease as the game proceeds.
33.2 BRP GROWTH: If, at the end of a Winter game
turn, a major power has BRPs which it did not use
in the course of the preceding year, those BRPs are
multiplied by the major power’s growth rate,
fractions are dropped and the result is added to the
major power’s BRP base. The remaining BRPs are
lost (EXCEPTION: The 1940 YSS (33.4)).
33.221 GROWTH LIMITS: The amount by which a
major power may increase its BRP base in a YSS is
limited to its growth rate times its BRP base in the
previous YSS. If its current BRP base is lower than
its BRP base at the start of the game, the latter is
used.
33.222 BRPs which may not be applied to BRP
growth at the end of a year because of this limit are
treated in the same manner as surplus BRPs in the
1940 YSS (33.4).
33.223 ICs and synthetic oil plants are counted as
part of the Russian and German BRP bases,
respectively, when calculating BRP growth limits.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
33.224 The automatic American BRP base increases
are counted towards this limit. The American BRP
base may always grow by an amount at least equal
to the automatic American BRP base increases.
33.225 BRP growth limits do not apply to Russia
until it is at war with Germany or to U.S. BRPs until
the U.S. is at war with Germany.
EXAMPLES: In the 1941 YSS, Germany’s BRP base is 150.
In the 1942 YSS, it can add no more than 75 BRPs to its
base. If it had 200 BRPs remaining at the end of 1941, 150
would be used for growth. Of the remaining 50, 25 would
carry over into 1942 without any additional increase to
Germany’s base, and 25 would be lost.
The U.S. BRP base is 200 in the 1942 YSS, and the U.S.
spends 20 BRPs on SW construction. The U.S. declares
war in Summer 1942. The maximum allowed growth for
the U.S. BRP base in 1943 YSS is 90 BRPs. (180 BRPs after
SW construction, multiplied by the 50% growth rate.) But
the 20 BRPs growth in the U.S. BRP base in Spring 42 and
Summer 1942 (10 BRPs each turn) does not count against
this limit because the U.S. was neutral (33.225).
In the 1944 YSS, the U.S. has a BRP base of 400. In the
1945 YSS, the U.S. base growth is limited to 200 BRPs,
including the 80 BRPs from automatic growth during
1944, for a total maximum BRP base of 400 + 120 + 80 =
600 in the 1945 YSS.
33.3 REDUCTION OF BRP BASES: If a major power
does not have sufficient BRPs to absorb losses
inflicted by strategic warfare (42), German bombing
of Britain (43), raiders (44) or V-weapons (Axis
variant 24), any deficit, unless offset by subsequent
BRP additions, is subtracted from that major
power’s BRP base during the next YSS. BRP losses
from these causes do not affect a major power’s BRP
base if the major power has sufficient BRPs
available to cover the losses when they occur or if it
acquires additional BRPs to offset the losses prior to
the next YSS. BRP losses from other causes have no
effect on major power BRP bases (33.7).
CLARIFICATION: BRP base reduction only occurs if a
major power's BRP level is less than zero at the end of the
year.
EXAMPLE: In Winter 1940, the Axis have the initiative.
Britain has 2 BRPs and loses 7 BRPs to German bombing
(43). The British BRP level is reduced to zero and Britain
incurs a deficit of five BRPs. In the Allied player turn,
Spain activates as an Allied minor resulting in 30 BRPs
68
added to the British BRP level, which increases back to 25
BRPs. Britain ends 1940 without any further BRP losses or
expenditures. It is not in deficit and will not suffer a BRP
base reduction. In the 1941 YSS, its BRP base will grow by
(25 x 0.40) = 10 BRPs. If Spain had not activated and
everything else remained the same, Britain would end
1940 with a 5 BRP deficit which would have reduced its
base in the 1941 YSS.
33.4 The BRP base for each major power is
calculated during each YSS as outlined above, with
the exception of the 1940 YSS, in which no BRP
growth occurs (EXCEPTION: Russia after the play of
Allied variant 6). Each major power’s 1940 BRP base
will almost always be the same as its 1939 BRP base,
the only possible exceptions being Allied variant 6
and raider losses to Britain’s base in 1939. In the
1940 YSS, each major power multiplies any unused
BRPs from 1939 by its growth rate, drops any
fractions and adds the result to its 1940 BRP totals
without affecting its BRP base.
33.5 CALCULATION OF BRP TOTALS: The total
number of BRPs for each major power is calculated
by adding to its BRP base the BRP value of the
following:
A. Conquered major powers (47).
B. Conquered minor countries and colonies (54).
C. Active minor allies (56).
D. Associated minor countries (55).
E. Economically penetrated minor countries (57).
F. ICs (34).
And by subtracting the BRP value of:
G. Colonies under enemy control (54.42).
H. Key economic areas under enemy control (40).
I. Non-base BRP deficits from the previous year
(33.3, 33.7).
J. BRPs which are voluntarily eliminated (33.6).
33.51 If a major power received BRPs for a conquest
during the previous YSS, or for a minor ally which
activated at any time during the preceding year,
and that conquest or minor ally is captured by
enemy forces during the second half of a Winter
turn, the BRPs for the conquest or minor ally are
counted in the major power’s BRP total for the next
year, although these BRPs must be deducted if the
major power does not regain control of the
conquest or minor ally during its Spring turn
(54.32). Similarly, if a major power makes a
A3R rules rewrite v.3
conquest in the first half of a Winter turn which is
recaptured by enemy forces in the second half of
the Winter turn, both sides receive the BRPs during
the ensuing YSS.
33.52 Each major power’s BRP base, conquests,
minor allies, associated minor countries and ICs are
set out in the Appendix dealing with each scenario.
If a minor country controlled by a major power at
the start of a scenario is captured by enemy forces,
that major power loses the BRPs for the minor
country if it does not recapture the minor country
during its next player turn.
33.53 BRPs are not gained by conquest between YSS.
For example, if Germany conquered Denmark in
Spring 1940, it would not receive the BRPs for
Denmark until the 1941 YSS.
33.6 VOLUNTARY ELIMINATION OF BRPs: After all
BRP totals have been calculated, and expenditures
for SW construction, major powers belonging to the
side which moved last in the preceding Winter
game turn may voluntarily eliminate BRPs in order
to avoid an unwanted double move. Such voluntary
elimination of BRPs is similar to the voluntary
elimination of BRPs during the unit construction
phase of a player turn (19.4). The BRPs are deducted
from the owning power’s BRP total, but not from its
BRP base. Major powers belonging to the side which
held the initiative during the preceding Winter turn
may not eliminate BRPs during the YSS.
33.61 NOT SUBJECT TO SPENDING LIMITS: The
voluntary elimination of BRPs is not limited by
spending limits (33.5). An opponent therefore may
never be forced to take a double move, although his
only alternative may be to “voluntarily” eliminate a
large number of BRPs.
33.62 SCORCHED EARTH: A major power which
voluntarily eliminates BRPs either during the YSS
or during unit construction may specify that the
BRPs eliminated are those of a particular conquest
or colony. The major power must have received the
BRPs from the conquest or controlled the colony in
the previous YSS, and may not have lost the BRPs
for the conquest or colony since that time. Should
the conquest or colony then be lost later in the
year, no additional BRP losses are incurred. BRPs
from minor allies, associated, economically
penetrated or diplomatically co-opted minor
countries, and friendly key economic areas may not
69
be subjected to Scorched Earth. The designation of
BRPs from a specific conquest or colony has no
effect on control of that conquest or colony or on
the BRP value of the conquest or colony in
subsequent years.
EXAMPLE: Russia conquers the Baltic States in 1940.
Germany attacks Russia in Summer 1941, but does not
gain control of the Baltic States. To avoid an unwanted
double move, Russia voluntarily eliminates 20 BRPs
during its Summer 1941 unit construction phase. The
Russian player may specify that 15 of these BRPs are
from the Baltic States, so that Russia will not incur any
additional BRP loss if Germany captures the Baltic States
in Fall 1941.
33.7 BRP DEFICITS: If a major power incurs BRP
losses from causes other than those listed in 33.3,
such as the loss of minor allies, conquests, colonies
or key economic areas, and that major power does
not have sufficient BRPs to absorb the losses, the
deficit, unless offset by subsequent BRP additions, is
subtracted from that major power’s available BRPs
during the next YSS. The major power’s BRP base is
unaffected.
CLARIFICATION: BRP deficits that reduce the BRP base
(33.3) are tracked separately from BRP deficits that
cannot reduce the BRP base. (33.7). Any BRPs acquired
prior to the next YSS, including additions during a
different turn from the one in which a deficit was
incurred, are applied preferentially to the first type of
deficit (36.21).
EXAMPLE: In Fall 1940, Britain has 12 BRPs and loses 22
BRP to German submarines. Britain now has a BRP level
of zero and a base reducing deficit of ten BRPs. In Winter
1940, Germany occupies London, causing Britain an
immediate loss of 25 BRPs (40.22). Britain’s BRP level is
still zero, but Britain’s deficit increases to a total of 35
BRPs. The loss due to London cannot reduce the British
BRP base (33.7). Reacting to the desperate situation, the
U.S. sends Britain a grant of 20 BRPs in Winter 1940.
Britain must first apply the grant to the ten BRP deficit,
which leaves ten BRPS to offset the deficit from the loss
of London (36.21). Britain ends 1940 without any further
BRP losses. 15 BRPs are subtracted from the available
British BRPs in 1941, but the British BRP base is
unaffected. If London remained in German hands during
the 1941 YSS, Britain would subtract an additional 25
BRPs from its available BRPs.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
33.8 UNITED STATES: The conversion of the U.S.
economy to war production was one of the most
important factors in the Allied victory in World War
II. The U.S. economy is therefore handled somewhat
differently from that of other major powers to
reflect this dramatic increase in American
productivity.
33.81 The U.S. begins the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios with a base of 150 BRPs in Fall 1939.
33.82 U.S. ECONOMIC EXPANSION: Both the U.S.
BRP base and the U.S. BRP total increases each turn
throughout the game. Prior to U.S. entry into the
war, the U.S. BRP base and total increases by 10
BRPs each turn. After the U.S. is at war with the
Axis, the U.S. BRP base and total increases by 20
BRPs each turn. These BRPs are not only added to
the U.S. BRP base, but are also added to the U.S.
total each turn, at the same time as other major
powers receive BRPs for the activation of minor
allies.
33.83 In addition to its per turn BRP base increases,
the U.S. calculates BRP growth normally during the
1943 and subsequent YSS whether or not it is at war
with the Axis. Before it participates fully in the YSS,
the U.S. BRP total at the start of each year is simply
the BRPs remaining from the previous Winter turn,
regardless of the current U.S. BRP base.
33.84 U.S. SW EXPENDITURES DURING THE YSS:
Prior to its entry into the war, the U.S. may
construct SW units during a YSS only if the USAT
has reached 37 (42.211). Once at war with the Axis,
the U.S. may construct SW units normally, using its
current BRP base to determine the limit of such
expenditures.
33.85 U.S. EXPENDITURES PRIOR TO U.S. ENTRY: All
U.S. expenditures prior to U.S. entry into the war
are deducted from both the U.S. BRP base and BRP
total. Thus BRP grants to Britain prior to U.S. entry,
SW expenditures made during a YSS and the 35 BRP
cost of the U.S. DoW against Germany are deducted
from the U.S. BRP base and BRP total. ASW factors
acquired by the U.S. through the USAT (76) do not
require any BRP expenditure. The U.S. BRP base and
BRP total when it enters the war is thus 150 plus 10
for each turn which passes, including the turn in
which it declares war on Germany, minus all BRP
grants to Britain, SW expenditures and the 35 BRP
cost of the U.S. DoW against Germany.
70
EXAMPLE: The U.S. enters the war in Spring 1942. It has
granted 30 BRPs to Britain in 1941. The U.S. BRP base and
total is 150 + 110 (eleven turns, including Spring 1942,
have passed since the start of the game) - 30 (BRP grants)
- 35 (DoW cost) = 195 BRPs, minus any SW expenditures
made during the 1942 YSS.
33.86 U.S. EXPENDITURES AFTER U.S. ENTRY: Once
the U.S. enters the war, BRP expenditures and
losses are deducted from the American BRP total in
the same manner as for other major powers. The
U.S. BRP base is not affected by such expenditures,
although in rare instances the U.S. BRP total may be
low enough that SW or raider losses could reduce
the U.S. BRP base (33.3).
EXAMPLE: In Winter 1941, having granted 40 BRPs to
Britain, the U.S. declares war on Germany. The U.S. BRP
base and total would be 150 + 100 (10 BRPs for each turn
since the start of the game) = 250 - 40 (BRP grants) - 35
(DoW cost) = 175. In Winter 1941, the U.S. grants another
20 BRPs to Britain, and loses 10 BRPs to German
submarines. The U.S. BRP base would remain at 175, but
the U.S. BRP total would be reduced to 145. In the 1942
YSS, the U.S. does not calculate any BRP growth. The U.S.
spends 14 BRPs on SW construction. The U.S. BRP total is
reduced to 131. In Spring 1942, the U.S. adds 20 BRPs to
its base and total, speeds 44 BRPs on unit construction
and loses 15 BRPs to German submarines. The U.S. BRP
base rises to 195, and its BRP total drops to 92. In
Summer 1942, the U.S. adds 20 BRPs to its base and total,
spends 30 BRPs on an offensive and unit construction
and loses 10 BRPs to German submarines. The U.S. BRP
base rises to 215, and its BRP total drops to 72. In Fall
1942, the U.S. adds 20 BRPs to its base and total, spends
10 BRPs on unit construction and loses 12 BRPs to
German submarines. The U.S. BRP base rises to 235, and
its BRP total drops to 70. In Winter 1942, the U.S. adds 20
BRPs to its base and total, spends 35 BRPs on unit
construction and loses 18 BRPs to German submarines.
The U.S. BRP base rises to 255, and its BRP total drops to
37. In the 1943 YSS, the U.S. BRP base grows by half of 37,
rising to 255 + 18 = 273. The U.S. could spend 27 BRPs on
SW construction, giving it a BRP total of 273 - 27 = 246 to
start 1943.
33.87 GERMAN DoW ON THE U.S.: If Germany
declares war on the U.S., the U.S. BRP base and BRP
total increase by 20 BRPs each turn, starting on the
next Allied player turn. The U.S. would not deduct
35 BRPs from its base, because it would not have
declared war on Germany.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
34. INDUSTRIAL CENTERS (ICs)
34.1 In 1939 and 1940, Russia has a BRP base of zero
(EXCEPTION: Allied variant 6). In Fall 1939, and
during each subsequent YSS, Russia receives BRPs
for each IC under its control. Each IC produces 10
BRPs in 1939-1941, 15 BRPs in 1942 and 20 BRPs
thereafter.
34.11 The increases in Russian production which
normally occur in 1942 and 1943 may be triggered
sooner by an early Axis declaration of war on
Russia. If the Axis attack Russia in 1939, the
production value of each IC under Russian control
increases to 15 BRPs in the 1940 YSS and 20 BRPs in
the 1941 YSS. Similarly, an Axis attack in 1940
triggers a production increase in the 1941 and 1942
YSS. A Russian declaration of war on the Axis in
1939 or 1940 does not trigger this production
increase unless Russia surrenders and the Axis
subsequently declare war on Russia.
34.2 In the 1940 YSS, Russia retains 30% of its
unused 1939 BRPs (33.4) but does not increase its
BRP base. In each subsequent YSS, unspent Russian
BRPs are used to construct a Soviet BRP base
distinct from the BRPs generated by ICs (33.2).
34.3 Russia begins the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios with nine ICs, which are placed in
Moscow, Leningrad, Stalingrad, Kharkov, Rostov,
Grozny, Kiev, Gorki and Kuibyshev. During the 1940
YSS, a tenth IC is placed in Sverdlovsk and
immediately generates BRPs in that YSS. The
starting locations of the Russian ICs are shown on
the mapboard in gray. Additional ICs may not be
constructed.
34.4 ICs may be moved, captured or destroyed as
follows:
34.41 MOVEMENT OF ICs: The ICs in Moscow,
Leningrad and Grozny may never be moved. Russia
may SR its remaining ICs only if Russia is at war
with the Axis and an Axis unit is within five hexes
of the IC. ICs must always be SRed to cities in
Russia, and no more than one IC may ever occupy
the same hex. One SR is required for every five BRPs
of the IC’s current production value. If Russia SRs
an IC, other than an IC it recaptured from the Axis
in the current year, it immediately incurs a BRP loss
equal to the current production value of the IC.
71
CLARIFICATION: An Axis unit must be within five hexes
during the Russian SR phase. ICs may not SR by sea, nor
may they SR to the Siberia box.
CLARIFICATION: Moving an IC is a voluntary action
which counts against the Russian spending limit (35.4),
but loss of an IC to the Axis is involuntary and does not
count against the Russian spending limit (35.3).
34.42 CAPTURE OF ICs: ICs are captured by the Axis
when the hex they occupy comes under Axis
control. When an IC is captured by the Axis, Russia
immediately deducts any BRPs it received for the IC
during the preceding YSS. There is no additional
penalty if an IC is recaptured and lost again during
the same year. The captured IC is then considered a
conquest. The production value of the IC is
permanently fixed at the level in force at the time
of its capture. During each subsequent YSS in which
it retains control of the IC, the capturing Axis major
power receives half the production value of the IC
(rounded down). Captured ICs may not be SRed. If
Russia regains control of a captured IC, it receives
the full production value of the IC, as fixed at the
time of capture by the Axis, during each subsequent
YSS in which it retains control of the IC. The
production value of a recaptured IC does not
increase.
34.43 DESTRUCTION OF ICs: Either player may
destroy ICs under his control immediately prior to
the movement phase of his player turn (14.11). If
the controlling major power received BRPs for an IC
during the preceding YSS, voluntary destruction of
the IC results in a BRP loss equal to the current
production value of the IC (Russian control) or half
the production value (Axis conquest). Destroyed ICs
may not be reconstructed. Russia may not destroy
an IC unless it is at war with the Axis and an Axis
unit is within five hexes of the IC.
34.5 ICs are unlimited supply sources for Russian
units occupying the hex containing the IC (29.2151).
ICs may not be selected for attrition occupation
(16.5). Infantry and replacement units defending in
ICs are not subject to a -1 DM when attacked by
exploiting armor (15.24A).
35. BRP SPENDING LIMITS
35.1 Once each major power’s BRP total has been
determined during the YSS, SW (42) construction
costs are deducted. Major powers which moved last
in the previous turn may voluntarily eliminate BRPs
A3R rules rewrite v.3
(33.6). The remaining figure is halved, and any
fraction is dropped. This figure, the BRP spending
limit, represents the maximum number of BRPs
that the major power may spend during any one
player turn in the forthcoming year. The BRP
spending limit should be recorded for future
reference.
35.2 The BRP spending limit also applies from the
start of each scenario. If Axis variant 3 is played
during the Italian opening setup of the Campaign
Game or 1939 scenario, Italy’s 1939 spending limit is
increased from 37 BRPs to 40 BRPs.
35.3 INVOLUNTARY LOSSES DISREGARDED:
Involuntary losses of BRPs from enemy action, such
as economic warfare or the loss of minor allies,
conquests, colonies or key economic areas, do not
count toward a major power’s BRP spending limit.
EXAMPLE: Britain has a speeding limit of 62 BRPs. The
Axis have the initiative. During the Axis player turn,
London is captured by the Axis, costing Britain 25 BRPs.
In addition, German bombers eliminate 10 British BRPs,
and raiders eliminate another three British BRPs. In all,
Britain has lost 38 BRPs to enemy action, but Britain may
still spend 62 BRPs during its own player turn if it still
has that many BRPs.
35.4 VOLUNTARY OVERSPENDING PROHIBITED: A
player may never voluntarily take action which
would exceed his spending limit or which would
reduce his BRP total below zero. However, a player
may spend BRPs which will inevitably be lost later
in the same game turn, even if this will clearly
result in a BRP deficit.
EXAMPLE: In Winter 1941, Britain has only 15 BRPs
remaining. The Axis have captured a Free French colony.
If Britain fails to recapture the colony, the five BRPs
Britain received during the preceding YSS will be lost.
Although it is clearly impossible for Britain to recapture
the colony, Britain may still speed 15 BRPs for an
offensive option, because the inevitable five BRP loss will
not occur until the end of the British combat phase.
Britain would then incur a five BRP deficit for the
following year. Britain could also spend its remaining 15
BRPs on an offensive option even though it knew that it
would suffer BRP losses from German submarines during
SW resolution after the end of the Allied player turn. In
that case, the BRP deficit from SW would also result in
reduction of the British base during the following YSS
(33.3).
72
36. BRP GRANTS
36.1 GENERAL: Major powers may make BRP grants
to another allied major power during the SR phase.
Thus, the recipient may not spend the granted BRPs
on unit construction until the following game turn,
because the BRPs arrive after the unit construction
phase.
36.2 MECHANICS: When a major power announces
its intention to grant BRPs to an ally, it immediately
deducts those BRPs from its total. The BRPs are
then SRed to the recipient, each grant of 20 BRPs or
any fraction thereof counting as one SR against the
granting major power’s SR capacity (20.6). In most
cases, the recipient will then simply add the BRPs to
its total, completing the grant. But some BRP SRs by
sea may be intercepted (20.8, 37), and some or all of
the granted BRPs may not reach the recipient. BRPs
granted to Russia through Persia or Turkey incur a
one turn delay (38, 39).
36.21 If a major power has a BRP deficit when it
receives a BRP grant, the BRPs are applied to reduce
the deficit. Deficits which would affect the
recipient’s BRP base (33.3) have priority over non-
base deficits.
36.3 RESTRICTIONS ON BRP GRANTS:
36.31 A major power may not grant more than 40
BRPs per turn (EXCEPTION: The U.S. after 1943
(36.41)).
36.32 A major power may not spend more than half
its yearly BRP allotment (after SW construction) on
BRP grants. Western Allied BRPs lost from German
attacks on Murmansk convoys or SR interception
count against this limit.
36.33 A major power may not grant BRPs if the
expenditure would cause it to exceed its BRP
spending limit (35).
36.4 UNITED STATES: Prior to its entry into the war,
the U.S. may grant up to 20 BRPs per turn to Britain
or France, as allowed by the USAT. The U.S. may not
grant any BRPs until the USAT has reached 22. After
that point, the U.S. may grant five BRPs per turn to
Britain or France. Once the USAT reaches 32, the
U.S. may grant 10 BRPs per turn to Britain or
France. When the tension level reaches 40, the U.S.
may grant 20 BRPs per turn to Britain or France.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
The U.S. may not grant BRPs to Russia until both
the U.S. and Russia are at war with the Axis.
36.41 Once the U.S. is at war with Germany, the U.S.
may grant 30 BRPs per turn until 1943, and may
grant 40 BRPs per turn in 1943; 50 BRPs per turn in
1944; and so on).
36.42 American BRP grants to Britain and France
may not be intercepted, and neither may American
grants to Russia through Persia (20.61).
36.5 BRITAIN: Britain may grant BRPs to France and
Russia, but not to the U.S.
36.51 BRITISH BRP GRANTS TO FRANCE: Britain
may not grant BRPs to France until Anglo-French
cooperation limits (49) are lifted.
36.6 FRANCE: France may grant BRPs only to Russia.
36.7 RUSSIA: Western Allied major powers may not
grant BRPs to Russia until Russia is at war with the
Axis. Once Russia has gone to war with Germany,
Allied BRP grants may be made to Russia, even after
a Russian surrender (EXCEPTION: The U.S. may not
grant BRPs to Russia if Axis variant 17 has been
played).
36.71 BRP grants to Russia must be sent via
Murmansk (37), Persia (38) or Turkey (39).
36.72 Western Allied BRP grants to Russia may not
exceed 40 BRPs per turn, although the one turn
delay for grants through Persia (38) and Turkey (39)
could cause Russia to receive more than 40 BRPs in
a turn.
36.73 Russia may only grant BRPs to Germany, and
only if compelled to do so by a Russian diplomatic
result or a Russian surrender.
36.8 GERMANY AND ITALY: Germany may grant
BRPs to Italy. Italy may not grant BRPs.
37. MURMANSK CONVOYS
37.1 The fastest route for Allied aid to Russia is by
Arctic convoy to Murmansk. The drawback to this
route is that such convoys may be attacked by
German submarines, as well as air and naval units.
37.11 Murmansk convoys may not be attempted by
the Allies if both Leningrad and Vologda are
controlled by the Axis, or if neither city can trace a
73
supply line to Moscow or the eastern edge of the
mapboard. Supply based on an IC in Leningrad or a
limited supply source, such as Helsinki, is
insufficient.
37.2 ALLIED FORCES: During the SR phase, the
Western Allies may assign up to 40 BRPs to a
Murmansk convoy, together with fleets for sea
escort (27.6). These sea escort fleets must be based
in Britain, the U.S., if the U.S. is at war with the
Axis, or France, depending on the source of the
BRPs. Additional fleets above the minimum
required for sea escort may be assigned to protect
the convoy against German forces (27.623). There is
no SR cost for such additional fleets, which may be
based in any Western front port prior to their entry
into the Murmansk box. These fleets are considered
to be performing sea escort and may perform no
other functions during that game turn. Western
Allied fleets enter the Murmansk box by moving off
the north edge of the board between hexes A24 and
A34, inclusive, and may be intercepted by Axis units
as they do so.
37.21 The Western Allies may allocate ASW units to
the Murmansk box during the SW deployment
phase (42.44).
37.3 UNOPPOSED CONVOYS: The Axis may oppose a
Murmansk convoy only if there are German air,
fleet or submarine factors in the Murmansk box. If
the convoy is unopposed, all the BRPs convoyed to
Russia are added to the Russian total at the end of
the SR phase.
37.4 GERMAN FORCES: Germany may move or SR air
and fleet units in Bergen to the Murmansk box and
vice versa during any German movement or SR
phase without risk of interception, regardless of the
Western front option chosen by Germany. German
air and fleet units may enter the Murmansk box
only if Germany controls Bergen and can trace a sea
supply line from an unlimited supply source to the
Norwegian hexes along the northern edge of the
board (A35, A36). Italian units, even if lent, and Axis
minor ally units may not enter the Murmansk box.
CLARIFICATION: Units must start the SR phase in
Bergen to SR to the Murmansk box.
37.41 German air and naval units withdrawn from
the Murmansk box normally reappear at Bergen. If
the Allies gain control of Bergen, German air and
A3R rules rewrite v.3
naval units in the Murmansk box must be moved
out of the Murmansk box during the next Axis
movement phase or be eliminated, and may not
oppose Allied convoys in the interim. German fleets
must move to the Axis-controlled port nearest to
A34, and may be intercepted during such
movement. German air units must move to an Axis-
controlled air base within eight hexes of A34.
CLARIFICATION: Units withdrawn from the Murmansk
box during movement may not change base or stage from
Bergen in the same movement phase.
37.411 If the Allies cut sea supply to Norway,
German air and naval units in the Murmansk box
are inverted (29.532), but need not leave the box.
37.42 Unless it is engaging in restricted submarine
warfare (42.411), Germany may allocate submarine
factors to the Murmansk box during the SW
deployment phase, whether or not it controls
Bergen (42.42).
37.5 GERMAN OPPOSITION TO MURMANSK
CONVOYS:
37.51 Murmansk convoys may be attacked by
German fleets and air units based in the Murmansk
box. The effect of German submarines on the
convoy is determined once all fleet and air attacks
have been resolved. The sequence followed may be
summarized:
A. The German player indicates which fleets in the
Murmansk box will sortie to intercept the Allied
convoy (37.52).
B. The Allied player indicates which escorting fleets
will oppose the German fleet sortie (37.53).
C. German fleets which have sortied may attempt to
evade the Allied fleets which detached from the
convoy to oppose them (37.54).
D. Fleet combat between the German fleets which
have sortied and any Allied fleets which detached
from the convoy to oppose them is resolved (37.55).
One German air sortie may be flown at the start of
each round of fleet combat.
E. Fleet combat between the German fleets which
have sortied and the Allied fleets escorting the
convoy itself is resolved (37.56). One German air
sortie may be flown at the start of each round of
fleet combat.
F. German air attacks are concluded (37.57).
74
G. German submarine attacks against the convoy
are resolved (37.6).
H. All German and Allied air and naval units which
participated in Murmansk SRs are inverted.
37.52 GERMAN FLEET SORTIES: Murmansk combat
begins with the German player announcing
whether all, some or none of his fleet factors in the
Murmansk box will sortie to intercept the Allied
convoy. If the German player does not wish to
attempt such interception, play proceeds to 37.57.
37.53 ALLIED FLEET OPPOSITION: The Allied player
then announces whether all, some or none of his
escorting fleet factors will detach from the convoy
to oppose the German fleet sortie. If the Allied
player does not wish to oppose the German fleet
sortie, the German fleets may engage the convoy
itself (37.56).
CLARIFICATION: The Allies may detach all of their
fleets from the convoy without penalty. They need not
leave behind one fleet factor for every two BRPs (27.621).
37.54 GERMAN EVASION: German fleets which
sortie may attempt to evade the Allied fleets which
detached from the convoy to oppose them. Both
players roll one die. The German die roll is modified
according to the number of German fleet factors
involved: a German force consisting of 1-3 fleet
factors receives a +3 DRM, 4-6 fleet factors a +2
DRM, and 7-9 factors a + 1 DRM. If the German force
consists of more than nine fleet factors, the German
die roll is not modified.
37.541 If the German die roll is higher, the German
fleets evade the detached Allied fleets for the first
round of fleet combat and neither side makes a fleet
combat dice roll. A German air sortie is then
resolved (37.57), after which additional rounds of
fleet combat may take place (37.551). The German
fleets may continue to attempt to evade any Allied
fleets which detached from the convoy to oppose
them until an evasion attempt fails, after which
fleet combat is resolved normally.
37.542 If the die roll is tied, or if the Allied die roll is
higher, fleet combat takes place (37.55).
37.55 FLEET COMBAT: If German fleets sortied to
intercept the Allied convoy and did not evade the
Allied fleets detached from the convoy to oppose
them, one round of fleet combat is resolved
between the German fleets and the detached Allied
A3R rules rewrite v.3
fleets. The detached Allied fleets are not subject to
the adverse fleet combat DRM usually associated
with escorting fleets (27.5713).
37.551 ADDITIONAL ROUNDS OF FLEET COMBAT:
After the first round of fleet combat has been
resolved, the German player may continue the fleet
combat with the fleets which originally sortied,
commit additional fleets from the Murmansk box to
the fleet combat, or send some or all of his
intercepting fleets back to the Murmansk box.
Similarly, the Allied player may detach additional
fleets from the convoy to oppose the German fleet
sortie or return some or all of his detached fleets to
the convoy.
37.552 Fleet combat between the German fleets
which sortied and the Allied fleets which detached
from the convoy to oppose them ends when one
side is eliminated or withdraws, either voluntarily
or after losing fleet combat (27.574).
37.553 If the German fleets are defeated in fleet
combat, the surviving German fleets return to the
Murmansk box and the surviving Allied fleets
return to the convoy. No additional German fleet
sorties are allowed for the remainder of the turn.
37.554 If the Allied fleets detached to oppose the
German fleets are defeated in fleet combat, the
surviving Allied fleets return to the convoy and the
surviving German fleets may engage the convoy
itself (37.56).
37.56 GERMAN FLEET ATTACKS ON THE CONVOY: If
the Allies did not detach fleets to oppose the
German fleets which sortied, or if such Allied fleets
were defeated in fleet combat, fleet combat takes
place between the German fleets and Allied fleets
escorting the convoy itself, at the German player’s
option. No reinforcement of the naval forces
engaged is permitted. The Allied fleets which are
escorting the convoy are subject to an adverse DRM
(27.5713).
37.561 If the German fleets are defeated in fleet
combat, the surviving German fleets return to the
Murmansk box. No additional German fleet sorties
are allowed for the remainder of the turn.
37.562 SCATTERING THE CONVOY: If Allied fleets
escorting the convoy are defeated in fleet combat,
they return to their ports of origin and the convoy
scatters. One BRP is lost from the convoy for each
75
surviving, undamaged German fleet factor which
engaged the convoy. After air and submarine
attacks are resolved (37.574, 37.64), any surviving
BRPs are added to the Russian BRP total.
37.57 GERMAN AIR SORTIES: At the start of each
round of fleet combat, German air units in the
Murmansk box may fly an air sortie against Allied
fleets detached to oppose a German fleet sortie, the
convoy itself, or both, even if the German fleets
evaded Allied fleets detached to oppose them
(37.54). The Allied fleets detached to oppose a
German fleet sortie are not counted toward the air
defense of the convoy, just as fleets which remain
with the convoy are not counted toward the air
defense of the Allied fleets detached to oppose a
German fleet sortie.
CLARIFICATION: Each air factor may either attack the
detached fleets or the convoy in a given round, but not
both.
37.571 If the convoy is under attack by German
fleets (37.56), attacking German air units receive a
+1 DRM on their air attack dice roll.
37.572 The German player may launch air sorties
against the convoy even if fleet combat did not take
place or has been resolved. German air attacks
cease when the convoy is destroyed, all attacking
air units have been eliminated or the German
player no longer wishes to make air attacks.
37.573 AIR ATTACKS AGAINST THE CONVOY: In
addition to the normal results of air attacks on
escorting Allied fleets, one BRP is lost from the
convoy for each Allied fleet factor which is
eliminated.
CLARIFICATION: If the convoy is left unescorted
because all fleets detached, no Air Defense roll is made.
One BRP is still lost for each “sunk” result inflicted on the
convoy.
37.574 AIR ATTACKS ON A SCATTERED CONVOY: If
the convoy scatters (37.562), no air defense dice roll
is made by the convoy, and all losses from air attack
(the numbers before and after the “/” on the Air
Attack Table) are inflicted on the BRPs being sent to
Russia. The first air sortie against a scattered
convoy is made by all available German air factors;
the second by all but one; the third by all but two;
and so on, until no more air sorties may be made.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
No German air factors are lost during these attacks,
as no air defense dice rolls are made.
37.6 SUBMARINE EFFECTS: Submarine effects on a
Murmansk convoy are resolved once all German
fleet and air attacks have ceased.
37.61 When carrying out an attack on a Murmansk
convoy, the German player need not reveal all the
German submarines in the Murmansk box. Only
those which actually attack the convoy are
disclosed. The Allies do not reveal their ASW
commitment to a Murmansk convoy until it is
attacked by submarines.
37.62 Submarine effects are resolved in exactly the
same manner as in the SW box (42.5). Each ASW
factor assigned to the convoy and each Allied 9-
factor fleet accompanying the convoy which
survived fleet combat and air attacks counts toward
determining the SW ratio (42.5122).
37.63 For each round of fleet combat which took
place between German fleets which sortied and the
Allied fleets escorting the convoy, regardless of
result, the German player receives an additional +1
DRM on the Strategic Warfare Effects dice roll.
There is no modifier for fleet combat between
intercepting German fleets and Allied fleets
detached from the convoy to oppose them.
37.64 If the convoy scatters (37.562), escorting
Allied fleets and ASW are ignored and all
submarines are 100% effective against the convoy.
37.65 If Germany controls Bergen, each submarine
factor has the potential to eliminate three BRPs
from the convoy, otherwise each submarine factor
potentially eliminates two BRPs.
37.7 After submarine effects are resolved, surviving
BRPs are added to the Russian total. The number of
BRPs reaching Russia can never exceed twice the
number of surviving Allied escorting fleet factors
(27.621). Excess BRPs are eliminated.
37.8 After resolving any opposition to a Murmansk
convoy, all German air and fleet units are inverted
and remain in the Murmansk box until moved or
SRed out of the Murmansk box in a subsequent Axis
turn. Allied fleets are inverted and return to their
bases.
76
38. BRP GRANTS THROUGH PERSIA
38.1 Allied BRP grants to Russia may be made
through Persia into southern Russia. Such BRP
grants are more difficult to intercept than
Murmansk convoys (37), but the Persian route is
more expensive to open and BRP grants take longer
to arrive. In addition, the capacity of the southern
route is smaller, as no more than 20 BRPs may be
sent each turn.
38.2 To use the Persian route, one Western Allied
major power must pay 25 BRPs during its unit
construction phase. This expenditure represents
the cost of creating and improving transportation
facilities in Persia and the exertion of political
pressure. This action places all Persian hexes under
the control of the Western Allied major power
which pays the 25 BRPs, makes Bushire an
unlimited Western Allied supply source and allows
off-board SRs to and from Bushire. Previous Allied
control of Persia, either as a result of an Allied DoW
and occupation of Persia, or an Allied conquest of
an Axis-controlled Persia, does not reduce the 25
BRP cost of opening the Persian route.
CLARIFICATION: If the Western Allied major power
which paid the 25 BRPs is conquered, another 25 BRP
expenditure is not required before the route may be used.
CLARIFICATION: Persian hexes come under the control
of the Western Allied power that pays the BRPs to open
the route even if Persia has been conquered by Russia. In
either case, hexes occupied by Axis units stay Axis-
controlled.
CLARIFICATION: The U.S. pays to open the Persian
route. Subsequently, Britain sends units into Persia. If
Germany then DoWs Persia, Persia immediately becomes
an American, not British, associated minor because the
U.S. already controls the Persian hexes. In addition, if
Germany goes on to conquer Persia, 54.2 does not apply
because the U.S. already controls all Persian hexes.
Germany only controls the hexes it actually captures, not
all hexes that do not contain an Allied unit.
38.21 The Allies may open the Persian route after
Germany and Russia are at war, or if Persia is active
as an Axis minor ally as a result of an Axis
diplomatic die roll for Persia. Any pro-Axis coup in
Persia must be suppressed by the Allies before the
Persian route may be opened. The route may be
opened even if Russia has surrendered.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
38.3 The Persian route may not be opened, or, if it
has been opened, Allied BRPs may not be sent to
Russia through Persia if any of the following
conditions exist:
A. There is no Allied SR route from Basra or Bushire
to Tehran.
B. The Axis control Grozny, Astrakhan and
Krasnovodsk.
C. A pro-Axis coup has resulted in Persia becoming
an Axis minor ally.
38.31 If any of the above conditions arise after the
Persian route is opened, the Allies may reopen it
without the need for a second 25 BRP expenditure
by reestablishing the SR route, recapturing any one
city in the group of cities controlled by the Axis, or
by suppressing the pro-Axis coup by conquering
Persia, as the case may be.
38.4 Allied BRPs granted to Russia take two turns to
reach their destination. During the SR phase of the
first turn, which may be no sooner than the Allied
player turn in which the Persian route is first
opened, the BRPs are SRed to the South Africa box.
This SR requires sea escort from fleets based in
Britain, the U.S. or France, depending on which
major power is granting the BRPs.
38.41 In the SR phase of the following Allied player
turn, provided the Persian route has not been cut,
the BRPs are added to Russia’s BRP total. Unlike the
first SR, no sea escort is required and the SR is not
charged against the granting major power’s SR
capacity (20.52).
38.42 While in the South Africa box, BRPs do not
exist in any major power’s BRP inventory and are
not subject to growth or reduction during a YSS (if
initially SRed in a Winter turn). BRPs in the South
Africa box are counted in the Allied total when
determining the initiative (9.16).
38.5 BRPs granted to Russia may remain in the
South Africa box, although no more than 20 BRPs
may accumulate there. However, for each turn in
which BRPs remain in the South Africa box beyond
the one turn required for transit, 25% (round up) of
the BRPs are eliminated due to wastage.
38.6 The granting Allied major power may, for any
reason, cancel a BRP grant to Russia by returning
the granted BRPs from the South Africa box to its
own BRP inventory. The normal SR cost is charged
77
for such returning BRPs, although no sea escort is
required.
38.7 If the Persian route is cut (38.3) while BRPs are
en route, the BRPs remain in the South Africa box
until the Persian route is reopened or the BRPs are
returned to the granting major power.
39. BRP GRANTS THROUGH TURKEY
39.1 Allied BRP grants to Russia may be made
through Turkey if the Allies can trace an SR route
by sea to a Mediterranean port in Turkey, then
through Turkey to the eastern edge of the
mapboard in Russia. The SR route may not pass
through Lebanon-Syria, Iraq or Persia, or any hexes
under Axis control or in an Axis ZoC.
39.2 The mechanics of such BRP grants are similar
to BRP grants through Persia (38), but no 25 BRP
activation cost need be paid. During the first turn of
the BRP grant, the BRPs are SRed, using sea escort,
through the Atlantic and Mediterranean to
Istanbul, Izmir or Antioch, and may be intercepted
by Axis units. During the second turn of the BRP
grant, the BRPs are SRed through Turkey into
Russia.
39.3 The Axis may prevent BRP grants through
Turkey by intercepting them in the Atlantic or
Mediterranean or by cutting the SR route through
Turkey to the eastern edge of the mapboard in
Russia, either in Turkey or in Russia itself. BRPs
granted through Turkey are considered to be in the
Turkish Mediterranean port at the end of the first
Allied SR phase, are subject to the same 25%
wastage as BRPs granted through Persia if they
remain in the port for more than one turn (38.5)
and are eliminated if the Axis gain control of the
port.
40. KEY ECONOMIC AREAS
40.1 Certain areas were essential to the economy or
administration of the major power which
controlled them. The loss of such an area results in
the immediate loss of 25 BRPs by the original
controlling major power. That major power and its
allies do not get one turn to recapture the area
before the 25 BRP loss is incurred. The 25 BRP loss
may occur only once per year. There is no
additional penalty if the area is recaptured then
lost again during the same year. During each
subsequent YSS in which the original controlling
A3R rules rewrite v.3
major power or its allies do not control the area,
another 25 BRPs are subtracted from the original
controlling major power’s BRP total for that year.
40.11 Where a key economic area consists of two
cities, both cities in the area must be under enemy
control to trigger the 25 BRP penalty. Recapture of
one of the two cities is enough to prevent an
additional penalty during the next YSS.
CLARIFICATION: Recapture of one of the cities is not
enough, however, to cause a conquering power to lose the
BRPs it has received from a key economic area in a
previous YSS. For that, both cities must be recaptured.
40.12 Each German key economic area (Berlin, Bonn
and Essen (the Ruhr)) is worth one-sixth of the
German BRP base. Each German key economic area
is therefore worth 25 BRPs at the start of the game,
but increases in value if Germany’s BRP base grows.
40.2 Loss of the following key economic areas
triggers the BRP loss described in 40.1 for the
indicated major power:
40.21 GERMANY: A. Berlin. B. Bonn and Essen (the
Ruhr).
40.22 BRITAIN: A. London. B. Manchester and
Birmingham.
40.23 FRANCE: Paris.
40.3 If London is under Axis control during a YSS,
the controlling Axis major power receives 12 BRPs.
Similarly, if Manchester and Birmingham are under
Axis control during a YSS, the controlling Axis
major power receives 12 BRPs. If all three cities are
under Axis control, the controlling Axis major
power receives 25 BRPs, not 24.
41. ECONOMIC WARFARE
41.1 Apart from the elimination of enemy units and
the conquest of enemy territory, both the Axis and
the Allies may eliminate enemy BRPs in a number of
other ways.
41.2 The principal method for eliminating enemy
BRPs is Strategic Warfare (SW) - the employment of
submarines (by Germany) and strategic bombers
(by Britain and the U.S.). The procedure for SW is
detailed below (42).
78
41.3 In addition, German air units may bomb Britain
(43) and German fleets may operate in the Atlantic
as raiders (44). Axis variant 24 allows the use of V-
weapons against Britain. The Allies may, if allowed
to do so by Allied variant 25, employ the atomic
bomb against Germany (45).
42. STRATEGIC WARFARE (SW)
42.1 OVERVIEW: SW units are constructed during
each YSS and allocated equally over the four turns
of the following year (42.31). Each major power
secretly deploys that turn’s available SW forces at
the start of its turn, after it makes its option
selections. SW is resolved during the SW resolution
phase, at the end of each game turn. When the year
is completed, new SW units are constructed and the
process is repeated.
42.2 STRATEGIC WARFARE CONSTRUCTION:
42.21 Only Germany may construct submarines and
interceptors; only Britain and the U.S. may
construct ASW and SAC factors. SW construction is
limited to 10% of a major power’s total YSS BRP
allotment (fractions rounded down). SW
construction is not limited by the countermix.
42.211 Germany and Britain may begin SW
construction in the 1940 YSS. The U.S. may start
constructing SW forces beginning with the YSS
after the USAT reaches 37, even if it is not yet at
war with the Axis (76).
42.212 Germany may construct submarines only if it
is at war with either Britain or the U.S., or if the
USAT is 37 or greater. The latter situation may arise
after an early British surrender (75). Submarines
already built before peace with Britain remain
available for later use.
42.213 The Allies may construct SAC factors even if
they are unable to deploy them against Germany
(42.45).
42.214 Italy, France, and Russia may not construct
SW forces.
42.22 SW CONSTRUCTION COSTS: Each submarine
factor costs one BRP to construct. Each SAC facor
costs two BRPs to construct. [OPTIONAL: Two SAC
factors may be constructed for three BRPs, except
that a single SAC factor may be constructed for two
BRPs to round up SW expenditures to the 10% level
A3R rules rewrite v.3
(42.21).] Each ASW and interceptor factor costs two
BRPs to construct.
42.23 Newly constructed SW units, together with
SW units which survived the previous year’s SW
resolution phases, are placed face down in the SW
box.
42.24 Instead of placing SW counters in the SW box,
players may wish to record their mix of SW factors
on a sheet of paper in order to prevent an opponent
from deducing their composition from the number
of counters used. While the type of SW units
constructed may be concealed until they are used,
the number of BRPs spent on SW construction must
always be revealed during the YSS.
42.25 If the BRP totals of each side are close enough
that SW construction could affect which side moves
first in the coming Spring turn, or if one side’s
expenditures on SW construction might influence
the other’s, either player may require spending
decisions to be written on a sheet of paper and
revealed simultaneously.
42.26 BRPs spent on SW construction do not count
toward a major power’s BRP spending limit (35.1).
42.3 ALLOCATION OF STRATEGIC WARFARE FORCES:
42.31 After SW construction, each player’s available
SW forces are allocated equally over the four turns
of the following year. All available SW forces must
be allocated.
42.32 The number of SW factors allocated to each
turn is calculated by dividing the total number of
factors of each type of SW unit by four, and
rounding down fractions. This is done separately
for submarines, interceptors, SAC and ASW. Excess
factors are allocated to the Spring turn first, then
Summer, and so on. The U.S. and Britain add their
SW factors together before allocating them.
EXAMPLE: Germany constructs 17 submarine factors
and three interceptors in the 1941 YSS. Five submarine
factors are allocated to the Spring 1941 turn, and four to
each of the other three turns in 1941. One interceptor is
allocated to Spring, Summer and Fall 1941. No
interceptors are allocated to Winter 1941.
42.4 DEPLOYMENT OF STRATEGIC WARFARE
FORCES:
79
42.41 At the start of each turn, every major power
secretly deploys its available SW forces for the turn,
immediately after the side with the initiative has
made its option selections. (EXCEPTION: If Germany
has no submarines to deploy that turn, the German
player must inform the Allied player of this before
any Allied SW deployments are made). Deployment
consists of writing down how many submarines or
ASW factors are sent to the Murmansk box that
turn, as well as whether and how many SAC factors
or interceptors are being employed for SW.
42.411 RESTRICTED SUBMARINE WARFARE: Every
turn Germany has submarines available, it must
declare either unlimited or restricted submarine
warfare before any SW forces are deployed.
Unlimited submarine warfare increases the USAT
(76). If Germany chooses to conduct restricted
submarine warfare, then each submarine eliminates
a maximum of one British BRP and no submarines
may deploy to the Murmansk box that turn. The
German player must inform the Allies of his choice
before any Allied SW deployments are made.
CLARIFICATION: If Germany’s declaration of unlimited
submarine warfare causes USAT to reach 37, then the
U.S. may deploy ASW forces (76) in this turn's SW
deployment phase.
42.412 AMERICAN ASW FORCES WHILE THE U.S. IS
NEUTRAL: When the USAT reaches 37, the U.S. may
immediately deploy one ASW factor and one 9-
factor fleet to the SW box. These forces are taken
into account when resolving SW that turn. In the
next turn's SW deployment phase, the U.S. may
deploy additional forces to the SW box (see 76).
There is no BRP cost for ASW factors acquired this
way. American ASW forces may not be deployed to
the Murmansk box while the U.S. is neutral.
EXAMPLE: USAT reaches 37 during the Axis Summer
1941 player turn. The U.S. may immediately place one
ASW factor and one 9-factor fleet in the SW box for use
during the Summer 1941 SW resolution phase. During the
Fall 1941 SW deployment phase, the U.S. may place
another ASW factor and deploy a total of two 9-factor
fleets in the SW box. These forces will be used during the
Fall 1941 SW resolution phase.
42.42 SUBMARINE DEPLOYMENT: Germany must
deploy all available submarine factors to either the
SW box or the Murmansk box. German submarines
may deploy to the Murmansk box whether or not
A3R rules rewrite v.3
Germany controls Bergen (37.42), but not if
Germany declares restricted submarine warfare
(42.411). Submarine factors may not be held back.
42.43 INTERCEPTOR DEPLOYMENT: Germany
chooses whether and how many interceptors to
deploy each turn. Unlike submarines, not every
available interceptor needs to be deployed. Any
number of interceptors may be held back.
42.44 ASW DEPLOYMENT: Western Allies must
deploy all their ASW factors to either the SW box or
the Murmansk box. ASW factors may not be held
back. The U.S. may use its ASW factors against
German submarines even while neutral (42.412).
42.45 SAC DEPLOYMENT: SAC factors may not be
deployed if the Western Allies do not control a fully
supplied air base within seven hexes of the Ruhr
(Bonn/Essen). Even if the Western Allies have such
an air base, SAC factors do not need to be deployed
and may be held back. The Western Allies need not
inform Germany about whether they have deployed
SAC factors. A neutral U.S. may not deploy its SAC
factors.
42.46 DEPLOYMENT OF ALLIED FLEETS AND
GERMAN AIR FACTORS TO SW:
42.461 ALLIED FLEETS: After SW forces have been
deployed (42.41), Britain and the U.S. (if the U.S. is
at war with the Axis or if the USAT has reached 37)
may provide additional protection for Allied
convoys in the Atlantic by deploying 9-factor fleets
to the SW box. In addition, fleets already in the SW
box may withdraw at this time. Only complete 9-
factor fleets may deploy to the SW box. Fragments
may not be used as a hedge against possible losses
from German raiders. Fleets deployed to the SW box
must be based in Britain or the U.S. Deployment of
fleets to or from the SW box does not count against
SR capacity and may not be intercepted. Allied
fleets in the SW box also defend against raiders
(44.4), as well as Axis air and naval interception of
sea supply lines from the U.S. (29.343) and initial
deployments (20.843). Such fleets may not perform
any other missions while in the SW box.
CLARIFICATION: Inverted fleets may deploy to the SW
box.
42.4611 If Allied 9-factor fleets in the SW box incur
losses, the remnants must be withdrawn or
reinforced during the next SW deployment phase.
80
British fleets withdrawn from the SW box must
return to ports in Britain or the U.S. box; American
fleets must return to the U.S. box.
42.462 GERMAN AIR FACTORS: Germany may place
air factors in the SW box in order to strengthen its
air defenses against Allied bombers. Such air factors
must be based in Germany, may not perform any
missions or other functions while in the SW box,
and return to air bases in Germany if withdrawn
from the SW box during a subsequent SW
deployment phase.
42.5 STRATEGIC WARFARE RESOLUTION:
42.51 GENERAL:
42.511 During the SW resolution phase of each
game turn, both players reveal their deployment of
submarine, ASW, SAC and interceptor factors.
(EXCEPTION: If the Allies are unable to bomb
Germany (42.45), no SAC or interceptor factors are
revealed). Allied fleets being used for
antisubmarine duties and German air factors being
used for air defense are not hidden and will already
be known.
42.512 The effect of offensive SW units (submarine
and SAC factors) on enemy BRPs is determined by a
dice roll on the Strategic Warfare Effects Table
(42.513), as modified by the ratio of offensive to
defensive SW units (42.5122) and other factors as
indicated in the Strategic Warfare Effects Table.
42.5121 The first step in determining BRP losses
from SW is to calculate the maximum number of
BRPs which could potentially be eliminated by the
enemy offensive SW units (42.411, 42.5221, 42.532).
42.5122 SW RATIO TABLE: Once the maximum
number of BRPs which might be eliminated from
SW is determined, two dice are rolled and the
Strategic Warfare Effects Table consulted. The
Strategic Warfare Effects dice roll is modified
according to the ratio of offensive to defensive SW
units, as indicated in the Strategic Warfare Ratio
Table. The table assumes a surplus of offensive SW
factors. If there are more defensive SW factors, the
“+” becomes “-”, and the Strategic Warfare Effects
dice roll is reduced. In either case, the ratio is
rounded in favor of the smaller side.
42.5123 Allied fleets and German air factors
deployed to the SW box are taken into account in
A3R rules rewrite v.3
determining the ratio of offensive to defensive SW
units. Each Allied 9-factor fleet is treated as an ASW
factor, even if it engaged in fleet combat prior to
SW resolution, and each German air factor is
treated as an interceptor. The ratio in the SW box
(which represents the Atlantic convoy routes) does
not include Allied ASW factors deployed to the
Murmansk box (42.44), even if the Murmansk
convoy was unopposed. On the other hand, the total
number of German submarines used in the Atlantic
does include those deployed to the Murmansk box
(42.42) but not used against a Murmansk convoy
that turn (either because there was no convoy or
because the German player decided not to commit
them (37.61)), although submarines from the
Murmansk box operate at a reduced level of
effectiveness in the Atlantic (42.5221). German
submarine factors used to attack a Murmansk
convoy may not be considered in determining the
SW ratio in the Atlantic.
42.513 STRATEGIC WARFARE EFFECTS TABLE: Two
dice are rolled and the Strategic Warfare Effects
Table is consulted. The resulting percentage is used
to determine the effectiveness of SW for that turn.
42.514 Details of submarine and bomber resolution
are set out below. In all cases, the percentage result
from the Strategic Warfare Effects Table is applied
to all the offensive SW units used this turn.
42.515 Once the effect of offensive SW units is
determined for each side, SW units are eliminated
and the surviving SW factors put aside until the
following year.
42.52 SUBMARINE WARFARE:
42.521 German submarines may be directed against
British and/or American BRPs. The German player
allocates the total BRP damage to either country in
any way that he chooses, and may inflict BRP
damage on either country even if that country has
no BRPs remaining to absorb the damage (33.3).
Germany may not choose to eliminate American
BRPs before the U.S. is at war with the Axis.
42.522 The maximum number of BRPs each
submarine factor may eliminate is determined by
whether Germany engaged in unrestricted warfare
(42.411), whether the submarine was originally
deployed to the Murmansk box, and (for
submarines deployed to the SW box) the supplied
81
ports from which it may operate. Control is
determined at the moment of SW resolution. The
ports need not have been controlled for the entire
game turn, but they must have been supplied
during an Axis supply determination phase.
CLARIFICATION: If the Axis gain control of one of the
French ports during the Axis player turn, trace supply to
the port after the Axis combat phase and the Allies do
not recapture the port, each German submarine could
eliminate three Allied BRPs even if France is
unconquered. But if the Axis only gained control of the
French ports at the end of the Allied player turn, as a
result of the French surrender (47.62), the ports would be
unsupplied and each German submarine could eliminate
a maximum of two Allied BRPs.
42.5221 Provided that Germany engages in
unlimited submarine warfare, each German
submarine factor deployed to the SW box has the
potential to eliminate a minimum of two Western
Allied BRPs. If the Axis control Brest, St. Nazaire, La
Rochelle or Vigo, each German submarine factor
may eliminate three Allied BRPs. If, in addition to
one of the above ports, the Axis also control
Gibraltar, each German submarine factor may
eliminate four Allied BRPs. In addition, each
German submarine factor in the Murmansk box
that was not used against a Murmansk convoy has
the potential to eliminate one BRP.
42.5222 [See the Axis SW Warfare Effects Table]
42.523 After BRP losses from submarines are
calculated, submarine and ASW losses are
determined.
42.524 Each 9-factor fleet in the SW box and each
ASW factor deployed this turn eliminates one
submarine factor. The locations of the ASW factors
and the submarine factors is irrelevant. All ASW
and submarine factors in the SW and Murmansk
boxes are considered together. 9-factor fleets are
not eliminated. ASW factors which eliminate
submarine factors are then themselves eliminated.
CLARIFICATION: At the end of most turns, either all
German submarines or all the Allied ASW factors
deployed during that turn will be eliminated.
EXAMPLE: The Allies have three 9-factor fleets and five
ASW factors in the SW box. The Germans have twelve
submarine factors and control the French ports.
Germany deploys six submarine factors to the SW box
A3R rules rewrite v.3
and the rest to the Murmansk box. The Allies deploy
nothing to the Murmansk box and do not send a
Murmansk convoy that turn. The SW ratio in the
Atlantic is thus 12 submarines versus five ASW factors
plus three 9-factor fleets (12:8 which becomes 4:3 for a +1
modifier on the SW Effects dice roll). The modified result
is applied to a total of 24 BRPs maximum damage [(6 x 3
=18) + (6 x 1 = 6)] because the submarines in the
Murmansk box may only eliminate a maximum of one
BRP each when they operate in the Atlantic. If Germany
had deployed all its submarines to the Atlantic, the
maximum damage would have been 36 BRPs (12 x 3). The
SW ratio would be unchanged.
Had the Allies sent a Murmansk convoy and deployed
two ASW factors to the Murmansk box; and all the
German submarines in the Murmansk box had attacked
the convoy, the Atlantic SW ratio would have been 6:6
(1:1).
After BRP losses are calculated, eight submarine factors
and five ASW factors will be eliminated. The submarine
factors may come from either box. These losses would
have been exactly the same even if Germany had used all
its submarines to attack the Murmansk convoy.
42.525 Allied fleets which engage Axis air and naval
units, including raiders are still effective against
submarines, although fleets which have been
reduced below nine factors are not. If possible, such
fragments should be combined into 9-factor fleets
to ensure maximum effectiveness against
submarines (27.71).
42.526 Allied 9-factor fleets in the SW box eliminate
submarine factors before ASW factors are
employed. ASW factors which are not required
because all enemy submarine factors have been
eliminated, whether by fleets or by other ASW
factors, survive and may be used in a subsequent
year. Similarly, surviving submarine factors may be
used in the following year (42.7).
42.527 Allied 9-factor fleets and ASW factors only
eliminate submarines at the moment of SW
resolution on that turn. They have no effect on
submarines which will be used in other turns.
42.53 STRATEGIC BOMBING:
42.531 If there is no supplied, Allied-controlled hex
within seven hexes of the Ruhr (Bonn/Essen), no
Allied strategic bombing of Germany is permitted,
82
no elimination of SAC and interceptor factors
occurs and no BRPs are lost by Germany. While such
a hex must be supplied, control is determined at the
moment of SW resolution. The hex need not have
been controlled for the entire game turn.
42.532 Each SAC factor has the potential to
eliminate three German BRPs (EXCEPTION: Allied
variant 24 increases this to four German BRPs).
42.5321 [See the Allied SW Warfare Effects Table]
42.533 After BRP losses from SAC factors are
calculated, SAC and interceptor losses are
determined.
42.534 One SAC factor is eliminated for each
German air factor and each interceptor factor in the
SW box. The German air factors are not eliminated.
Interceptor factors which eliminate SAC factors are
themselves eliminated.
42.535 German air factors in the SW box eliminate
SAC factors before interceptor factors are
employed. Interceptor factors which are not
required because all enemy SAC factors have been
eliminated, whether by German air factors in the
SW box or other interceptor factors, survive and
may be used in a subsequent year. Similarly,
surviving SAC factors may be used in the following
year (42.7).
42.536 In any turn in which German air factors and
interceptors in the SW box fail to eliminate all the
Allied SAC factors deployed for SW for that turn,
the German air factor closest to the Ruhr is
removed from the board. This air factor is
immediately converted into an interceptor factor,
which is then exchanged for one of the surviving
SAC factors. Air factors converted to interceptors in
this manner are removed from the German force
pool; they may reenter the German force pool,
unbuilt, during a subsequent Axis unit construction
phase at the rate of one factor per turn, provided
no forced conversion of German air factors to
interceptors was required during the SW resolution
phase of the preceding game turn.
EXAMPLE: In the 1944 YSS, Germany builds 12
submarine factors and nine interceptors. The Allies build
eight ASW factors and 17 SAC factors. In Spring 1944,
three German submarine factors are opposed by two
ASW factors, aided by one Allied 9-factor fleet. At this
stage in the game, Germany controls Brest, so the
A3R rules rewrite v.3
maximum BRP damage which three submarine factors
may inflict is nine; a Strategic Warfare Effects dice roll of
10 (modified to six because of the year) means the
submarines are only 40% effective. Four Western Allied
BRPs are lost. The three German submarine factors and
the two Allied ASW factors are eliminated; the Allied 9-
factor fleet survives. Five Allied SAC factors and three
German interceptors are deployed in Spring 1944. The
five Allied SAC factors are capable of eliminating 15
German BRPs. The ratio of bombers to interceptors is 5:3,
so the Allied Strategic Warfare Effects dice roll is
modified by +2. The Allies also receive a +1 DRM because
of the year. The dice roll is 2 + 2 + 1 = 5, so the Allied
bombers are 60% effective and nine German BRPs are
eliminated. The three German interceptors and three of
the Allied SAC factors are eliminated. In addition, the
German air factor closest to the Ruhr is removed, taking
with it one excess Allied SAC factor (42.536), leaving one
Allied SAC factor available for use in 1945.
42.6 DEPLOYMENT OF STRATEGIC WARFARE
FORCES DURING THE YEAR:
42.61 [Removed due to change in the SW
deployment rules]
42.62 [Removed due to change in the SW
deployment rules]
42.63 [Removed due to change in the SW
deployment rules]
42.64 [Moved to 42.412]
42.7 SURVIVING SW FORCES:
42.71 SW forces which survive SW resolution are
placed face up in the SW box and may be employed
in the following year.
42.72 SW forces may not be employed more than
once in the same year. SW forces which were
available but not deployed in an earlier turn may
not be deployed in a later turn that year.
EXAMPLE: The Allies may not leave SAC factors
undeployed in Spring and Summer, then deploy them in
Fall and Winter in order to overwhelm German
interceptors.
42.8 In addition to the effects of SW resolution set
out above, the SR capacity of major powers may be
reduced by SW losses (20.11, 20.15, 20.16).
83
43. GERMAN BOMBING OF BRITAIN
43.1 In any Axis combat phase, German (but not
Italian, even if lent, or Axis minor) air units within
range of any Allied-controlled British objective hex
may bomb Britain. Western Allied air units within
range of any such British objective hex may oppose
the German air units. Neither side may employ air
units which are already inverted.
43.2 Germany must declare an offensive option or
conduct a limited offensive operation on the
Western front to bomb Britain. Air units which
bomb Britain are considered to be on a mission, and
are inverted at the end of the Axis player turn.
Similarly, Allied air units which oppose the German
bombing of Britain may not be otherwise employed
and are inverted at the end of the Axis player turn.
43.3 If Germany bombs with more factors than
there are defending Allied factors, then Allied air
units engage in air combat with an equal number of
German factors. Rule 26.66 applies if more than five
air factors are involved. Combat is resolved
normally, with the Allies receiving an additional air
combat die roll modification of +1 in each air battle.
Germany never receives a favorable air combat die
roll modification for size, because the surplus
German air factors do not engage in air combat
(although they do eliminate British BRPs - 43.4).
43.31 If the Allied air factors outnumber the
German air factors, the Allies will engage all
German factors and will also receive a favorable air
combat die roll modification (26.6A). In rare cases,
nationality modifiers may also apply, for example
where French air units are involved, or Germany
has jets (Axis variant 23).
43.4 RESOLUTION: Britain subtracts one BRP from
its total for each German air factor in excess of
defending Allied air factors. Britain eliminates
these BRPs at the end of the combat phase. For
German bombing to be effective, Britain must be in
possession of the BRPs from the target. If Britain
has already lost the BRPs for the target for the
current year because it has been captured by the
Axis (40.22), no additional BRPs can be lost to
bombing. This restriction does not apply to
previous BRP losses to bombing or V-weapons (Axis
variant 24).
EXAMPLE: Germany controls all three British objective
hexes during the 1941 YSS, then loses London to a British
A3R rules rewrite v.3
counterattack in Spring 1941. Germany cannot bomb
Britain in Summer 1941, because Britain has already lost
the BRPs for London during the 1941 YSS. Bombing would
also have no effect if the Axis first captured London in
Spring 1941, then lost it to a British counterattack, or if
the Axis re-capture London in Summer 1941. In both
cases, Britain would lose 25 BRPs for London (40.22) and
could not suffer additional losses from bombing.
43.5 If Britain incurs a BRP deficit as a result of
German bombing, the British BRP base is reduced
by that amount during the following YSS (33.3).
43.6 BRPs lost by Britain as a result of German
bombing are taken into account in calculating the
British SR capacity for the next turn (20.15).
44. RAIDERS
44.1 OVERVIEW: During the first few years of the
war, German surface forces operated against Allied
shipping with varying degrees of success. The most
dramatic German raider operation resulted in the
loss of the Bismarck, but on other occasions less
well-known raiders inflicted considerable damage
on British shipping and disrupted convoy routes.
44.11 All raider activity takes place after both
players have completed their turns, immediately
before the SW resolution phase.
44.12 Before inflicting damage on Allied shipping,
raiders must first break out into the Atlantic,
evading Allied naval and air units.
44.13 Once in the Atlantic, raiders may encounter
and engage Allied fleets assigned to convoy
protection. Only after such combat is resolved do
raiders inflict losses on Allied shipping.
44.14 At the conclusion of the SW resolution phase,
raiders return to port.
44.15 BRP losses inflicted by raiders have the same
effects as BRP losses from submarines.
44.2 MOVEMENT OF RAIDERS INTO THE SW BOX:
44.21 After the conclusion of both player turns,
immediately before the start of the SW resolution
phase, uninverted German fleet factors in supplied
Western front ports or in the Murmansk box may
attempt to move off the western edge of the
mapboard into the SW box.
84
CLARIFICATION: Lent Italian fleet factors may not raid.
44.22 Raiders may be employed at no BRP cost, and
movement to the SW box may be attempted by
German fleet factors regardless of the option
previously selected by Germany for the Western
front, provided the raiding fleet factors did not
engage in a naval mission or activity (27.3) during
the current game turn. Similarly, unused German
air factors may provide air cover for raider
movement, regardless of the previous option
selection.
44.23 Each raider group may consist of no more
than nine German fleet factors. Only one raider
group may attempt to move to the SW box from
each Western front port and the Murmansk box
each turn (EXCEPTION: Two raider groups may
move to the SW box from Kiel and Portsmouth).
Each raider group moves separately to the SW box.
EXAMPLE: Germany has nine fleet factors in Kiel and 18
fleet factors in the Murmansk box. Germany may employ
up to nine fleet factors from Kiel and another nine fleet
factors from the Murmansk box as raiders, for a total of
18 fleet factors. Germany could not use all 18 fleets in the
Murmansk box as raiders because each raider group may
be composed of at most nine factors. On the other hand,
the nine factors from Kiel could constitute one or two
raider groups. Thus, Germany could send up to 18 factors
to the SW box in two or three groups. If Germany sent
two raider groups from Kiel, the Allies would have to
intercept each of them separately (27.543).
44.3 INTERCEPTION OF RAIDER MOVEMENT INTO
THE SW BOX:
44.31 The movement of raiders into the SW box may
be intercepted by uninverted Allied air units within
range of such movement and by any uninverted
Allied fleets based on the Western front. Each raider
group must be intercepted separately.
44.32 Air and naval interception of raiders moving
into the SW box is carried out normally
(26.453,27.5), subject to the modifications set out
below.
44.33 Raiders moving to the SW box from the
Murmansk box may only be intercepted by Allied
fleets based in Scapa Flow. A modified die roll of
“1”, “2” or “3” is required for interception.
Uninverted Allied air factors in Scapa Flow do not
modify this die roll.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
44.34 All raider interception die rolls are subject to
the following modifiers based on the raiding
group’s size: +1 if the raider group consists of 1-3
factors; -1 if the raider group consists of 7-9 factors.
An additional +1 DRM applies if Axis variant 2 has
been played.
EXAMPLE: The Allies attempt to intercept a 3-factor
raider group based in the Murmansk box with a 9-factor
fleet based in Scapa Flow. A die roll of “1” or “2” is
required for interception. If the raider group consisted of
a 9-factor fleet, a die roll of “1”, “2”, “3” or “4” would be
required for interception.
44.35 Fleet combat resulting from the successful
interception of raiders attempting to move into the
SW box is resolved normally (27.57). If the Allies
win the fleet combat, the raider must return to
port. If the Germans win the fleet combat, the
raider may, at the German player’s option, either
return to port or enter the SW box.
44.4 INTERCEPTION OF RAIDERS IN THE SW BOX:
44.41 Raiders which succeed in entering the SW box
are immediately subject to interception by Allied
fleets in the SW box (EXCEPTION: American fleets in
the SW box prior to U.S. entry into the war may not
intercept raiders even though they may operate
against submarines). One die roll is made to resolve
each interception attempt. Allied fleets may break
down into smaller units in order to increase the
chances of interception, provided each intercepting
force consists of at least as many naval factors as
the raider it tries to intercept. A modified die roll of
“1”, “2” or “3” is required for interception. This die
roll is subject to the modifiers set out in 44.34,
above. In addition, the interception die roll for an
Allied naval force consisting of less than nine naval
factors is subject to an additional +1 DRM.
EXAMPLE: The Allies have a 9-factor fleet in the SW box
when a single Axis raider consisting of 4 factors enters.
The Allies may either intercept with the whole fleet, in
which case no modifiers apply to the single interception
roll, or attempt to intercept with a 4-factor and a 5-factor
fleet. In the latter case, the Allies would roll twice, but
each roll would be subject to a +1 DRM.
44.42 If there is more than one raider group in the
SW box, the Allied player must announce which
raider is to be intercepted by which fleets before
any interception die rolls are made.
85
44.43 Once all SW box interception die rolls are
made, any resulting fleet combat is resolved
normally.
44.44 If the Allies win the fleet combat, the raider
must leave the SW box and return to port. If the
Germans win the fleet combat, the raider remains
in the SW box.
44.5 EFFECT OF RAIDERS IN THE SW BOX:
44.51 Once all combat between raiders and
intercepting Allied fleets has been resolved, the
Allies lose one BRP for each raider factor in the SW
box.
44.52 Allied fleets which engage in fleet combat
with raiders in the SW box may also conduct ASW,
although combat with raiders may well eliminate or
damage at least one Allied fleet factor, reducing a 9-
factor fleet to below the level required for ASW
duties. Fragments of Allied fleets may recombine
into 9-factor fleets after fleet combat with raiders is
concluded (27.71). Remnants must be withdrawn or
reinforced during the ensuing SW deployment
phase (42.4611).
44.6 RETURNING RAIDERS:
44.61 Whether successful or not, raiders always
return to their port of origin. The Murmansk box is
considered the port of origin of raiders which came
from it.
44.62 Returning raiders are not subject to
interception by Allied air and naval units.
POLITICS
46. DECLARATIONS OF WAR (DoWs)
46.1 DoWs may only be made at the beginning of a
player’s turn. A DoW against a major power costs 35
BRPs; a DoW against a minor country costs 10 BRPs
(EXCEPTION: British attack on a Vichy colony
(70.9)). A major power may not attack the forces of
a neutral country, or violate its territory by moving
ground units into it or flying air units over it. This
restriction extends to colonies and conquests of
another major power. Enemy units in a neutral
country may not be attacked without a DoW on the
neutral country. Air and naval units may enter
hexes which are part water and part neutral land.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
46.11 A major power which declares war on a
colony or minor country pays 35 BRPs for such a
DoW if the DoW automatically puts it at war with a
major power.
46.12 Any major power may declare war on Belgium
and Luxembourg as a unit by making a single DoW
at a cost of 10 BRPs. If a DoW is made against only
one of Belgium or Luxembourg, the other remains
neutral and a second DoW, requiring another 10
BRPs, must be made before it can be attacked.
46.13 The cost of a DoW may never be split between
two major powers.
46.2 A DoW places the declaring major power and
all its allies at war with the major power against
which the DoW is made, all its major and minor
allies and associated countries, and their colonies. If
the DoW is made by a previously neutral major
power, it brings that major power into alliance with
all major powers and minor countries at war with
the major power against which the DoW is made. No
other BRP cost is incurred beyond one DoW, no
matter how many other nations are involved. A
major power which has war declared against it does
not itself have to expend BRPs for a reciprocal DoW
against the declaring major power.
46.3 A DoW by one major power also allows an
allied major power to attack the major power
against which the DoW was made. The same is true
if the DoW were made against a minor country,
although the second major power could only attack
the minor country with the permission of the
declaring major power. Similarly, if a minor
country survives its first turn at war, a major power
allied to the declaring major power may join in
attacking the minor country without a separate
DoW. If two allied major powers cannot agree on
how to proceed against a minor country, 73.5 is
invoked and both major powers must pay for
separate DoWs.
46.31 Germany and Italy may not attack the same
minor country until Italy is at war with the Allies.
Similarly, Russia and the Western Allies may not
attack the same minor country until Russia is at war
with Germany.
EXAMPLE: In Fall 1939, a neutral Italy declares war on
Yugoslavia, but fails to conquer it. In Winter 1939, Italy
declares war on France. Because Germany is already at
86
war with France, Germany becomes allied with Italy, is
also at war with Yugoslavia. With Italy's permission,
Germany may take action against Yugoslavia without
making a separate DoW. If no permission is given,
Germany must make a separate DoW to engage against
Yugoslavian forces or to enter Yugoslavian territory
(73.5).
46.4 REQUIREMENTS OF A DOW: A major power
which declares war on another major power must
either move forces into territory controlled by that
major power or conduct an offensive, limited
offensive or attrition attack against that major
power’s forces or forces of a minor country
associated with or allied to that major power on the
turn it declares war. Failure to do so results in a
revocation of the DoW (46.43) (EXCEPTION: When
the U.S. declares war against Germany, and vice
versa, this requirement is ignored).
46.41 A major power which declares war on a minor
country must, on the turn it declares war, either
move forces into that minor country or conduct an
offensive, limited offensive or attrition option
attack against that minor country’s forces. Failure
to do so results in a revocation of the DoW (46.43).
46.42 The requirements of 46.4 and 46.41 can be met
in a number of ways. The flight of air or airborne
units over the target’s hexes is sufficient, even if no
attacks are made and no forces remain in the target
at the end of the movement or combat phase.
Similarly, unsuccessful ground attacks or
intercepted sea transport or invasions are
sufficient. Minor allied and associated minor
country units may be used to meet the
requirements. Lent Italian units are considered to
be German, not Italian, for the purpose of meeting
the requirements. A major power may not declare
war and use units of a major power ally to meet the
requirements. Thus France could not declare war
on Italy and take a pass option, while Britain took
an offensive option in the Mediterranean, even if
Britain gained control of Italian hexes and France
SRed units into those hexes.
46.43 If a major power fails to meet the
requirements of 46.4 or 46.41, its DoW is revoked at
the end of its combat phase and the BRPs spent for
the DoW are lost. The status of the nation which
was the object of the DoW reverts to whatever it
was before the now-revoked DoW was made. If the
target was a minor country, its units would be
A3R rules rewrite v.3
removed from the board. If Italian entry into the
war as a German ally is revoked, any German units
in Italy which do not leave Italy by the end of the
Axis SR phase are eliminated. A revoked DoW still
affects the USAT and the relevant diplomatic tables.
46.5 RUSSIA: Until Russia is at war with Germany,
the only minor countries on which Russia may
declare war are Turkey, Bulgaria, Rumania, Greece,
Hungary, Yugoslavia, the Baltic States and Finland.
Such DoWs are subject to the requirements of 46.41.
In addition, Russia may declare war only as
permitted by the Russian diplomatic result in effect
at the time it wishes to make a DoW (see Appendix
II). Russia begins the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios with a “3-5” diplomatic result in effect
(58.21).
46.51 Russia may not attack a Vichy colony until
Russia is at war with Germany, and then would have
to declare war on Vichy France to do so, unless
Vichy were already an Axis minor ally or had been
deactivated.
46.52 If a neutral Italy declares war on Russia, the
Western Allies are free to declare war on Italy and
thus place Germany and Russia at war.
46.6 The Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios begin
with Germany already at war with Britain, France
and Poland. No DoW BRPs are subtracted.
46.7 U.S. DoWs: The 1944 scenario begins with the
U.S. at war with Germany and thus no American
DoW is necessary. However, in the Campaign Game,
1939, 1941 and 1942 scenarios the U.S. must declare
war on the Axis, unless Germany first declares war
on the U.S. Both DoWs cost 35 BRPs (46.1). Italy may
not declare war on the U.S. The U.S. may not
declare war on the Axis until the USAT reaches 50.
The U.S. may not declare war on any minor
countries until it is at war with the Axis. In the 1942
scenario, the U.S. may declare war on the Axis in
Spring 1942.
46.8 A DoW may not be made which would result in
war between the eventual Axis partners (Germany
and Italy) or the eventual Allied partners (France,
Britain, Russia and the U.S.).
47. SURRENDER OF MAJOR POWERS
47.1 When a major power surrenders, it is
conquered and the provisions relating to the
87
conquest of minor countries (54) apply, except
where otherwise specified.
47.2 The conditions which lead to the surrender of
the various major powers, and the specific results of
such surrenders, are set out below:
47.3 GERMANY:
47.31 Germany surrenders if Berlin and any other
two objective hexes in Germany are simultaneously
controlled by the Allies at the end of an Axis
combat phase (EXCEPTION: If Axis variant 25 has
been played, Berchtesgaden must also be controlled
by the Allies to force a German surrender).
47.311 In addition, Germany also surrenders at the
end of any game turn if every hex in Germany is
under Allied control or contains an atomic attack
marker.
47.32 When Germany surrenders, Italy and all
German minor allies surrender and the European
war ends.
47.4 ITALY:
47.41 Italy surrenders:
47.411 If Germany surrenders; or
47.412 If Rome is controlled by the Allies at the end
of an Axis combat phase; or
47.413 If all of the following conditions exist at the
end of any Axis combat phase in Spring 1943 or
thereafter:
A. The Allies have a non-airborne ground unit
(including a commando) in mainland Italy. A unit in
Sicily or Sardinia is not sufficient.
B. There are no Axis units (other than inactive
Vichy units) in Africa, including all of Egypt. If Axis
variant 1 has been played, Cyprus must also be free
of Axis units.
C. The Allies control every city in Sicily, or every
city in both Sardinia and Corsica.
D. The Allies hold the initiative (9.11).
47.42 When Italy surrenders:
47.421 All Italian-controlled hexes in Italy
immediately pass to German control. 47.82 applies
to Italian colonies and conquests. Once Italy is
conquered, the major power which controls Rome
A3R rules rewrite v.3
at the end of the year receives the BRPs for Italy
during the following YSS (47.8).
47.422 A diplomatic die roll is immediately made for
Italy. This diplomatic die roll may result in the
addition of certain Italian units to the U.S. or
German force pools as allowable builds. Otherwise
Italian units are dealt with as indicated below.
47.423 Half (rounded up) of the Italian fleet factors
in supplied (including partially supplied ports)
ports containing German ground units are seized by
the Germans and may be used by them. These fleet
factors use the Italian nationality DRM (27.5712) if
they engage in fleet combat, may be repaired if
damaged, but may not be reconstructed if lost. All
other Italian fleet factors are permanently removed
from play (EXCEPTION: A “0” diplomatic result for
Italy).
47.424 All Italian ground and air units are removed
from the board, as are all Italian minor ally units.
The Folgore Airborne, representing fanatical Fascist
recruits to the SS, is then added, unbuilt, to the
German force pool. It may be built in any supplied,
German-controlled hex in Italy, and if lost may be
rebuilt in the same manner. It may overstack and
may be used anywhere on the board, but may not
airdrop. It is no longer subject to the restriction in
24.4. All other Italian units are permanently
removed from the game, unless added to the U.S. or
German force pools in accordance with an Italian
diplomatic result.
47.5 BRITAIN:
47.51 At the end of each game turn, the British
surrender rules are consulted and the results
implemented (75). On most turns, the possibility of
a British surrender will not arise and the British
surrender rules need not be consulted.
47.52 OPTIONAL RULE: If all players agree prior to
the start of the game, the British surrender rules
need not be used. Britain is then considered to be
conquered if all three British objective hexes are
simultaneously controlled by the Axis at the end of
an Allied combat phase (72.4).
47.6 FRANCE:
47.61 France surrenders if Paris is controlled by the
Axis at the end of an Allied combat phase.
88
47.62 At the end of the Allied player turn in which
the Allies fail to recapture Paris, a diplomatic die
roll is made for France. Then, all French hexes pass
to German control unless they are occupied by
other Allied ground, naval or air units, including
airbases. British units in France may thus operate
freely in areas of France not controlled by Axis
forces, including that part of France which will
constitute Vichy France and French colonies which
may come under Vichy control, until the end of the
Allied player turn in which France surrenders. After
that time, any British units which still remain in
Vichy areas are eliminated. Unoccupied French
hexes then pass to German control.
CLARIFICATION: The French surrender die roll comes at
the end of the turn, after the SR phase. Thus, British
units may not SR out of now Vichy-controlled areas once
the status of Vichy France has been determined. Such
units are eliminated.
47.63 Once France is conquered, the major power
which controls Paris at the end of the year receives
the BRPs for France during the following YSS (47.8).
See also cooperative conquest (54.7).
47.64 ESTABLISHMENT OF VICHY FRANCE: The
French diplomatic roll determines how Vichy
France is established and the alignment of the
French colonies.
47.65 Normally Vichy France is established by
placing half (rounded up) of each type of surviving
French unit in European France and Corsica in that
area in southern France which constitutes Vichy
France. Existing fleet and air factors are totaled and
halved to determine the size of the Vichy French
forces. Unbuilt French units are permanently
removed from play, as are both French airbases,
even if they were on the board when France
surrendered. Vichy French units are relocated, at
no SR cost, in Vichy France and are positioned and
later moved by the German player. Vichy French
units may be placed on any vacant hex in the Vichy
portion of France, even adjacent to Axis or Allied
units.
CLARIFICATION: The composition of Vichy French
forces is determined after isolated ground units are
removed, but French air units which find themselves
illegally based because of the elimination of their airbase
move to a supplied air base (regardless of France's
Western front option) and are not eliminated prior to
A3R rules rewrite v.3
determining the size of the Vichy air force. The latter is
an explicit exception to 29.541.
47.66 The political alignments of French colonies
are resolved as set out in Appendix II. If required,
one die roll is made for Lebanon-Syria and one for
Tunisia-Algeria-Morocco. French colonies
controlled (54.41) by the Axis when France
surrenders are unaffected by such die rolls. They
are treated as Axis conquests until captured by the
Allies. French colonies controlled by Britain when
France surrenders automatically become Free
French. This may occur only if a French colony
were conquered by the Axis and reconquered by
Britain prior to the fall of France.
47.67 French units in French colonies become Vichy
or Free French along with the French colonies
themselves. These units are not halved.
47.671 FRENCH UNITS OUTSIDE FRANCE OR HER
POSSESSIONS: French units outside both France and
her colonies move to the nearest French-controlled
hex in France, Corsica or a French colony. If
equidistant, the German player chooses, prior to
any colony determination die rolls. French units in
the South Africa box move to Morocco. If moved to
France or Corsica, the units count in the halving
process for Vichy units (47.65). If the units move to
a French colony, they become Vichy or Free French
along with the colony.
47.672 THE FRENCH FLEET: No matter where they
are located, all French fleets return to Marseilles
without being subject to interception by either side.
(EXCEPTION: Following a diplomatic result of “0”
for France).
CLARIFICATION: After a “0” diplomatic result, the total
of all French fleets on the board is halved and rounded
up to determine the number of Free French fleet factors;
halving does not take place on a per-port basis. French
fleets in British-controlled or Free French ports become
Free French first, followed by French fleets in Vichy
ports. If French fleets in Vichy ports are required to make
up the number of Free French fleet factors, the Allied
player selects the required number of fleets from Vichy
ports of his choice. Finally, all Free French fleets move to
the nearest Allied port on their front, and may be
intercepted by the Axis as they do so.
CLARIFICATION: Thus, a Free French fleet may only
come into existence after a “0” diplomatic result, but
89
Free French air units come into existence wherever
French air units are based in a French colony that
becomes Free French.
47.68 Corsica, as an integral part of France, always
becomes part of Vichy France. Any French units in
Corsica are counted in the halving process for
Vichy.
47.69 HEX CONTROL: French-controlled hexes in a
Vichy colony are controlled by Vichy France.
French-controlled hexes in a Free French colony
become British. French conquests and French-
controlled hexes outside France or her colonies
become Axis-controlled, unless they are occupied
by a British ground unit or are able to trace a
supply route to a Free French colony, provided the
hexes are closer to the Free French colony than to
France or a Vichy colony.
47.691 FRENCH MINOR ALLIES: French minor allies
fight on as British minor allies.
CLARIFICATION: This includes Belgium/Luxembourg if
a “0” diplomatic result for Belgium/Luxembourg is in
effect when France surrenders.
47.7 RUSSIA:
47.71 At the end of each Russian player turn, the
Russian surrender rules are consulted and the
results implemented (74). An examination of the
Russian surrender rules will confirm that Russia
will not offer to surrender until it has suffered
substantial territorial, economic and military
losses.
47.72 OPTIONAL RULE: If all players agree prior to
the start of the game, the Russian surrender rules
need not be used, and Russia is considered to be
conquered if Moscow, Leningrad, Stalingrad and
Grozny are simultaneously controlled by the Axis at
the end of an Allied combat phase (72.5).
47.8 BRPs FOR CONQUERED MAJOR POWERS: In each
YSS after the surrender of France and Italy, the
conquering major power receives half (rounded
down) of the BRP base of the conquered major
power at the time of surrender, provided the
conquering major power has retained its conquest.
The conquered major power’s BRP base will often
be its BRP base at the start of the scenario, but
changes to the BRP base of a major power from
growth may affect the post-conquest BRP value of
A3R rules rewrite v.3
that major power. In the 1941, 1942 and 1944
scenarios, France is worth 40 BRPs; in the 1944
scenario Italy is worth 37 BRPs. For BRPs derived
from Britain and Russia after their surrender, see
the British and Russian surrender rules,
respectively.
47.81 Should Paris or Rome come under enemy
control in the second half of a Winter turn while
France or Italy is unconquered, the controlling
major power does not receive any BRPs during the
ensuing YSS because the conquest is not effective
until France or Italy (or their allies) have had one
turn to retake the capital. A normal YSS calculation
is made for France or Italy, even if their capital is
enemy-controlled. This situation cannot exist for
any other major power.
47.82 Non-French colonies, active minor allies, and
conquests of a conquered major power are
controlled by no one and belong to the first major
power to occupy them with a ground unit
(EXCEPTIONS: France (47.69), Britain (75.423)). Such
areas may not be occupied during a pass option,
since the hexes are not controlled. All forces of an
active minor ally cease to exist when its major
power ally is conquered (EXCEPTIONS: French
minor allies (47.691) and British minor allies
(75.53)).
47.83 When the acquisition of key cities leads to the
surrender of a major power (Germany, Italy,
France), the conquering major power(s) must retain
control of the required cities for one opposition
turn. Surrender occurs immediately after the
surrendering major power or its allies fail to gain
control of one or more of the required cities during
their combat phase.
47.84 If a major power’s capital city is enemy-
controlled, units which wish to recapture it or
other key cities must be supplied from some other
supply source in order to move or advance after
combat.
47.85 When the surrender of a major power is
determined by a surrender table, surrender is
resolved at the indicated time - either at the end of
a game turn (Britain) or a player turn (Russia).
47.9 UNITED STATES: The U.S. may not be
conquered.
90
48. RESTRICTIONS ON FRENCH FORCES
48.1 France entered the war weakened by internal
political strife and haunted by memories of the
terrible casualties it suffered in World War I. These
political weaknesses, which were distinct from the
military incompetence which characterized Italy’s
war effort, are reflected in the following
restrictions on the activities of French forces.
48.2 French ground units may not carry out or
assist in a ground attack at odds of less than 1:1,
except as a result of a counterattack dictated by the
CRT. This prohibition extends to seaborne invasions
by French ground units, but does not apply to shore
bombardment or ground support provided for
attacks by allies at odds of 1:2 or less, as French
ground units would not be involved in such attacks.
48.3 French units may not be voluntarily eliminated
(14.11).
48.4 In addition to the restrictions set out above,
the following additional restrictions apply while
Paris is occupied by Axis ground units. These
additional restrictions do not apply if Paris is
merely Axis-controlled rather than occupied (i.e., if
an Axis unit moved through Paris and did not
remain in it). While Paris is occupied by Axis
ground units:
48.41 France may only select an offensive option on
the Western front, and must pass on other fronts.
(EXCEPTION: France may select an attrition option
if it can make the required attack against Paris with
a limited offensive (48.421).) All French fleets are
inverted, and France may not make any DoW. No
French units may move out of France (but they may
move into France).
48.411 If Paris remains Axis-occupied, France may
not SR units during the Allied SR phase.
48.42 French units are limited to an attack against
the Axis units in Paris, as follows:
48.421 Such an attack must be at odds of 1:1 or
greater (48.2). Attacks at lower odds are prohibited,
even if such attacks could theoretically lead to the
recapture of Paris.
48.422 Paris may not be attacked by French units
unless at least one attacking Allied ground unit is in
supply and eligible to advance into Paris after
A3R rules rewrite v.3
combat. British units adjacent to Paris could only
advance into Paris if Anglo-French cooperation
restrictions (49) do not apply. In rare cases, even if
prohibited from advancing into Paris after combat,
a British unit could recapture Paris if it were vacant
by moving through it, either during movement or
exploitation, despite Anglo-French cooperation
restrictions.
48.43 If France lacks the BRPs to take an offensive
option on the Western front, or is unable to obtain
1:1 odds against Paris, no attacks may be made by
French units. This does not prevent a British attack
against Paris. If Axis defensive air support is
required to immunize Paris against possible
recapture, the Axis player indicates, if he wishes,
that defensive air support is being provided to the
Axis units in Paris. These air units may not fly any
other missions in that game turn, even if no attack
on Paris actually occurs.
48.44 While Paris is occupied by Axis ground units,
French air units may only fly missions in support of
a legal ground attack on Paris. These include
ground support to assist the attack on Paris,
counterair missions against Axis air units which are
in a position to provide defensive air support for
Axis units in Paris and the interception of such
defensive air support. French air units may not fly
any other air missions while Paris is occupied by
Axis units.
CLARIFICATION: If developments during the Allied turn
make the attack on Paris an impossibility, the French air
force may no longer carry out any missions and any
missions in which they are engaged are aborted.
48.45 If the Allies succeed in recapturing Paris,
other French units on the Western front, if not
already used in the attack on Paris, could also
attack during that combat phase (subject to 48.2).
The sequence of play must be kept in mind. France
could not change its options on other fronts or
retroactively announce air or naval missions which
were previously prohibited. French air units could
fly ground support or intercept enemy defensive air
support during exploitation on the turn that Paris
was recaptured, as this would occur after Paris had
been re-occupied by the Allies.
49. ANGLO-FRENCH COOPERATION
49.1 Friction between Britain and France early in
the war limits cooperation between the two powers
91
as set out below. All the restrictions set out in 49.2
through 49.48 are lifted immediately after the play
of Allied variant 7 or at the start of the second
Allied player turn following any one of:
A. An Italian DoW against Britain or France, or
B. The first Axis offensive option on the Western
front, or
C. The first Axis DoW against a minor country on
the Western front.
49.2 PROHIBITED HEXES: British units may not
occupy Paris, Marseilles, the city of Vichy or any
Maginot hex. Passage through these prohibited
hexes during movement, sea transport, exploitation
or SR is allowed, but British units may not pause in
these hexes at any point in a turn, and are
eliminated if forced to retreat into them after
attrition combat (16.57).
CLARIFICATION: British air units may not counter-air
or intercept German defensive air support over such
hexes.
49.3 French units, including air and naval units,
may not enter Britain or British colonies or
possessions, including Gibraltar. (EXCEPTIONS:
French units may participate in an Allied attempt to
reconquer a British colony which has been
conquered by the Axis. French fleets may
temporarily base in British-controlled ports if
forced to do so (27.181)). This restriction does not
prevent French air units from flying missions over
or into Britain or British colonies or possessions,
provided the air units are not based in such areas.
French air units may SR through such areas.
49.4 COOPERATION RESTRICTIONS: British and
French units may not stack together under any
circumstances. This restriction prohibits the
following:
49.41 British armor may not exploit a French
breakthrough. If British and French units combined
in an attack (49.51), and a British unit advanced
into the enemy hex, British armor could exploit,
even if the British armor were adjacent only to
French units, and even if the only armor unit
involved in the original attack were French.
49.411 British and French units may not combine to
execute an overrun.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
49.412 British units may not enter a hex containing
an unoccupied French bridgehead, or vice versa.
49.42 British air units may not provide defensive air
support for French units.
49.43 British air units may not provide air cover for
French fleets.
49.44 British air units may not base on a French
airbase counter. British ground units and fleets may
not stack with a French airbase counter.
49.441 British and French air units may not attack
Axis fleets in the same hex.
49.45 British and French air units may not combine
to provide ground support for an attack directed
against enemy units on a single hex. Similarly,
British air units could not intercept Axis defensive
air support in a hex in which French air units were
providing ground support.
49.46 British fleets may not carry or sea escort
French units, nor may they provide shore
bombardment for a French invasion.
49.461 British and French fleets may not sea
transport units into the same port.
49.47 British and French fleets may not attempt to
intercept the same enemy naval activity.
49.48 Britain may not lend BRPs to France (36.51).
49.5 PERMITTED ACTIVITIES: The following
activities are permitted even before the Anglo-
French cooperation restrictions are lifted:
49.51 British and French ground units may combine
to attack enemy units, provided they do not stack
together.
49.52 British air units may provide ground support
for French ground attacks, provided the attacked
enemy units are not in a hex prohibited by 49.2.
British air units may also provide ground support to
French overruns and invasions.
49.53 British air units and fleets may base in French
cities and ports, other than those prohibited by
49.2, unless French units are in the hex.
49.54 British and French air units may combine to
provide ground support for an attack directed
92
against enemy units on more than one hex, if
British air units fly over one of the attacked hexes
and French air units fly over another attacked hex.
Similarly, British air units could intercept Axis
defensive air support over one of the attacked
hexes, even if French air units were providing
ground support over another attacked hex.
49.55 British fleets may protect sea supply to
French units.
49.56 British and French air factors modify each
other’s naval interception rolls (27.565).
49.6 Movement of ground units, the flight of air
units or the operation of fleets are unaffected. Units
may pass through one another freely.
49.7 Beginning with the Allied player turn after the
fall of France, the restrictions set out in 49.2 to
49.48 no longer apply. Once a Maginot Line hex is
occupied by Axis forces, British forces may enter it,
even if France has not fallen and the Anglo-French
cooperation restrictions are still in effect.
49.8 All the restrictions in 49.3 to 49.47 apply
equally with respect to France and Britain: British
units may not enter French colonies, French armor
may not exploit a British breakthrough, etc. The
same applies to the permitted activities set out in
49.5 to 49.55.
CLARIFICATION: British units may enter France if not
otherwise restricted by a specific provision.
49.9 No restrictions apply to cooperation between
British and Free French units.
50. RUSSO-ALLIED COOPERATION
50.1 All stacking restrictions contained in 49.4 to
49.47 apply equally to the stacking of Russian and
Western Allied units throughout the game. In
addition, the following restrictions apply:
50.2 Russia may not support a Western Allied
ground attack by air or naval missions, and vice
versa.
50.3 Russian and Western Allied ground units may
not combine to attack the same hex. Should they
both wish to attack the same hex, whichever side is
able to bring the larger number of combat factors
A3R rules rewrite v.3
to bear (this will not necessarily be the side with
the better odds) gets to attack first (a die roll if both
sides have the same number of factors). If the first
attack fails to eliminate the defending Axis units,
the other side may try a second attack. Any Axis
defensive air support which survives the first attack
remains in place for the second attack, and may not
be withdrawn or supplemented prior to the second
attack.
50.4 The above restrictions apply equally to Russian
and Western Allied associated minor country,
minor allied and partisan units. For example,
communist partisans may not stack with Western
Allied partisans or other Western Allied units, nor
may the two combine to attack the same hex or
hexes in a single attack. Western Allied partisans
are under similar restrictions.
50.5 Russian supply sources, including captured
minor capitals controlled by Russia, may not supply
Western Allied units (29.261). Russian fleets and air
units may not base in ports and cities controlled by
the Western Allies, nor may Russian fleets and air
units use Western Allied ports and cities during SR.
These restrictions apply equally to Western Allied
supply sources supplying Russian units, and the use
of Russian ports and cities by Western Allied fleets
and air units.
50.6 Western Allied units may not enter Russia,
even to reconquer Axis-controlled hexes and even if
Russia has surrendered.
51. GERMAN-ITALIAN COOPERATION
51.1 Until Germany and Italy are allied (both at war
against the same major power), German and Italian
units may not enter territory controlled by the
other (EXCEPTION: An Italian diplomatic result of
“7” or “8+”). Their fleets may not carry units
belonging to the other. Once Germany and Italy are
actively allied, German and Italian units may stack
together (EXCEPTION: If an Italian diplomatic result
of “-1” is in effect when Italy enters the war).
51.2 LENT ITALIAN FORCES:
93
51.21 As soon as Germany and Italy are allied,
Italian units may be lent to Germany during any SR
phase. No more than ten Italian factors may be
under German control at any one time. Airbase
counters may not be lent.
51.22 While Italian units are lent to Germany during
the SR phase, there is no SR cost for such transfers.
51.23 An Italian unit may be lent to Germany even if
it is isolated or adjacent to an enemy unit.
51.24 Once lent, Italian units may only be SRed by
Germany; i.e., Italian SRs may not be used to SR lent
Italian units. To be moved by SR, lent Italian units
must meet the usual criteria for SR (20.2). An Italian
unit may be moved by SR on the turn it is lent. In
that case, the SR could be charged against either
Italy or Germany, depending upon whether the unit
was SRed before or after it was lent.
51.25 The German player controls lent Italian units
as if they were his own, paying for offensive
operations in which they participate. If eliminated,
lent Italian units return to the Italian force pool and
Italy must pay the BRP cost for their
reconstruction. The units are then under Italian
control until they are again lent to Germany. Hexes
gained by lent Italian units are controlled by
Germany, not Italy.
51.26 The Italian airborne unit may airdrop only if
it is lent to Germany (24.16).
51.27 Lent Italian units are not counted as part of
Germany’s Eastern front garrison (58.24), nor may
they be used to oppose Murmansk convoys. Lent
Italian air units may not bomb Britain (43). An
attack by lent Italian units meets the requirements
of a German, but not an Italian, DoW (46.4).
51.28 Italy may reclaim units lent to Germany
during any Axis SR phase, with the transfer back to
Italy being carried out in the same manner as the
initial lending. Italy does not require German
permission to reclaim her units, but a disagreement
between Germany and Italy might result in the
reclaimed Italian units being unable to SR over
A3R rules rewrite v.3
German-controlled hexes (20.2). Italian units may
not be lent and reclaimed in the same turn. This
prevents the Axis from transferring lent units to
Italy, using an Italian SR to move them, then
lending them back to Germany.
51.29 If Italy surrenders, lent Italian units are
removed from the board along with all other Italian
units (47.424).
52. MINOR COUNTRIES
52.1 At the start of the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios, the only minor country involved in the
war is Poland. Other minor countries may enter the
war either by being invaded by a major power, or as
a result of a diplomatic die roll.
52.2 If a minor country is invaded by a major power
and survives the first turn of the invasion, that
minor country fights independently until
intervention by another major power in the conflict
causes the minor country to become associated
with the intervening major power (55).
52.3 Minor countries may also activate as allies of
major powers as a result of diplomacy (56).
53. MINOR COUNTRY OPERATIONS
53.1 When a major power declares war on a minor
country, the forces (if any) of the minor country are
deployed by the major power opponent or potential
opponent of the attacker whose capital is nearest to
the capital of the attacked minor country
(EXCEPTIONS: Germany always deploys and moves
Finnish, Rumanian, Hungarian and Bulgarian units,
unless they are attacked by Italy or Germany itself.
Vichy French units remain on the hexes they
already occupy (70.32)).
53.11 An attacked minor country’s forces are set up
before front options are selected by the attacker. At
least one minor country ground unit must be
deployed in the minor country’s capital, unless the
minor country’s capital is already occupied by two
ground units belonging to a major power hostile to
the attacking major power. This deployment
94
requirement applies only to the initial setup of the
minor country. Minor country air units which
cannot legally deploy because of the presence of
enemy units or garrisoning major power air units in
all available cities and airbases in the minor
country are eliminated (EXCEPTIONS: Iraq and
Persia (62.41, 62.71)).
53.12 If a minor country is attacked by a major
power which already has units in the minor country
as a result of an earlier diplomatic agreement, all
major power units in the minor country at the
moment war is declared are automatically in
limited supply for the turn of the invasion. If the
attacking major power, or an ally of that major
power, has ground units in the minor country’s
capital, those ground units are placed on a hex of
the owning major power’s choosing adjacent to the
minor country’s capital. The minor country’s forces
are then deployed.
53.13 The major power which deploys the units of
an attacked minor country continues to select
options for the minor country and move its units as
long as the minor country survives, or until
intervention (55) or activation (56) occurs.
53.2 The forces available to each minor country are
set out in the Minor Country Forces Table. Certain
minor countries, such as Portugal and the Baltic
States, have no armed forces. A player who invades
such a minor country will be unopposed, although
he still must pay 10 BRPs for a DoW.
53.21 [Moved to Iraq section (62.41)].
53.3 During the attacking major power’s player
turn, major powers already at war with the attacker
may assist the minor country only by intercepting
any attacking major power naval activity directed
against the minor country with available naval and
air units. Such interceptions do not constitute
intervention (55). Major power air units may not fly
defensive air support for minor country ground
units during the initial turn of attack (EXCEPTIONS:
Automatic intervention (55.211). Allied air units
A3R rules rewrite v.3
may fly defensive air support for Belgian ground
units if a diplomatic result of “0” is in effect).
53.4 INDEPENDENT MINOR COUNTRY TURNS: If an
attacked minor country survives the first turn of
attack, it takes an independent turn immediately
after the end of the attacking major power’s player
turn (EXCEPTION: Automatic intervention (55.211)).
The minor country turn consists only of movement,
combat and unit construction. The minor country
may engage in attrition or offensive combat at no
BRP cost. It may also conduct a limited offensive at
no cost.
53.5 UNIT CONSTRUCTION: Prior to intervention
(55.2), and subject to 53.51, a minor country may
rebuild one infantry unit, at no BRP cost, each turn.
Minor country units must be rebuilt in a controlled,
supplied hex in the minor country which is not in
an enemy ZoC. Minor country armor and air units,
when lost, are permanently eliminated and may not
be reconstructed unless lost after the minor
country has activated as a minor ally. Minor
country naval units may never be reconstructed.
53.51 Infantry losses incurred by Bulgaria, Hungary,
Rumania and Finland prior to their activation as
German minor allies, including Rumanian and
Finnish infantry losses from a border war with
Russia (58.64, 58.73), may be rebuilt at the rate of
one infantry unit each turn, but Germany must pay
the BRP cost for such reconstruction. Such
spending may violate the German spending limit
only if it takes place after the border war has ended.
53.52 If a minor country has activated as a minor
ally of a major power (56), all the minor country’s
infantry units are added to the major power’s force
pool. Such units, and any of the minor country’s
armor and air units on the board at the moment of
activation, may be rebuilt by the major power at the
normal BRP cost (56.3G). Minor ally naval units may
not be rebuilt (EXCEPTION: British fleets after a
British surrender (75.52)).
53.6 Minor country units draw unlimited supply
from their capitals (29.217). They may also be
95
supplied by major powers at war with the attacking
major power. Such supply does not constitute
intervention (55).
53.7 GEOGRAPHICAL RESTRICTIONS: Prior to
activation as a minor ally, minor country ground
units must remain in or adjacent to their home
country, even if the minor country is associated
with a major power as a result of intervention
(55.2). Minor country air and naval units may not
base outside their home country (EXCEPTION:
Polish units may enter Germany (58.12)). Spanish
units may deploy in and enter the Balearic Islands
and Spanish Morocco; Swedish units may deploy in
and enter Gotland; Greek units may deploy in and
enter the Greek islands.
53.71 Minor country ground units may attack
enemy units adjacent to their restricted area, but
may not advance out of the area after combat. Air
and naval units may operate freely from their in-
country bases, but, during the first player turn that
they have been attacked, they may operate only
against forces attacking their home country.
53.72 Units of minor countries which have activated
as minor allies of a major power (56) are not subject
to the restrictions of 53.7 and 53.71, although other
geographic restrictions may apply (56.4).
54. CONQUEST OF MINOR COUNTRIES
54.1 CONQUEST: Minor countries are conquered
when a hostile unit, including a partisan, occupies
their capital. They do not get one turn to try to
recapture it. All units belonging to such a minor
country, wherever located, are removed from the
mapboard at the end of the attacker’s combat
phase. Minor countries which are associated with
or allied to major powers are treated in the same
manner. By immediately recapturing the capital of
such a minor country, a major power would avert
the loss of the minor country’s BRPs, but the units
of the minor country would still be permanently
removed from play.
54.11 MINOR COUNTRIES WITHOUT CAPITALS:
Luxembourg is conquered when its single hex is
A3R rules rewrite v.3
occupied. The Baltic States are conquered when
Riga, Parnu and Tallinn are occupied. Arabia is
conquered when Kaf and Jauf are occupied. Kuwait
is conquered when Al Kuwait is occupied.
54.2 HEX CONTROL: At the end of the combat phase
in which initial conquest occurs, all hexes in a
conquered minor country pass to the control of the
conquering major power, subject to the following:
54.21 This rule applies only to the initial conquest
of neutral minor countries. Normal hex control
rules (11.21) govern whenever a minor country’s
capital subsequently changes hands.
54.22 Hex control of active minor allies or minor
countries which are associated with a major power
is unaffected by conquest. Hex control must be
established normally (11.21).
54.23 Greek, Swedish, Baltic (Saare - F39) and
Spanish islands, and Spanish Morocco, come under
the conqueror’s control along with their controlling
minor countries.
54.3 BRPs FOR MINOR COUNTRIES: A conquered
minor country yields its entire BRP value as printed
on the mapboard to the major power which
controls its capital during each YSS. If an opponent
gains control of the capital afterward, the
previously controlling major power has one turn in
which to drive the opponent out of the capital and
reestablish control over it. If the previously
controlling major power fails to do so, it loses the
BRPs derived from the minor country at the end of
the combat phase in which it fails to reestablish
control. For BRP purposes, Luxembourg’s single hex
is considered to be its capital. For the Baltic States,
all three Baltic cities must change hands.
54.31 If a major power loses control of the capital of
a conquered minor country during the second half
of a Winter turn, both sides receive the BRPs for the
minor country during the following YSS. The
previously controlling major power would lose the
BRPs for the minor country at the end of its next
combat phase if it failed to recapture the capital.
96
Similarly, the major power which captured the
capital in Winter would lose the BRPs if it failed to
retain control of the capital. Even though one side
or the other must eventually lose the BRPs for the
conquered minor country, both major powers
include them in their BRP totals to determine
initiative and spending limits.
EXAMPLE: Germany conquers Belgium in Winter 1939.
France occupies Brussels in the second half of the Winter
1939 game turn. Both Germany and France receive 15
BRPs for Belgium in the 1940 YSS, because Germany has
one turn to recapture Brussels. Unless Control of Brussels
continued to alternate between the two sides, one side or
the other will deduct the 15 BRPs for Belgium during
1940.
54.4 COLONIES: For the purposes of conquest, hex
control and BRPs, colonies are considered to be
minor countries which have been conquered prior
to the start of the game. A major power conquers a
colony and acquires its BRPs in the next YSS by
capturing the colony’s capital and retaining it until
the YSS.
54.41 Normal hex control rules (11.21) govern
whenever a colony’s capital changes hands.
54.42 Britain, France and Italy receive BRPs for
their colonies at the start of each scenario in which
they participate as an unconquered major power.
These BRPs are included in their BRP bases. If
Britain, France or Italy loses such a colony, the BRPs
for the colony are deducted from the British,
French or Italian BRP total at the time the colony is
lost. The BRP value of the colony is also deducted
from that major power’s BRP total during each
subsequent YSS in which it does not control the
colony, although its BRP base is unaffected.
EXAMPLE: In Winter 1939, Italy conquers Tunisia, and
France fails to recapture it. France loses five BRPs in
Winter 1939, and deducts five BRPs from its 1940 YSS
total.
EXAMPLE: Britain receives BRPs for Egypt, Palestine,
Transjordan and Iraq, and thus loses BRPs if the Axis
A3R rules rewrite v.3
conquer these colonies. Britain would also deduct the
value of the conquered colonies from its future YSS BRP
totals. The conquering Axis major power would gain
BRPs for each of the conquered colonies. If Britain
reconquered the colonies during a subsequent year, the
conquering Axis major power would lose the BRPs for
them, and Britain would no longer deduct the BRPs for
them in the next YSS.
54.43 If a major power gains control of a colony
originally controlled by another major power, it
receives the BRPs for the colony during each
subsequent YSS in which it retains control of it.
These BRPs are lost if an enemy major power gains
control of the colony’s capital and the owning
major power fails to regain control of the colony’s
capital by the end of its next combat phase.
54.44 Except for hexes actually controlled by the
Axis (11.21), French colonies which become Free
French after the fall of France and Vichy French
colonies which become Free French after a Vichy
diplomatic result of -1 come under British control.
Once Britain assumes control of a French colony
which becomes Free French after the Axis conquest
of France, any subsequent Axis conquest of the
colony would be governed by 54.41.
54.5 NEWLY ACQUIRED MINOR COUNTRIES AND
COLONIES: In the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios, Britain, France and Italy control certain
colonies at the start of the game. Other minor
countries come under major power control during
the course of play. In the 1940, 1941, 1942 and 1944
scenarios, conquered, associated and allied minor
countries and controlled colonies are listed in the
Appendix dealing with each scenario. The YSS for
the starting year of these scenarios has already
taken place, and the BRPs for these minor countries
have already been added to the totals for the major
powers involved in the scenario. If these minor
countries are lost, BRPs are deducted as described
above (54.3). BRPs for colonies are deducted in
subsequent YSS only if the colony was controlled by
the owning major power at the start of the war
(54.42).
97
EXAMPLE: In a 1942 scenario, Italy loses control of Libya
in Fall 1942. Italy loses five BRPs in 1942, and deducts five
BRPs during each subsequent YSS unless it regains
control of Libya. In a 1941 scenario, Russia loses control
of eastern Poland in Fall 1941. Russia loses 10 BRPs is
1941, but does not lose any additional BRPs in the 1942
YSS, because Russia did not control eastern Poland at the
start of the war and eastern Poland is not considered to
be an integral part of the Russian economy.
54.6 A major power does not lose BRPs when an
associated minor country is lost unless that major
power received the BRPs for that minor country
during the preceding YSS. A major power always
loses BRPs when a minor ally is lost, because it
would have received BRPs for the minor ally when
it activated (56.3F) and during each subsequent YSS.
EXAMPLE: Germany attacks Norway in Spring 1940.
Britain intervenes and Norway survives as a minor
country associated to Britain for several turns before
Germany conquers it in Winter 1940. Britain does not lose
10 BRPs, because it never received any BRPs for Norway.
If Norway survived until 1941, Britain would receive the
Norwegian BRPs during the 1941 YSS, but would lose
them if Germany conquered Norway during 1941.
54.7 COOPERATIVE CONQUESTS: Whenever two or
more major power allies have participated in the
conquest or reconquest of a major power (73.5),
minor country or colony, or have both intervened
in a minor country, any BRPs derived from that
action may be shared during the next YSS in any
manner agreed at the time of conquest (73.6). Once
the proportions have been agreed, they may not be
changed in a subsequent YSS. If the allies are
unable to agree, the BRPs are shared equally,
dropping fractions. If one of the allies subsequently
surrenders, the surviving participant(s) receive all
the BRPs during the next YSS, providing it still
controls the area in question. The capital of the
conquest is controlled by the major power that first
advances into it. Control over all other hexes may
be assigned between the cooperating allies in any
way they wish.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
CLARIFICATION: The degree of “participation” required
for a cooperative conquest is very little. There is no
requirement that participation take place on the turn of
conquest. For example, if Italy conducted an attrition
option against French units at any time before the fall of
France, Germany and Italy may apportion the French
BRPs at the time of conquest. As another example, if
German air units in Sicily protect a sea supply line to
Italian armor in North Africa, and the armor captures
Cairo, this allows a cooperative conquest of Egypt.
54.8 A major power which conquers an area may
not transfer the BRP production of the area to an
ally, nor may it transfer control of any objectives or
any other hexes in that area to an ally (11.24). Such
changes may only occur during a cooperative
conquest (11.221), or as a result of a reconquest.
EXAMPLE: Italy may allow German units to enter
Albanian hexes, but those hexes and Albania remain
under Italian control. If the Allies conquered Albania and
the Axis jointly reconquered it, either Germany or Italy
could control Albania.
EXAMPLE: Italy, acting on its own, conquers Yugoslavia.
A German unit later enters Belgrade. Italy retains the
Yugoslavian BRPs and Belgrade remains an Italian-
controlled objective.
EXAMPLE: The Axis make a cooperative conquest of
Yugoslavia. Whichever major power advanced units into
Belgrade would control it (15.53). The Yugoslavian BRPs
would be split in any agreed manner. If the Allies
subsequently occupied Belgrade and held it for one Axis
turn, the Yugoslavian BRPs would be lost to the Axis. If
one Axis major power then reconquered Yugoslavia by
retaking Belgrade, Yugoslavia would become the
conquest of that Axis major power alone, regardless of
any previous arrangements made during the cooperative
conquest. If units of the other Axis major power
participated in the reconquest by being in or attacking
any Yugoslav hex, the reconquest would be cooperative
and a new arrangement to split the BRPs would be made.
EXAMPLE: Italy controls Belgrade and received the BRPs
for Yugoslavia during the preceding YSS. Partisans
capture Belgrade, and German units immediately
98
recapture it. Italy would again receive the BRPs for
Yugoslavia during the next YSS. If neither Germany or
Italy immediately recaptured Belgrade, Italy would lose
the BRPs for Yugoslavia and Yugoslavia could then be
reconquered by either or both Axis powers. Note that if
Axis units eliminated the partisans in Belgrade during
the reconquest but did not advance into the city, control
of Belgrade would revert to Italy.
55. INTERVENTION IN MINOR COUNTRIES
55.1 After an attacking major power has finished its
player turn, the attacked minor country takes an
independent turn (53.4) (EXCEPTION: Automatic
intervention (55.211)).
55.2 INTERVENTION: Any major power opponent of
an attacking major power may intervene on behalf
of an attacked, unconquered minor country by
sending ground, naval or air units into the minor
country during the movement, combat or SR phase
of its turn. Intervention has occurred if intervening
units move into the minor country during the
movement phase, even if they move out of the
minor country during the SR phase of the same
turn. Interception of the attacker’s naval activities
on the initial turn of attack (53.3), the supply of the
minor country’s units (53.6) or the conduct of a
naval or air mission in a hex of the minor country
does not constitute intervention. An airbase
counter may be placed in a fully supplied minor
country hex as soon as intervention has occurred,
but may not be placed prior to intervention even if
such placement would facilitate intervention.
CLARIFICATION: Hexes in the minor country are not
fully supplied until after the initial supply determination
phase.
CLARIFICATION: A major power may intervene in a
minor country by tracing supply into it. Thus, air units
staged to cities in the minor country or transported into
the minor country could operate during the combat
phase and air units could legally SR into the minor
country and operate during the opponent's turn. If sea
supply is used to intervene, the opponent has an
opportunity to cut the sea supply line. If air units are
A3R rules rewrite v.3
staged into the minor country to intervene, they would
not be able to help defend a sea supply line traced into
the minor country during the initial supply
determination phase (29.45).
55.21 A major power which is not already at war
with the attacking major power must declare war
on the attacker before it may intervene.
55.211 Intervention is automatic if an opposing
major power already has units in the attacked
minor country as a consequence of an earlier
diplomatic result (56.66).
55.22 ASSOCIATED MINOR COUNTRIES: Intervention
results in the minor country being associated with
the intervening major power, with the following
consequences:
A. The intervening major power controls all hexes
controlled by the associated minor country, and is
considered to have controlled such hexes from the
start of the player turn of intervention.
B. The associated minor country’s units are moved
by the intervening major power.
C. The units of the intervening major power and the
associated minor country may stack together.
D. The intervening major power and the associated
minor country move in unison, selecting the same
front options.
E. The area restrictions on the operation of the
associated minor country’s units set out in 53.7 and
53.71 continue to apply.
F. The intervening major power receives the BRPs
for the associated minor country in the next YSS
(unless the associated minor country is conquered
before that time).
G. The restrictions on the reconstruction of the
associated minor country’s units set out in 53.5
continue to apply, except that the cost of
reconstruction must be paid by the major power if
it received the BRPs for the associated minor
country during the previous YSS.
H. Any diplomatic limitations on the number of
major power factors allowed in the minor country
are negated (EXCEPTION: Finland, 56.61).
99
55.3 If intervening units move into a minor country
during a game turn in which the minor country has
already taken an independent turn (53.4), the minor
country’s forces, having already had their turn,
may not move or participate in any attacks made by
the intervening major power. The minor country
units are unaffected by any combat results
involving the intervening units, even if they are
stacked with such units.
CLARIFICATION: An associated minor’s units may not
move by SR, nor may its fleets cross front boundaries
when they change base (27.212).
56. MINOR ALLIES
56.1 Minor countries may become minor allies of
major powers only as a result of diplomatic die
rolls. Intervention on behalf of a minor country
results only in the minor country becoming
associated with the intervening major power (55),
and does not make that minor country a minor ally.
Major powers may acquire minor allies as follows:
56.11 GERMANY: Finland, Hungary, Rumania,
Bulgaria, Yugoslavia, Greece, Turkey, Iraq, Persia,
Poland, Sweden, Ukraine, Vichy France and Spain.
56.12 ITALY: Greece, Turkey, Iraq, Persia and Spain.
56.13 WESTERN ALLIES: Turkey, Vichy France.
56.14 RUSSIA: Turkey. One of Hungary, Rumania,
Bulgaria, Yugoslavia or Greece may become a
Russian minor ally as a result of Allied variant 9.
56.15 After activating as Axis minor allies, Hungary,
Rumania, Bulgaria, Yugoslavia, Greece, Turkey,
Spain, Sweden and Vichy France may become
Western Allied or Russian minor allies as a result of
switching sides (56.92).
56.16 Minor countries other than those listed in
56.11-56.15 may never activate as minor allies of a
major power.
56.2 Minor countries activate as minor allies during
the game turn in which the diplomatic die roll
which activates them is made. The minor country
A3R rules rewrite v.3
remains neutral until the start of the player turn of
their major power ally. BRPs added for minor ally
activation thus do not affect the determination of
the initiative during the turn of activation, nor are
the diplomatic effects of minor ally activation felt
during the diplomatic phase in which the
diplomatic die roll for the minor ally is made.
56.21 Until activated as a minor ally, minor
countries are governed by the restrictions set out in
rule 53. Associated minor countries are governed by
rule 55.
EXAMPLE: Britain selects Turkey for a diplomatic die
roll and obtains a “-4” result Turkey will activate as a
British minor ally at the start of the Allied player turn. If
the Axis have the initiative, Turkey may be attacked by
the Axis before it activates, and the provisions governing
attacks on neutral minor countries apply until Turkish
activation occurs at the start of the Allied player turn.
56.22 A minor country which is at war with a major
power may be activated as a minor ally, but only if
the activating major power is already at war with or
declares war on the major power which is at war
with the minor country. If it fails to do so, the
diplomatic result is negated. A major power may
select a lesser diplomatic result (59.91) during the
diplomatic phase if it anticipates that it will not or
cannot make the required DoW. This also applies to
diplomatic results that give a major power control
over hexes in a minor country.
EXAMPLES: Russia is at war with Rumania. Germany
makes a diplomatic die roll for Rumania and achieves a
“7+”. result. Germany must declare war on Russia
immediately after activating Rumania as a minor ally. If
Germany is unwilling or unable to declare war on Russia,
the diplomatic result for Rumania is negated. A neutral
Russia makes a diplomatic die roll for Turkey and
achieves a “-4” result. Germany holds the initiative and
declares war on Turkey but fails to conquer it. Russia
may activate Turkey if it declares war on Germany. If
Russia is unwilling or unable to declare war on Germany,
the diplomatic result for Turkey is negated.
100
56.3 ACTIVE MINOR ALLIES: Activation of a minor
country as a minor ally has the following
consequences:
A. The major power controls all hexes controlled by
the minor ally, and is considered to have controlled
such hexes from the start of the major power’s
player turn.
B. The minor ally’s units are moved by the major
power.
C. The units of the major power and the minor ally
may stack together.
D. The major power and the minor ally move in
unison, selecting the same front options.
E. The area restrictions on the operation of the
minor ally’s units in 53.7 are replaced with the
restrictions in 56.4 instead.
F. The major power ally receives the BRPs for the
minor ally at the start of its player turn. These BRPs
continue to be added to the totals of the major ally
during each YSS, subject to rule 56.35.
G. The provisions of 53.52 apply to the
reconstruction of the minor ally’s units. All of the
minor ally’s units currently on the board, except
naval units, and all previously eliminated infantry
units may be rebuilt, with the major ally paying the
BRP cost.
56.31 The BRP value of Finland or Rumania is
reduced by five BRPs if the Finnish border hexes or
Bessarabia have been occupied by Russia (58.62,
58.72).
56.32 Vichy France proper yields no BRPs to its
major ally. Vichy colonies may, following a
diplomatic result of “9+” for Vichy, or if conquered
from the Allies (70.8).
56.33 Once a minor ally is activated, its units may be
moved by SR. Such SRs count against the major
ally’s SR capacity.
56.34 Minor allies are automatically at war with all
enemies of their major ally when activated. No DoW
costs are paid. Similarly, minor allies may be
attacked at no DoW cost by major powers at war
with the major ally (46.2).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
56.35 In all scenarios major powers receive the BRPs
of their minor allies, and lose BRPs for them if they
are conquered by the enemy or if they switch sides
(56.92).
56.36 Upon initial activation, minor ally units are
placed on any supplied, controlled hex in their
home country. Rebuilt minor ally units must be
placed out of enemy ZoCs on a supplied, controlled
hex in their home country.
56.4 GEOGRAPHICAL RESTRICTIONS: After initial
placement, minor ally units may be moved and
SRed normally. The restrictions in 53.7 no longer
apply, but minor ally units are only permitted in
the following areas:
A. BULGARIA: Bulgaria, Yugoslavia, Greece and
European Turkey.
CLARIFICATION: The Bulgarian air unit may not base
in Rumania, but it may fly missions over Rumanian
hexes and may prevent a Russian airdrop into Rumania.
B. FINLAND: Finland, six hexes from the Finnish
border or coastline.
CLARIFICATION: A Finnish unit may be sea transported
or SRed from Helsinki to Oslo, even though its route takes
it farther than six hexes from the Finnish coastline.
C. FREE RUSSIAN UNITS (Axis variant 18): Russia
and Poland.
D. GREECE: The Mediterranean front, but not in
French North Africa or Spain.
E. HUNGARY: Hungary, Yugoslavia, eastern Europe,
Poland and Russia.
CLARIFICATION: Hungarian units may not move or SR
through Germany to reach an allowed area. Hungarian
air could stage over Germany (or Rumania) to reach an
allowed area, but could not base in these countries.
F. IRAQ: Iraq, Kuwait, Persia, Lebanon-Syria,
Palestine, Transjordan and Arabia.
G. PERSIA: Persia, Kuwait, Iraq, Lebanon-Syria,
Palestine, Transjordan and Arabia.
H. POLAND: If Poland activates as a Germany minor
ally after a Polish diplomatic result of “8+”, Poland,
the Baltic States and Russia. If Poland is Allied,
Poland or Germany (58.12).
101
I. RUMANIA: Rumania, Yugoslavia, eastern Europe
and Russia.
J. SPAIN: The Mediterranean and Eastern fronts
(EXCEPTION: Spanish volunteers after a Spanish
diplomatic result of “5-6”, “7” or “8” may only be
used on the Eastern front). Spanish units may SR
through the Western front.
K. SWEDEN: Sweden, Finland, Norway and six hexes
from the Finnish border or coastline.
L. TURKEY: The Mediterranean front, Bessarabia
and Russia.
M. UKRAINE: The Ukraine.
N. VICHY FRANCE: No restrictions (EXCEPTION:
Vichy French volunteers after a Vichy diplomatic
result of “7” may only be used on the Eastern front).
O. YUGOSLAVIA: Yugoslavia, Greece, Rumania,
eastern Europe and Russia.
CLARIFICATION: In all cases, minor ally units may
attack hexes adjacent to the limit of their geographical
areas, but they may not advance after combat if they
win.
56.41 [Moved to the Iraq section (62.41)]
56.42 [Moved to the Persia section (62.71)]
56.5 Air and naval units must always be based in
accordance with the above restrictions, but may
operate freely from their bases. Thus Spanish fleets
based in northern Spain and Turkish fleets based in
Gibraltar could both operate in the Atlantic.
56.6 Apart from a DoW, major power units may
enter and operate in potential minor allies only if a
diplomatic result allows them to do so (EXCEPTION:
Axis units may enter Vichy France (56.62, 70.31)).
56.61 Once a diplomatic result allows German
ground and air units to enter Finland, Hungary,
Rumania, Bulgaria or Yugoslavia, the hexes of that
minor country are controlled by Germany. Germany
may freely move, SR and trace supply through that
minor country, subject to the constraints of the
diplomatic result for that minor country, and may
launch attacks from its territory. Any diplomatic
limitation on the number of factors allowed in a
A3R rules rewrite v.3
particular country may not be exceeded, even by
Axis units retreating after Allied attrition (16.57), or
even after the minor has been conquered by the
Allies. If, following a subsequent diplomatic die roll,
the minor country activates as a German minor ally,
these limitations no longer apply (EXCEPTION: No
more than five German ground/air factors may
enter or trace supply through Finland, even after
Finnish activation).
56.611 [Redundant.]
56.612 German units may not be placed in the
Finnish border hexes or Bessarabia until Germany
and Russia are at war. Russian control of Bessarabia
does not prevent Germany from placing units in
Rumania proper, if Germany is otherwise able to do
so.
56.62 Axis forces may operate in Vichy French
territory, including Vichy colonies, although the
entry of Axis troops into and the tracing of supply
lines through such areas adversely modifies the
Vichy diplomatic die roll.
56.63 Certain diplomatic die rolls for Spain and
Turkey allow either Axis or Allied forces to enter
those countries before they have activated as full
minor allies. These diplomatic results do not
activate these countries as minor allies. If a
subsequent diplomatic die roll reverses such a
result, any foreign units in the country may no
longer attack out of the country and must be
removed by the end of their player turn
immediately following the diplomatic die roll. Units
which do not leave by the end of their next SR
phase are eliminated. During its own player turn
immediately following the diplomatic reversal, the
foreign major power may continue to trace supply
through the minor.
56.64 Iraq and the Ukraine are controlled by Britain
and Russia, respectively, at the start of the
Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios. Axis forces
may freely enter Iraq and the Ukraine, if able to do
so in the normal course of events, regardless of the
status of those areas as minor allies.
102
56.65 Neither Axis nor Allied units may enter
Sweden while it is neutral (EXCEPTION: Axis SRs
through Sweden after a diplomatic result of “7”).
56.66 If a major power has units in a potential
minor ally, and enemy forces attack the potential
minor ally, intervention and association (but not
activation) is automatic and immediate if the
attacking major power and the garrisoning major
power are at war. Both the units inside the minor
country and other units controlled by the major
power may then assist the potential minor ally in
repelling the attack. If the two major powers are
not at war, the garrisoning units are immediately
relocated to the nearest hex(es) controlled by the
garrisoning major power outside the minor
country.
CLARIFICATION: Germany has gained control of the
hexes in a potential minor ally and the only Axis units in
it belong to Italy, which is at war with the Allies. If the
minor country is attacked by the Allies, it automatically
becomes an Italian associated minor country. Germany
loses the BRPs for the minor country, and Italy receives
the BRPs for the minor country in the next YSS,
assuming, of course, that the Allies have not conquered it
by that time.
56.7 An inactive minor ally which has been
conquered (or subverted, Allied variant 9) cannot
later be activated. Whether inactive or active, the
minor country does not get one turn to attempt to
retake its capital If a major power declares war on a
potential minor ally, that minor country may not
later become a minor ally of that major power. A
major power may declare war on a minor country
in which the major power has garrisoning units (see
53.12).
56.8 Unless already at war with Germany, Russia
may not declare war on a minor country controlled
by Germany or Italy without declaring war on the
Axis.
56.81 German garrisons in Finland and Rumania do
not prevent Russian subversion (Allied variant 9) of
an otherwise eligible minor country.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
56.9 In addition to the normal rules of conquest for
minor countries, certain Axis minor allies may
surrender or switch sides as a result of a diplomatic
die roll.
56.91 SURRENDER: If a minor ally surrenders, all its
units are immediately and permanently removed
from play. Hex control and BRPs for the minor ally
are unaffected by surrender.
56.92 SWITCHING SIDES: If a minor ally switches
sides, it becomes a minor ally of the Allied major
power which placed the greatest number of DPs in
it (a die roll if tied).
56.921 All minor ally units stacked with Axis units,
as well as all minor ally units which are not on the
board, are permanently eliminated. The remaining
minor ally units remain on the board and become a
part of the controlling Allied power's force pool
during the diplomatic phase (59.4). If Axis units
occupy the capital of the minor ally, the Allies have
one turn to gain control of the capital. If the capital
is not controlled by the Allies at the end of the next
Allied combat phase, all the units belonging to the
minor ally are eliminated. (EXCEPTION: After a
diplomatic result of “-1” for Vichy France, the Axis
must control both Vichy city and Paris to eliminate
the Vichy French units.)
CLARIFICATION: Any minor country units on the map
that find themselves in “illegal” areas after switching
sides, such as Vichy French units in Russia (50.6), are
eliminated (but not permanently).
56.922 All hexes not occupied by Axis units become
Allied-controlled.
56.923 The BRPs for the minor ally are immediately
added to the total for the controlling major power.
If Axis units occupy the capital of the minor ally,
the Allies have one turn to gain control of the
capital. If the minor’s capital is not controlled by
the Allies at the end of the next Allied combat
phase, the BRPs are lost. Similarly, the BRPs are lost
by the Axis only if they do not control the minor’s
capital by the end of the next Axis combat phase.
103
57. GERMAN ECONOMIC PENETRATION OF
MINOR COUNTRIES
57.1 When Germany obtains an economic interest in
a minor country, some or all of the minor country’s
BRPs are added to the German total at the start of
the Axis player turn. Germany may obtain such an
economic interest as follows:
57.2 WITHOUT HEX CONTROL: Germany may obtain
an economic interest in the following minor
countries, without gaining control of that minor
country’s hexes or being able to move units into
that minor country, after the following diplomatic
results:
A. BULGARIA: After a diplomatic result of “4” (5
BRPs) or “5” (10 BRPs).
B. HUNGARY: After a diplomatic result of “2” (5
BRPs) or “3” (10 BRPs).
C. RUMANIA: After a diplomatic result of “3” (5
BRPs) or “4” (10 or 15 BRPs, depending on the
status of Bessarabia).
D. YUGOSLAVIA: After a diplomatic result of “5” (5
BRPs) or “6” (10 BRPs).
57.21 The Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios begin
with Germany having an economic interest in
Finland (a diplomatic result of “1-2” for Finland is
in effect). This reflects Finland’s proximity to the
Swedish iron ore fields. Germany does not receive
any BRPs from Finland.
57.22 Once Germany has an economic interest in a
minor country (including Finland), Russia may only
declare war on that minor country (without
declaring war on Germany itself), after a Russian
diplomatic result of “0” or less. Germany may then
announce its support for the minor country,
whereupon Russia must either declare war on
Germany at a cost of 35 BRPs or back down and lose
the 10 BRPs it spent for the DoW against the minor
country. A German economic interest does not
prohibit Russian attacks on Bessarabia (58.63) or
the Finnish border hexes (58.73).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
57.23 If Germany fails to support a minor country in
which it has an economic interest against a Russian
attack, it immediately loses the BRPs it previously
received for that minor country. Similarly, a
Western Allied conquest of a minor country in
which Germany has an economic interest results in
an immediate BRP loss to Germany.
57.3 WITH HEX CONTROL: A more favorable
diplomatic result for Germany in Bulgaria,
Hungary, Rumania and Yugoslavia than those set
out above allows Germany to obtain both an
economic interest in the target minor country and
control of that minor country’s hexes. Once this
occurs, Russia may not attack that minor country
without a DoW against Germany. German control of
Rumania or Finland thus prevents a Russian attack
on Bessarabia (58.63) or the Finnish border hexes
(58.73), respectively. But see 58.64 if this happens
while a border war is ongoing.
57.4 If Germany obtains an economic interest in a
minor country which is at war with Russia, it must
declare war on Russia or forfeit the economic
interest. Similarly, if Germany gains control of the
hexes in a minor country which is at war with
Russia, it must declare war on Russia or forfeit the
hex control.
57.5 Certain other diplomatic results provide for
some minor countries to become associated to
major powers without the need for intervention.
The successful major power would then receive the
BRPs for the minor country in the next YSS.
However, a major power may not receive BRPs for a
minor country without controlling the minor
country other than as set out in 57.2, above.
58. POLAND AND EASTERN EUROPE
58.1 POLAND:
58.11 The Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios begin
with Germany at war with Britain, France and
Poland. No BRP costs are paid for declarations of
war in Fall 1939 unless a major power declares war
on a country which was neutral when the game
began. In Fall 1939, Germany has a free offensive
104
option on the Eastern front (EXCEPTION: An “8+”
diplomatic result for Poland). No German BRPs are
expended for this option, although it counts as an
Axis offensive option for the USAT (76). Germany is
not required to make any attacks against Poland in
Fall 1939 or on any subsequent turn. Britain sets up
and controls Poland.
58.12 If Poland survives Germany’s initial attack,
Poland and Russia move at the same time. Poland
may take independent offensive or attrition options
in the east at no BRP cost. These options may only
be directed against the Axis, even if Russia has
occupied eastern Poland. The Nazi-Soviet partition
line has no effect on Polish units or their
movement. Polish units may enter any hex in
Germany or remain in Poland. Polish BRPs do not
count toward the Allied totals for determination of
the initiative (9.11) until 1940 (58.13). If Russia
enters eastern Poland on an attrition option, it
makes an attrition die roll against Poland only if
one or more Russian units are adjacent to a Polish
unit east of the partition line.
58.13 If Poland survives to the 1940 YSS, the 20
Polish BRPs are added to the Allied total (but not to
Britain or any other Allied major power, unless
intervention (55) has occurred). During each YSS in
which Warsaw is controlled by regular Polish forces
(not partisans), Britain receives one DP
(EXCEPTION: An “8+” diplomatic result for Poland).
58.14 Russian troops may cross the partition line
and enter western Poland if Russia is at war with
Germany, but this does not constitute intervention.
All Russian-Allied cooperation problems (50) apply,
and the Polish BRPs continue to add to the Allied
totals independently. Polish and Russian options
must be compatible once Russia has joined the
Allies.
58.2 GERMANY’S EASTERN FRONT GARRISON:
58.21 At the start of the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios, a “3-5” diplomatic result for Russia is in
effect. Germany must therefore maintain a garrison
of at least 10 ground combat factors on the Eastern
A3R rules rewrite v.3
front in order to prevent a Russian violation of the
Nazi- Soviet pact.
58.22 The number of German ground factors
required to prevent a Russian declaration of war
against the Axis may be altered by the Russian
diplomatic result currently in effect. If a result of
“1-2” is in effect, 20 ground factors are required; a
result of “0”, 30 ground factors; a result of “-1”, 40
ground factors; a result of “-2”, 50 ground factors. If
a result of “-3” is in effect, a Russian DoW cannot be
prevented. If a result of “6-7” or “8+” is in effect, no
German garrison is required.
CLARIFICATION: The size of the German garrison is
calculated immediately before a Russian DoW;
fluctuations during the previous Axis turn are irrelevant.
CLARIFICATION: A Russian reaction roll (made at the
beginning of the Allied turn, 59.7) that causes the Eastern
front garrison requirement to increase allows Russia to
DoW Germany on that turn if the existing garrison fails
to meet the new garrison requirement. Therefore, a
Germany that anticipates an adverse Russian reaction
must increase its garrison in advance.
58.23 In addition, German ground factors in excess
of the required number may modify the diplomatic
die roll for Russia.
58.24 When determining the size of the German
garrison on the Eastern front, German units in
Finland are counted; German units in Rumania,
Sweden and Turkey are not, nor are Italian and
minor ally units anywhere. The size of the German
garrison is determined as required during play.
EXAMPLE: Germany has a garrison of 30 ground factors
at the start of the Spring 1941 game turn, giving it a +1
modifier on the Russian diplomatic table. By the end of
the Axis player turn, builds and SRs have increased the
garrison to 70 ground factors. If Russia were to make a
reaction die roll at the start of its player turn (59.7),
Germany would receive a +3 modifier, reflecting the
increased size of the garrison at the time of the reaction
die roll.
58.3 EASTERN EUROPE:
105
58.31 Eastern Europe consists of eastern Poland (10
BRPs), the Baltic States (15 BRPs), Bessarabia
(Rumania east of the Eastern front boundary) (five
BRPs) and the three Finnish border hexes
(A46/B45/C44) (five BRPs). The line running from
the north edge of the board to the Black Sea is the
partition line agreed to in the Nazi- Soviet pact of
August 1939.
58.32 All four parts of eastern Europe are treated as
separate areas for the determination of conquest
and reconquest (54.4).
58.33 The Russian occupation of a part of eastern
Europe does not make that area part of Russia for
the purposes of unit construction, partisans,
weather or movement.
58.34 When the Axis and Russia go to war, either
side may enter any part of eastern Europe occupied
by the other. If the Baltic States are still neutral,
their occupation must still be preceded by a DoW
(10 BRPs).
58.4 EASTERN POLAND:
58.41 Eastern Poland consists of the portion of
Poland east of the partition line. Eastern Poland is
treated as an entity separate from western Poland
throughout the game. It has a value of 10 BRPs,
distinct from the 20 BRPs for Poland. It is
conquered when Vilna, Brest-Litovsk and Lvov are
controlled by the conquering major power, even if
Poland itself remains unconquered.
58.42 In Fall 1939, German units may move across
the partition line into eastern Poland, but may not
remain there at the end of their turn unless
Germany has declared war on Russia in Fall 1939
(compliance with this restriction may require the
voluntary elimination of German units: 20.9).
(EXCEPTION: An “8+” diplomatic result for Poland.)
58.43 In Fall 1939, Russia may occupy eastern
Poland. Russian entry into eastern Poland does not
require a DoW or an offensive option. Russian units
may not move across the Polish partition line
unless Russia is at war with Germany. German and
A3R rules rewrite v.3
Russian units ignore each other’s ZoCs. Once Russia
has conquered eastern Poland, hex control is
automatically determined by the partition line.
58.44 If Russia does not occupy eastern Poland in
Fall 1939, either the Axis or Russia may do so on any
subsequent turn (EXCEPTION: Russia may not
occupy eastern Poland if the current diplomatic
result for Russia is “6-7” or “8+”). Neither side need
make a DoW or employ an offensive option to carry
out this action. The Axis occupation of eastern
Poland gives the Allied player the option to make a
Russian reaction die roll (59.7). Once one side has
entered eastern Poland, the other side may not do
so until the Axis and Russia are at war.
58.5 THE BALTIC STATES:
58.51 The Baltic States are a minor country worth
15 BRPs. Occupation of the Baltic States requires a
DoW (10 BRPs), but no offensive option is necessary.
The Baltic States do not deploy forces if attacked.
They are conquered when Riga, Parnu and Tallinn
are controlled by the conquering major power.
58.52 Germany may not declare war on the Baltic
States in Fall 1939, but Russia may do so. If Russia
does not declare war on the Baltic States in Fall
1939, either the Axis or Russia may do so on any
subsequent turn (EXCEPTION: Russia may not
declare war on the Baltic States if the current
diplomatic result for Russia is “6-7” or “8+”).
Neither side need employ an offensive option to
carry out this action. An Axis declaration of war on
the Baltic States gives the Allied player the option
to make a Russian reaction die roll (59.7). Once one
side has declared war on and entered the Baltic
States, the other side may not enter the Baltic
States until the Axis and Russia are at war.
58.6 BESSARABIA:
58.61 Bessarabia is worth five BRPs and is
conquered when Cernauti and Kishinev are
controlled by the conquering major power.
58.62 If Russia conquers Bessarabia, the Eastern
front boundary becomes the new Rumanian
106
frontier, and the remainder of Rumania is worth 10
BRPs until the YSS following Bessarabia’s
reconquest by the Axis. Should the Axis later
reconquer Bessarabia, it is reincorporated into
Rumania, and Rumania is restored to its full value
of 15 BRPs. If Russia later conquers the rest of
Rumania, Rumania and Bessarabia remain separate
until a later Axis reconquest of both.
CLARIFICATION: If Germany has obtained an economic
interest in Rumania that gave it Rumania's full BRP
value and Russia then seizes control of Bessarabia,
Germany must gain control of Bessarabia at the end of its
next combat phase or lose five BRPs.
58.63 If Russia wishes to occupy Bessarabia, Russia
announces this intention by demanding Bessarabia
at the start of its player turn, at the same time as it
announces DoWs. Russia may demand Bessarabia
only if the current Russian diplomatic result is “3-
5” or less. If Rumania concedes Bessarabia to Russia,
no war breaks out between Russia and Rumania and
Russia gains control of Bessarabia. Once Rumania
concedes, Russia may not renounce its claim. If
Rumania resists a Russian demand for Bessarabia,
Russia may either back down or immediately begin
a border war with Rumania without the need for a
formal DoW costing 10 BRPs. This Russian action
does not count as a modifier for the USAT. Germany
decides whether Rumania resists Russian demands.
58.631 Once the border war has started, Rumania
may either renounce its claim to Bessarabia at the
start of its independent turn (53.4) or continue
fighting. This procedure is then repeated for the
duration of the border war. Russia may renounce its
claim during the declaration of war phase of any
subsequent Russian player turn, and Rumania may
renounce its claim at the start of any subsequent
independent Rumanian turn.
58.64 If Russia engages in a border war with
Rumania for Bessarabia, at least six Rumanian
ground units, including the two 2-3 Rumanian
infantry units, must deploy in Bessarabia. Russian
units may only enter Bessarabia. The provisions of
rule 53 apply to Rumanian units. The war ends
A3R rules rewrite v.3
when either side renounces its claim to Bessarabia
or when Russia controls both Bessarabian cities at
the end of a Rumanian combat phase. If Rumania
voluntarily withdraws all its units from Bessarabia,
it is considered to have renounced its claim and the
border war ends.
CLARIFICATION: During a border war, Russian air units
may only fly missions over Bessarabia. Russian ZoCs do
not extend into the rest of Rumania.
CLARIFICATION: If Russia renounces its claim, it may
later renew it and make a second claim, if it is otherwise
allowed to do so.
CLARIFICATION: If Germany gains control of Rumania
diplomatically (57.3) while a border war is ongoing, and
neither side renounces their claim to Bessarabia, 56.22
applies.
58.641 Rumania may rebuild one infantry unit each
turn after the outbreak of war, whether or not the
war is continuing, but Germany must pay the BRP
cost of such reconstruction (53.51). Surviving
Rumanian units remain on the board, and are
controlled by the German player.
CLARIFICATION: If Germany or Italy declares war on
Rumania after a border war, Russia redeploys and
controls the Rumanian units.
58.65 RUSSIAN DoW ON RUMANIA: Russia may only
attack Rumania proper if allowed to do so by a
Russian diplomatic result of “1-2” or less. If
Germany has an economic interest in Rumania, a
Russian diplomatic result of “0” or less is required.
An attack on Rumania proper requires an
expenditure of 10 BRPs for a DoW. If Russia attacks
Rumania before it has occupied Bessarabia,
Rumanian units may set up in Bessarabia.
58.66 Once Rumania is under German control,
Bessarabia remains part of Rumania and may no
longer be separately attacked by Russia.
CLARIFICATION: If Germany DoWs Rumania before
Russia has demanded Bessarabia, Bessarabia remains
107
part of Rumania and may no longer be separately
attacked by Russia.
58.67 Bessarabia, if unconquered by Russia when
Germany and Russia go to war, remains part of
Rumania, and may not be entered by Russia without
a separate DoW (10 BRPs) against Rumania. This
requirement for a separate DoW is lifted if Russia is
at war with Germany and Rumania has activated as
a German minor ally.
58.7 THE FINNISH BORDER HEXES:
58.71 The Finnish border hexes are worth five BRPs
and are conquered when all three hexes are
controlled by the conquering major power.
OPTIONAL: These hexes are considered to be
mountain terrain (5.1).
58.72 If Russia conquers the Finnish border hexes,
the remainder of Finland is worth five BRPs until
the YSS following the reconquest of the Finnish
border hexes by the Axis. Should the Axis later
reconquer the Finnish border hexes, they are
reincorporated into Finland, and Finland is restored
to its full value of 10 BRPs. If Russia later conquers
the rest of Finland, Finland and the Finnish border
hexes remain separate until a later Axis reconquest
of both.
58.73 If Finland resists a Russian demand for the
Finnish border hexes, war may break out between
Russia and Finland in the same manner as set out in
58.63. At least one Finnish ground unit must deploy
in each Finnish border hex. The conflict between
Russia and Finland is subject to the same rules and
restrictions and ends in the same way as a Russo-
Rumanian war over Bessarabia (58.64).
58.74 At the start of the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios, Germany has an economic interest in
Finland, and Russia may not attack Finland proper
unless allowed to do so by a Russian diplomatic
result of “0” or less. Once Finland is under German
control, the Finnish border hexes remain part of
Finland and may no longer be separately attacked
by Russia.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
58.75 The Finnish border hexes, if unconquered by
Russia when Germany and Russia go to war, remain
part of Finland, and may not be entered by Russia
without a separate DoW (10 BRPs) against Finland.
This requirement for a separate DoW is lifted if
Russia is at war with Germany and Finland has
activated as a German minor ally.
59. DIPLOMACY
59.1 DIPLOMATIC POINTS (DPs): During the opening
setup of each scenario, including the Campaign
Game and 1939 scenarios, after the deployment of
all units, each major power receives a basic
allotment of DPs. During each subsequent YSS, DPs
are similarly received and committed immediately
after BRP calculation, and before SW construction.
The basic allotments are:
Germany, Britain, U.S.: 3 each;
Italy, Russia, France: 2 each.
59.11 Each major power receives an additional DP
for every 100 BRPs available to it during the YSS
(EXCEPTIONS: Games that start in 1939 (59.12), and
the U.S. before it is at war (59.24)). The number of
additional DPs thus acquired may not exceed the
major power’s basic DP allocation. The acquisition
of these DPs is automatic and does not require any
BRP expenditure.
59.12 During the opening setup of the Campaign
Game and 1939 scenarios, each major power
receives only its basic allotment of DPs. Additional
DPs may not be gained during the opening setup of
the Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios. Additional
DPs are gained at the start of the 1941, 1942 and
1944 scenarios.
59.13 The DPs available to each major power are
also increased or decreased by various military and
political developments, as set out in Appendix I.
Once a DP is gained in the YSS, it is not lost if
control of an area that granted that DP is lost
during the year. DPs allocated to targets remain in
play for the remainder of the year.
108
59.2 ALLOCATION OF DPs: After determining the
total number of DPs available, each major power
secretly records its allocation of DPs, revealing
them during the ensuing year. In a multi-player
game, a player may, but need not, consult with
other players and inform them of his allocations.
59.21 DPs may, subject to the restrictions set out
below, be allocated to the U.S. and any of the
countries listed in Appendix II. A major power may
allocate DPs to itself.
59.22 No major power may place more than half
(rounded up) of its DPs in a single country. Belgium
and Luxembourg are considered to be one country
for diplomatic purposes.
59.23 Russia may allocate DPs only to Balkan
countries (Bulgaria, Hungary, Rumania, Yugoslavia
and Greece), Persia, Japan, Sweden, Finland,
Turkey, the Ukraine and itself. Russia may only
allocate DPs to a Balkan country if it controls a
supplied hex adjacent to any one of them during
the YSS.
59.24 Before it is at war, the U.S. may only allocate
DPs to the extent that it is allowed by the USAT
Table (76).
59.25 DPs may only be placed in Poland during the
opening setup of the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios.
59.26 DPs may only be placed in the U.S. during the
opening setup of the Campaign Game and 1939
scenarios and the 1940 and 1941 YSS. Russia may
not place DPs in the U.S.
59.27 DPs may only be placed in Japan during the
1941 YSS.
59.28 Although a normal diplomatic die roll may
not be made for Russia during 1939, DPs may be
placed in Russia during the opening setup of the
Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios, in order to
modify a possible Russian reaction die roll (59.7).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
59.29 DPs may not be placed in Vichy France during
a YSS in which France is still unconquered.
59.3 DPs may not be accumulated from year to year,
either by the major power generating them or in a
recipient, so there is no point in leaving DPs
uncommitted. At the end of each year, all DPs are
eliminated, even in recipients which were not
selected for a diplomatic die roll.
59.31 A major power cannot begin a year with a
negative number of DPs. In such a case, no DP
deficit is carried forward to the next year, nor is
there any other diplomatic penalty. The major
power simply cannot allocate any DPs during that
year. If a major power is conquered, its DPs remain
in play for the remainder of the year.
59.4 DIPLOMATIC DIE ROLLS: At the start of each
game turn, immediately after determining the
initiative, the Axis, Western Allies and Russia
(whether neutral or not) may each make one
diplomatic die roll. Diplomatic die rolls are made at
no BRP cost. Diplomatic rolls are made after all
targets have been named, in the order the targets
were named (59.41, 59.42).
EXCEPTIONS: Germany may additionally make die rolls
for Bulgaria, Hungary, Rumania and Finland (59.52), and
in certain cases, Vichy (70.91). While neutral, Russia may
additionally make reaction rolls each turn at the
beginning of an Allied turn (59.7). DPs allocated to the
U.S. do not require die rolls (59.8).
59.41 The coalition which has the initiative (9.11)
selects its diplomatic target first. If the Axis have
the initiative, either Germany or Italy selects a
diplomatic target and announces its selection.
Britain, France or the U.S. then selects a diplomatic
target and announces its selection. Finally, Russia
selects a diplomatic target and announces its
selection. If the Allies have the initiative, the same
procedure is followed, with the Western Allies
selecting first, then Russia and finally the Axis.
59.411 Of the Axis powers, Germany has the first
option to make a diplomatic die roll. Italy may only
109
make a diplomatic die roll if Germany does not do
so.
59.412 Of the Western Allied powers, Britain has the
first option to make a diplomatic die roll. France
may only make a diplomatic die roll if Britain does
not do so. The U.S. may only make a diplomatic die
roll if Britain and France do not do so.
59.42 Each major power making a diplomatic die
roll selects and announces its target before major
powers reveal the number of DPs that they placed
in any of the selected targets. Major powers then
decide, in the same order that they named targets
(59.41) whether they will engage in covert
operations to remove enemy DPs (59.43) before any
diplomatic die rolls are actually made.
59.43 COVERT OPERATIONS: Covert operations
allow a major power to negate either one or two
enemy DPs during the diplomatic phase,
immediately after an opponent has selected his
target and the number of DPs in that target have
been announced. Enemy diplomatic effects in the
United States (59.8) may be similarly opposed.
59.431 COVERT OPS CAPABILITIES: Germany, Italy
and Britain each gain a covert operation capability
of one in the 1940 YSS. Russia gains a covert
operation capability of two at the same time. These
capabilities are not renewed each year. Once a
major power uses its covert operation(s), the
capability is exhausted for the remainder of the
game.
59.44 CONDUCTING COVERT OPS: Covert operations
are permitted only if at least one “friendly” DP was
placed in the target in the current year. Germany
and neutral Italy, and the Western Allies and
neutral Russia, are considered “friendly” for the
purposes of covert operations. Thus Germany may
conduct a covert operation based on a neutral
Italian DP, and a neutral Russia may conduct a
covert operation based on a Western Allied DP.
Similarly, Britain and Russia may combine to negate
Axis DPs in the same target if both have a
remaining covert operations capability, provided at
A3R rules rewrite v.3
least one of them placed a DP in the target during
the current year.
59.441 A country which has a covert operations
capacity of two may choose to limit a covert
operation to negating one enemy DP so as to use its
remaining capability elsewhere.
59.442 DPs negated in Russia by covert operations
are eliminated for the rest of the year. Only
Germany may conduct a covert operation in Russia
when Russia makes a reaction die roll (59.7).
59.443 If all the naming player’s DPs in a target are
negated by a covert operation, no diplomatic die
roll is made for that target unless the opposing
player wishes.
59.444 In targets in which DPs are doubled
(Denmark, Axis DPs in Finland and the Balkans,
Russian subversion (Allied variant 9)), covert
operations negate enemy DPs after the doubling has
occurred.
EXAMPLE: Germany has two DPs in Rumania, and
Russia conducts a covert operation after Germany has
selected Rumania as a diplomatic target. Russia opts to
use both of its covert operations (59.441). The German
DPs are doubled to four, then reduced to two.
59.45 Covert operations may not be used in targets
named by a friendly country. A player may
therefore not name a target, then use his covert
operation capability to negate opposing DPs in
order to increase his chances of a successful result
(although he could do so if his opponent named the
target).
59.5 A major power may only select a diplomatic
target in which it has placed DPs in the preceding
YSS (EXCEPTION: Inactive German minors (59.52)).
DPs placed by an ally are not sufficient.
59.51 A major power whose capital is controlled by
the enemy may not make a diplomatic die roll,
although its DPs remain in play for the year, even if
it surrenders. A conquered Britain or Russia may
110
not make any diplomatic die rolls, but may allocate
any available DPs during the YSS.
59.52 Each major power (or, if it passes, its ally) may
select only one target each turn.
EXCEPTION: Germany may select inactive Bulgaria,
Hungary, Rumania and Finland at any time, even if it
selects another target in the same turn and even though
it placed no DPs in them. Germany may select these
countries once per year.
59.53 Once all targets are named, all DPs placed in
the targets in the preceding YSS are revealed,
including those placed by major powers which have
surrendered since the start of the year. After covert
operation decisions are made (59.581), one die is
rolled by the player who named the target. The die
roll is increased by the total number of Axis DPs in
the target, and decreased by the number of Allied
DPs in the target.
59.54 German and Italian DPs are combined even if
Italy is still neutral. Western Allied and Russian DPs
are combined only if Russia is at war with the Axis
(EXCEPTION: Western Allied and neutral Russian
DPs are combined in Japan and in a neutral Russia
in 1944 and thereafter). If Russia is neutral, the
Allied total is the greater of all Western Allied or
Russian DPs. The remaining DPs are disregarded.
59.55 In addition to DPs, the modifications set out in
the applicable diplomatic table are taken into
account in determining the modified diplomatic die
roll result. A diplomatic die roll is not affected by a
diplomatic result which occurred during the same
diplomatic phase, although a Russian reaction die
roll (59.7) may well be affected by diplomatic events
which occurred earlier in the turn. The results are
implemented as set out in the applicable diplomatic
table.
59.56 A target may only be named for a diplomatic
die roll once each game year, even when there is
one diplomatic table for a minor country before it
activates as a minor ally and another for after it
activates. Similarly, Vichy France could not be
A3R rules rewrite v.3
selected in the same year in which France
surrendered.
59.57 Russia may not be named for a diplomatic die
roll in 1939, although DPs may be placed in Russia
during the opening setup of the Campaign Game
and 1939 scenarios. Sweden and Yugoslavia may not
be named by Russia for a diplomatic die roll until
Russia is at war with Germany, although Russia may
place DPs in either country while neutral. This
prohibition does not apply to the Western Allies.
59.6 For certain countries, diplomatic results are
triggered by events other than their selection for a
diplomatic die roll.
59.61 A diplomatic die roll is made immediately
when France or Italy is conquered.
59.611 Only the side which has fewer DPs in France
or Italy may utilize their covert operation capability
(59.43) to negate opposing DPs at the time of French
and Italian surrender (in effect, the side with more
DPs in the target is deemed to have named it).
59.62 A diplomatic die roll is made for Denmark
when Germany declares war on Denmark, provided
Germany has not declared war on any other minor
neutral on a previous turn.
59.7 RUSSIAN REACTION DIE ROLLS: Whenever an
Axis action changes a modifier for the Russian
diplomatic die roll in the Allies’ favor, the Allied
player may, if he chooses, make a diplomatic die
roll for Russia at the start of the following Allied
player turn. Russian or Western Allied actions
which change a Russian modifier do not trigger a
Russian reaction die roll. A Russian reaction die roll
may be made whether or not a normal diplomatic
die roll for Russia has already been made during
that year and whether or not other Russian
reaction die rolls have been made earlier in that
year. Only German covert ops are allowed before a
Russian reaction roll (59.442). An increase in the
German Eastern front garrison (58.2), even if it
results in an overall change in modifiers in favor of
the Axis, does not prevent a Russian reaction die
111
roll if the Allies choose to make one (which would
have to be based on some other change in the
Russian diplomatic table). All applicable modifiers
are considered, and the result is immediately
implemented.
59.71 For greater clarity, the following actions give
the Allies the option of making a Russian reaction
die roll (see the diplomatic table for Russia for
greater detail):
A. The Axis occupy eastern Poland.
B. The Axis declare war on the Baltic States.
C. Germany obtains an economic interest in the
Balkans. This applies only to the first German
economic penetration of a minor country which
negates the +1 modification for Russia resulting
from any one of Bulgaria, Hungary, Rumania and
Yugoslavia not being subject to Axis economic
penetration or control.
D. Each time the Axis attack or gain control of
Bulgaria, Hungary, Rumania or Yugoslavia.
E. The Axis declare war on or gain control of
Turkey.
F. The Axis successfully invade Britain.
G. The Axis gain control of an objective hex in
Britain.
H. Germany reduces its garrison on the Eastern
front.
I. Germany obtains and accepts (59.91) an “8+”
diplomatic result for Poland.
CLARIFICATION: If Germany begins a Campaign game
with 30 factors in East Prussia and leaves only 10 factors
in Poland at the end of the Axis Fall 1939 turn, this does
not count as a reduction of Germany’s Eastern front
garrison (59.71H) and does not allow a Russian reaction
roll.
CLARIFICATION: A German airdrop into Britain only
triggers a Russian reaction if it successfully captures an
objective. In addition, an Axis invasion of Britain only
triggers a Russian reaction if there were no Axis infantry
or armor units in Britain prior to that invasion. A second
invasion would thus trigger a reaction only if all units
involved in the first invasion had been eliminated.
A3R rules rewrite v.3

59.8 UNITED STATES: DPs may be allocated to the
U.S. to increase or decrease tensions between the
U.S. and the Axis. DPs allocated to the U.S. may be
activated by the owning major power during any
diplomatic phase of the year following their
allocation to trigger or delay U.S. pro-Allied
activities. A major power may, if it wishes, activate
only some of the DPs it allocated to the U.S. in a
given diplomatic phase, activating other DPs later
that year as required. Each DP may only be used
once to increase or decrease the USAT. DPs
allocated to the U.S. may be activated even if the
owning major power has made a normal diplomatic
die roll in the same turn. The changes in USAT
brought about by DPs are permanent.
59.9 PERMANENT RESULTS: A “*” beside a
diplomatic result means the result is permanent
and the target may not again be selected for a
diplomatic die roll in a future year. After the
activation of a minor country, using its “inactive”
table, diplomatic die rolls may be made for that
minor country using its “active” table.
59.91 LESSER RESULTS: A major power which
achieves a favorable diplomatic result (e.g., a result
on its side of a “no effect” result) may choose to
implement any lesser result, either to avoid a “*”
result or to achieve a particular lower-ranked but,
in the circumstances, more desired result.
CLARIFICATION: For the purposes of this rule a
“continues current policies result” is treated as a “no
effect” result.
CLARIFICATION: A player invoking this rule may not
force his opponent to take a result favorable to them. In
effect, the player invoking this rule must either take a
“no effect” result or a result less favorable to himself.
EXAMPLE: Germany obtains a diplomatic result of “5”
for Hungary. Germany then makes another diplomatic
die roll for Hungary in a subsequent year and obtains a
“3” result. Germany may select a “1” result in order to
maintain its position in Hungary.
112
EXAMPLE: Germany obtains a diplomatic result of “8”
for Vichy France, activating it as a minor ally. If a
subsequent diplomatic roll result is greater than “0” but
less than “8”, Germany may select a “1-4” result, which
would cause Vichy France to continue its current
alliance with Germany. Note that Germany may not
choose a “0” or “-1”, even if it wished to.
MISCELLANEOUS RULES
60. ARABIA
60.1 Arabia is a neutral minor country with no BRP
value. Neither side may enter neutral Arabia
without paying 10 BRPs for a DoW. Arabia is
conquered when the attacker gains control of Kaf
and Jauf.
61. GIBRALTAR
61.1 The loss of Gibraltar does not cost Britain any
BRPs. However, if the Axis control Gibraltar and one
of Brest, St. Nazaire, La Rochelle or Vigo, each
German submarine factor eliminates four Allied
BRPs (42.5221). Loss of Gibraltar also effects British
Surrender (75) and the USAT (76).
61.2 The side which controls Gibraltar, and only
that side, may SR units by sea into, out of, or
through Gibraltar, regardless of the presence of
enemy units on any adjacent hex. The converse is
not true; units may not SR into or out of Z8, or SR
between the Atlantic and the Mediterranean, if
Gibraltar is in enemy hands (20.4).
61.3 Gibraltar, as a two-front port, may be invaded
by fleets based in both the Mediterranean and the
Western fronts during a Mediterranean offensive
option or limited offensive operation, provided, of
course, that there is no 9-factor fleet in Gibraltar at
the moment of invasion.
62. IRAQ, KUWAIT & PERSIA
62.1 IRAQ: Iraq is a British colony worth 10 BRPs.
Iraq may rebel against the British as a result of
diplomatic activity by the Axis (62.4). Axis units
may freely enter Iraq if they are otherwise able to,
A3R rules rewrite v.3
regardless of its status as a colony or minor ally
(56.64).
62.2 Basra is an unlimited supply source for
Western Allied units (29.213). Baghdad is a limited
supply source for the side which controls it
(29.224).
62.3 The Allies may SR units by sea from Europe to
Basra. Such units incur a one turn delay. Units SRed
by sea from Suez to Iraq are not delayed (20.511).
62.4 Iraq may be activated as an Axis minor ally by a
successful Axis diplomatic die roll. Iraqi activation
negates British control of all Iraqi hexes except
those occupied by Allied units. Basra loses its status
as an unlimited Western Allied supply source until
the Iraqi rebellion is suppressed. Allied units in Iraq
when the rebellion breaks out are automatically in
limited supply for one Allied player turn. Iraq may
not be selected for a diplomatic die roll if it is
conquered by the Axis. Nor may it be selected if
there is a chance that as a result of the die roll, it
would activate as an Italian minor ally and Italy is
still neutral.
62.41 Iraqi forces are rebels and deploy only after a
diplomatic result of “7+” for Iraq and draw supply
from Baghdad or any other Axis supply source.
During their turn of initial placement Iraqi units
are automatically in supply. If Baghdad is
garrisoned by Allied units when Iraq activates as an
Axis minor ally, the Axis have one turn to occupy
Baghdad with an Axis ground unit. If they fail, all
Iraqi units are eliminated at the same time as
unsupplied units.
62.411 If all Iraqi cities are garrisoned when Iraq
activates, the Iraqi air unit is placed on the board
only after one of them is captured by the Iraqis. The
air factor is placed face up and may fly a mission in
the following phase. Thus, if the Axis captured an
Iraqi city in the movement phase, the air unit
would be immediately placed in that city and could
fly a mission in the combat phase.
113
62.412 Once placed, the Iraqis are eliminated if the
Allies recapture Baghdad.
62.42 Iraqi forces may only enter Iraq, Kuwait,
Persia, Lebanon-Syria, Palestine, Transjordan and
Arabia (56.4F).
62.5 Britain may construct up to three BRPs worth
of British infantry and replacement units (only) in
Suez, Basra and the India box each turn (in total -
not three BRPs in each location) (19.35).
62.6 KUWAIT: Kuwait is a British colony with no
BRP value. Kuwait is conquered when the attacker
gains controls of Al Kuwait.
62.7 PERSIA: Persia is neutral at the start of the
Campaign Game with no BRP value. Neither side
may enter Persia without a DoW (EXCEPTION: 38.2),
unless Persia has activated as an Axis minor ally.
62.71 Persian forces operate under the same
restrictions as Iraqi rebels (62.41, 62.42, 56.4G),
except that they are also deployed when a major
power DoWs Persia. Persian units draw supply from
Tehran or any other Axis supply source. If Tehran is
garrisoned by Allied units when Persia activates as
an Axis minor ally, the Axis have one turn to
occupy Tehran with an Axis ground unit.
63. IRELAND
63.1 Northern Ireland (Ulster) is an integral part of
Britain for all purposes. The remainder of Ireland is
a neutral minor country with no BRP value. Neither
side may enter neutral Ireland without paying 10
BRPs for a DoW.
63.2 If the Allies declare war on Ireland, Germany
may construct three partisans, at the rate of one
per turn, in any vacant Irish hex not in an Allied
ZoC, regardless of which side controls the hex, and
whether or not the Allies have conquered Ireland.
Germany may also construct partisans in Ireland
after a diplomatic result of “7” or “8+” for Ireland.
Axis partisans may not be constructed in Ulster,
although they may move and attack into Ulster
A3R rules rewrite v.3
once they have been built. Britain loses one BRP for
each Irish partisan on the board.
CLARIFICATION: Britain many not attack Irish
partisans which are adjacent to Ulster without a DoW on
Ireland.
64. MALTA
64.1 The basing capacity of Malta for both air and
naval units is the same as any other port. An airbase
may be placed in Malta.
64.2 Air units in Malta may, at their option, decline
counterair combat. If they do so, they are inverted
and cannot carry out any activity for the remainder
of the game turn. For the effect of this rule on air
attacks against naval units based at Malta,
(26.4527).
64.3 Malta is a limited supply source for Western
Allied units in Malta only, provided the Western
Allies control at least one fully supplied port in the
Mediterranean (29.227). To operate air and naval
units in Malta, the Allies must trace sea supply to
Malta from a fully supplied port.
CLARIFICATION: “A fully supplied port in the
Mediterranean” means “a port bordering the
Mediterranean sea”, not “a port on the Mediterranean
front”. Thus, Basra does not allow Malta to be a limited
supply source.
64.4 BRITISH SUBMARINES: Britain begins each
scenario with five submarine factors in Malta.
These submarines may be used against any Axis
naval activity in the Mediterranean, including sea
supply, naval missions and interceptions, sea escort
and SR of naval units. They may not conduct shore
bombardment, sea transport or invasion missions,
nor may they protect Allied sea supply or provide
sea escort. Submarines may operate from Malta
even when it is not fully supplied, but if Malta loses
its limited supply source status, any submarines
based there are inverted.
64.41 Malta’s submarines may be used on their own
or in conjunction with Allied fleets, and need not be
114
directed against the same Axis activity in the same
turn. Each submarine factor may be used only once
per game turn, and is inverted after use,
construction or repair.
64.42 Malta’s five submarines are treated as British
fleet factors for interception and combat purposes.
A separate interception die roll is always made for
the British submarines in Malta. Intercepting
British submarines are not subject to counter-
interception by Axis fleets. In addition, Malta
submarines may not be attacked by Axis air units
while in port, but Axis air factors within range of
Malta may attack intercepting British submarines
as they leave Malta by making a single air attack
dice roll (no air defense dice roll is made).
Additional air sorties against British submarines
once they are at sea are not permitted.
CLARIFICATION: British submarines are also not
subject to attack by Axis variant 12 (harbor defenses).
64.43 Combat between Axis fleets and British
submarines is resolved as fleet combat. If British
submarines are operating in concert with other
Allied, including British, fleets, the provisions of
27.5715 apply. The submarines are considered a
separate component of the Allied naval force
engaged.
64.44 British submarines which are eliminated may
be rebuilt in Malta, even if it is not fully supplied, at
the cost of one BRP per submarine factor. Damaged
submarine factors return to Malta for immediate
repair in the same manner as regular fleet factors
damaged in combat.
64.45 If Malta is conquered by the Axis, the British
submarines based in Malta are eliminated. If the
Allies reconquer Malta, Britain may restore Malta’s
submarine capacity by rebuilding submarines in
Malta.
64.46 Britain may never have more than five
submarine factors in play, and may not construct or
base submarines in any port other than Malta.
65. SIBERIAN TRANSFER
A3R rules rewrite v.3
65.1 Historically, in December 1941 the Germans
were surprised by the sudden appearance of
Russian units from Siberia. The timing of the
transfer of units from Siberia is determined not
only by the outbreak of war between Germany and
Russia, but also by Russo- Japanese relations.
65.2 EFFECTS OF SIBERIAN TRANSFER: On the first
turn of the Siberian transfer, the Russian player
adds one 3-5 armor and three 3-3 infantry units to
his force pool and places them on the board prior to
his movement phase, immediately after initial
supply determination (29.42). During the following
three turns the Russian player may similarly place
unbuilt units on the board prior to movement as
follows: 2nd turn: one 4-5 armor and two 3-3
infantry units; 3rd turn: one 4-5 armor and one 3-3
infantry unit; 4th turn: one 3-3 infantry unit. These
subsequent transfers come from Russian allowable
builds.
CLARIFICATION: If Barbarossa is delayed such that
Siberian transfer does not take place until after Winter
1941, Russia may not add the Winter 1941 Siberian
transfer units to its force pool since these additions only
take place as a result of Siberian transfer. Subsequent
Russian force pool additions, however, are added to the
Russian force pool regardless of Barbarossa’s start date.
Russia may pay for and build those units when they
become available.
65.3 Units placed on the board by Siberian transfer
must initially be placed in a controlled Russian city
which can trace a supply line from the east edge of
the board. The city may be in an Axis ZoC. Normal
stacking limits must be adhered to during initial
placement. Units may move during the movement
phase immediately following placement. Siberian
transfer units reduce Russian capacity to SR units to
and from Siberia when placed on the board (20.514).
CLARIFICATION: Units may not appear in the Siberia
box, nor may they appear in a city that did not receive
supply by land from the east edge of the board.
65.4 Units placed on the board by Siberian transfer
are not constructed in the normal sense - there is
115
no BRP cost incurred by the Russian player for such
placement.
65.41 The Siberian transfer is the only exception to
the unit construction process. Otherwise, unbuilt
units may be placed on the board only during the
unit construction phase.
65.5 WHEN SIBERIAN TRANSFER OCCURS: Barring a
diplomatic result for Japan which affects Siberian
transfer, Russian units from Siberia first appear on
the third Russian player turn following the
outbreak of war between Germany and Russia. If
Russia declares war on Germany, the turn in which
the declaration of war takes place is not counted.
EXAMPLES: If Germany declared war on Russia in
Summer 1941, the Siberian units would appear during
the Russian Winter 1941 player turn. If Germany
declared war in Spring 1941, the Siberian units would
appear in Fall 1941. If Russia declared war on Germany in
Spring 1942, the Siberian units would appear during the
Russian Winter 1942 player turn.
65.51 If a “-1” or “0” diplomatic result for Japan
occurs, the Siberian transfer begins on the third
Russian player turn following the diplomatic result,
even if Germany and Russia are not at war
(EXCEPTION: Siberian transfer may occur sooner if
it has already been triggered by the outbreak of war
between Germany and Russia).
65.52 If a “6-7” or “8+”. diplomatic result for Japan
occurs, no Siberian transfer is allowed. Any Siberian
transfer which is underway as a result of the
outbreak of war between Germany and Russia is
aborted. A 3-5 armor and three 3-3 infantry units
are added to the Russian force pool by placing them
on a Russian-controlled hex on the east edge of the
board, at no SR or BRP cost to the Russian player,
during the SR phase of the Russian Winter 1942
player turn or the third Russian player turn
following the outbreak of war between Germany
and Russia, whichever is later. All 1942 force pool
additions must be constructed normally.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
CLARIFICATION: If these diplomatic results occur after
Russia has completed some or all of its Siberian transfers,
Japanese actions have no retroactive effect on already
transferred units.
65.6 If a 4-5 armor unit is not available during the
second or third turn of the Siberian transfer, either
because the Siberian transfer began early or
because of Allied variant 12, the Russian player may
substitute an unbuilt 3-5 armor unit or an infantry
unit for the 4-5 armor unit. Similarly, if no 3-3
infantry unit is available for placement during the
second, third or fourth turn of the Siberian
transfer, a smaller infantry unit may be substituted.
65.7 Siberian transfer may be invoked without any
effect on Allied victory conditions or any other
adverse effects.
65.8 [Moved to 65.41]
66. SPAIN & SPANISH COLONIES
66.1 Spanish Morocco and the Balearic Islands are
an integral part of Spain. They pass to the control of
any major power which controls Spain itself. Spain
may not construct units in Spanish Morocco or the
Balearic Islands, although Spain may deploy forces
there when Spanish forces are first placed on the
board.
66.2 Spanish units (only) are automatically in
limited supply when in Spanish Morocco.
66.3 An Axis declaration of war on Spain has
diplomatic repercussions for Germany in the
Balkans.
67. THE SUEZ CANAL/EGYPT
67.1 The Suez Canal consists of hexsides LL30/LL31,
MM30/LL31 and MM30/MM31. The Suez Canal is
treated as a river for all purposes, including
movement and combat, with the exception that
naval units may enter the canal. Naval movement
and sea supply through the Suez Canal is permitted
only if all the hexes adjacent to the canal are under
friendly control. For the purposes of air
116
interception, fleets moving through the Suez Canal
pass through hexes MM30 and LL31. The two hexes
south of the canal (the Gulf of Suez) are full ocean
hexes and are treated accordingly.
CLARIFICATION: Naval movement between Port Said
and Suez may not be intercepted by naval units.
67.2 The loss of Alexandria and/or Suez does not
cost Britain any BRPs, but has an effect on several
diplomatic tables as well as the USAT.
67.3 An Allied fleet based in Suez may provide sea
escort for a unit SRing to Basra, Bushire, the South
Africa box (67.5) or, provided the Suez canal is
open, a Mediterranean port. If the Axis gain control
of any hex adjacent to the Suez Canal, and the Allies
fail to immediately recapture it, the canal becomes
unusable. It does not again become usable until the
Allies have controlled all canal-side hexes for two
complete game turns. If control of the canal again
changes, another two turns are required to repair
it. Allied naval units may only move or SR through
the Suez Canal if it is usable. Wafdist partisans may
close (67.1), but not damage, the Suez Canal.
67.31 Axis fleets may not move, SR or provide sea
escort through the Suez Canal, regardless of who
controls the canal.
67.4 If Allied fleets in Suez city are displaced by Axis
ground units, the displaced fleets are relocated to
ports elsewhere in East Africa between Suez and the
South Africa box (See 27.214). They arrive in the
South Africa box during the Allied SR phase
following their displacement. Such fleets are
subject to Axis air interception as they leave Suez.
67.5 Allied units may be SRed between Suez and the
Western front via the South Africa box (20.511).
Units SRed in this manner move off the board to the
South Africa box, then, on the following turn, move
to their destination. If units are SRed from the
South Africa box to Suez, then into the
Mediterranean by sea, sea escort is required at Suez
or some other Mediterranean port. SRs by sea
A3R rules rewrite v.3
between Suez and Basra or Bushire do not incur a
one-turn delay.
67.6 Britain may construct up to three BRPs worth
of British infantry and replacement units (only) in
Suez, Basra and the India box each turn (in total -
not three BRPs in each location) (19.35).
68. SWEDEN
68.1 Swedish iron ore shipments to Germany may
be limited or interrupted by a diplomatic result of
“0” or “-1”, respectively, for Sweden. Iron ore
shipments are also interrupted by an Allied
conquest of Sweden, or if Germany and Sweden go
to war and Sweden survives the initial German
attack. If iron ore shipments are limited, Germany
immediately loses five BRPs; if shipments are
interrupted, Germany loses 10 BRPs. These BRP
losses are also incurred during each subsequent YSS
(prior to SW construction), unless Germany
reverses the diplomatic or military situation which
triggered the BRP loss.
68.2 SR between Sweden and Finland via the north
edge of the board is permitted in some
circumstances (20.513).
69. SWITZERLAND
69.1 No nation may declare war on Switzerland.
Swiss hexes may not be entered by ground units or
overflown by air or airborne units.
70. VICHY FRANCE
70.1 Vichy France is created when France
surrenders to the Axis. For the rules governing the
establishment of Vichy France, see 47.64.
70.2 While Vichy France is inactive, its units remain
on the board, and may be moved and SRed by
Germany. Vichy city functions as the capital of
Vichy France between the fall of France and the
conquest or deactivation of Vichy France. It is an
unlimited supply source for Vichy units. It becomes
a limited supply source for other Axis units only
after Vichy France activates as a German minor
117
ally. It is treated as an ordinary city at all other
times.
70.21 Marseilles and Lyons count as German-
controlled objectives while under Vichy control
(EXCEPTION: If Italy controlled a Vichy objective
when France surrendered, that objective is
considered to be an Italian-controlled objective
which is under Vichy control).
70.3 Germany controls the movement and
placement of Vichy forces. While Vichy France is
neutral, Vichy forces may freely move between
Vichy France and Vichy French colonies, but
otherwise must remain in Vichy territory. If Vichy
France is attacked, the limitations of 53.7 apply. If
Vichy France activates as a German minor ally,
there are no area restrictions on Vichy unit activity.
70.31 German units may freely move, SR and trace
supply through Vichy territory, although doing so
may adversely affect the diplomatic die roll for
Vichy France. German units may stack with Vichy
units. Italian units may do the same unless Italy is
still neutral, provided Germany grants its
permission. Any SRs by Vichy count against the
German SR capacity. Vichy units may be supplied
from Axis supply sources. While Vichy is neutral,
Vichy fleets may perform no functions other than
protecting Vichy sea supply lines and sea escorting
Vichy units.
70.32 If a major power declares war on Vichy
France, Vichy units remain in their current
positions (53.1) for that game turn. If Germany or
Italy declares war on Vichy France, all Vichy
colonies and the Vichy French units in them
become Free French, even if Vichy France is
conquered by the Axis.
CLARIFICATION: If Vichy survives the first turn of
Allied attacks against it, its forces may be moved
normally by Germany in subsequent turns (70.3).
CLARIFICATION: If Axis units are stacked with Vichy
units when the Axis declare war on Vichy, any Axis units
A3R rules rewrite v.3
stacked with Vichy units are displaced to adjacent hexes.
See 53.12.
70.33 Vichy infantry and replacements incur a -1
DM if attacked while outside France or a French
colony (15.24B).
70.4 Vichy France may only be activated as a
German minor ally by a diplomatic result of “8” or
“9+”. When activated, all Vichy units become part of
the German force pool, but no BRPs are received by
Germany (EXCEPTION: Vichy French colonies after
a diplomatic result of “9+” for Vichy France).
70.41 A diplomatic result of “0” for Vichy France,
before or after Vichy activation, deactivates Vichy
France. Vichy France ceases to exist as a political
entity, becoming again merely a part of France. All
Vichy forces are removed from the board. Vichy
colonies become uncontrolled. The first major
power to gain control of a former Vichy colony’s
capital conquers that colony. All hexes in European
Vichy France and Corsica not already controlled by
Allies pass to German control.
70.42 A diplomatic result of “-1” for Vichy France
causes any Vichy colonies and the Vichy units in
them to become Free French. If the Allies control a
supplied hex in continental Europe adjacent to or in
Vichy France, Vichy itself also switches sides
(56.92). If Vichy becomes an Allied minor ally, all
Vichy French units that survived the change, as
well as all Free French units are treated as French
minor allied units and are built in France, i.e.
Britain no longer has Free French units in its force
pool. Both results occur during the diplomatic
phase. The controlling Allied power immediately
receives the BRPs for these colonies.
CLARIFICATION: Allied forces in Corsica do not count as
being “in continental Europe” for the purposes of Vichy
France switching sides.
70.5 Whether active or inactive, Vichy France
ceases to exist and all Vichy units are removed from
the board at the end of any Allied combat phase in
which the city of Vichy is solely occupied or
118
controlled by Allied forces, including partisans. Any
hexes in Vichy France not already controlled by the
Allies revert to German control; any remaining
Vichy colonies are controlled by no one.
70.51 Vichy France also ceases to exist and all Vichy
units are removed from the board at the end of any
Axis combat phase in which the Axis fail to
recapture an Allied or partisan-controlled Paris.
70.6 Any Vichy units destroyed in combat before
Vichy activates as a German minor ally are
governed by 53.5.
70.7 FREE FRENCH: Britain receives the BRPs for
Free French colonies during each YSS, unless they
have been conquered by Axis. Free French units are
added to the British force pool and function as
British units in all respects, except that they retain
their nationality DRMs and cannot combine with
British air or fleet factors. Britain pays for their
offensive operations, and may rebuild eliminated
Free French units in Britain, Suez, Basra or India
(19.35). If Britain surrenders, Free French units are
treated as British units and are added to the
American force pool (75.52). Objective hexes
controlled by Free French units count as British-
controlled objectives.
70.8 The Axis do not normally receive BRPs for
Vichy colonies, even if Vichy France has activated
as a German minor ally (EXCEPTION: associated
colonies (70.931) and/or a diplomatic result of “9+”
for Vichy France). The Axis do receive BRPs for
French colonies conquered before the fall of France,
and Vichy colonies reconquered from the Allies, or
conquered after Vichy deactivation, or an Axis DoW
on Vichy France.
70.9 BRITISH ATTACKS ON VICHY COLONIES: Britain
may attack Vichy colonies without paying 10 BRPs
for a declaration of war on Vichy France, and
without triggering a decrease in the USAT. Each
Vichy colony is treated as an independent minor
country worth five BRPs, with forces consisting of
those Vichy units in the colony when it is attacked.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
Tunisia, Algeria and Morocco are treated as
separate colonies for the purposes of this rule.
70.91 For each Vichy colony attacked by Britain, a
+1 modifier for the Vichy diplomatic die roll is
triggered. In addition, Germany may make a Vichy
reaction die roll in the diplomatic phase of the turn
following such an Allied attack. This roll may be
made even in the year in which France falls, and
even if a diplomatic die roll has already been made
for Vichy earlier in the year, whether or not there
are any Axis DPs in Vichy, and whether or not other
diplomatic targets are named by Germany that
turn.
70.92 Vichy forces in a colony attacked by Britain
may be used to defend the colony, but Vichy forces
outside the colony take no part in the fighting and
may not be used to reinforce the colony. Vichy
infantry and replacement units eliminated during
an Allied attack on a Vichy colony may be rebuilt in
Vichy France, as per 53.51 (one unit per turn), but
Germany must pay the BRP cost of such
reconstruction. Axis forces may be used to
reinforce the colony, although this may trigger an
adverse modifier for future Vichy diplomatic die
rolls.
70.93 CONQUEST: Allied occupation of the colony’s
capital results in its immediate conquest and the
elimination of any remaining Vichy French forces
in the colony. All hexes in the colony pass to British
control, unless the Axis have intervened in the
colony, in which case normal hex control rules
apply (54.2).
70.931 INTERVENTION: If the colony already
contains Axis units when it is attacked, intervention
and association is automatic and all hexes in the
colony come under Axis control. Axis intervention
on behalf of a Vichy colony in this instance does not
trigger the -3 diplomatic modifier otherwise
incurred with Axis entry into Vichy territory.
During each YSS, the Axis receive 5 BRPs for each
associated Vichy colony, regardless of subsequent
diplomatic developments with respect to Vichy
France itself.
119
70.94 While Britain is at war with a Vichy colony,
the colony’s capital acts as a limited supply source
for all Vichy French units in the colony. Supply may
not be traced from any other supply source unless
the colony survives the initial turn of attack and
the Axis intervene. Since Vichy French forces are
moved by Germany during the Axis player turn, a
Vichy colony attacked by Britain does not get an
independent player turn following the British
attack. In the unlikely event that fighting is still
going on in a Vichy colony when Vichy activates as
an Axis minor ally, deactivates, switches sides or
the Allies declare war on Vichy, the colony is again
considered part of Vichy France and all normal
rules for that colony apply.
VARIANTS
71. VARIANTS
71.1 There are 25 Axis and 25 Allied variants. These
variants are set out in Appendix IV (Axis) and
Appendix V (Allied). Numbered counters have been
provided to facilitate the selection of variants.
71.2 The use of variants is optional. If used, variants
may be employed in any manner agreed upon by
the players, provided this is done prior to the start
of the game. Some suggestions follow:
71.21 In a two-player Campaign Game:
A. Each side draws an equal number of variants. It is
suggested that the number drawn not exceed five
per side.
B. Each side draws a “1939-40” variant. When it is
played, a “1941-42” variant is drawn. When it is
played, a “1943-45” variant is drawn. The categories
are; “1939-40”: Axis 1-12; Allied 1-10; “1941-42”:
Axis 13- 22, Allied 11-19; “1943-45”: Axis 23-25,
Allied 20-25.
C. Each player draws two variants and retains the
one he prefers, discarding the other (this method
can be used with greater number of variants as
well).
A3R rules rewrite v.3
71.22 In a multi-player Campaign Game, each
country may draw one or more variants, depending
on the relative abilities and wishes of the players
(variants are a good way of ensuring an equal game
between players of different strengths). All Axis
variants are German, except 1, 3, 9 and 11-15, which
are Italian. All Allied variants are British/American,
except 1-3, which are French, and 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 14
and 15, which are Russian.
71.3 If mutually exclusive variants (Axis 23 and 24;
Allied 1 and 2) are drawn, the drawing player
discards the unwanted variant and draws a
replacement. This is not revealed to the opponent.
71.4 Some variants may be played at any time;
others may be played only at a certain point or
during a certain time frame. A variant is played by
disclosing it to all other players. The effects of the
variant are then implemented.
71.5 If a power is conquered before it plays a
variant, the variant is passed to an ally (if
applicable), and may be played later.
71.6 If a limited scenario is being played, all
variants not applicable to that scenario are
removed before either side draws its variants.
OPTIONAL RULES
72. OPTIONAL RULES
72.1 Some players may wish to simplify the game
and speed play by opting out of certain rules, as set
out below. These simplified rules are not
recommended, but are included primarily for the
benefit of players who are new to the game.
72.2 DIPLOMACY:
72.21 Disregard all references to Appendices I, II
and III. DPs are not allocated, and diplomacy plays
no part in the game. The following historical events
occur:
72.22 French colonies become Free French on a die
roll of 1-3; Vichy French on a die roll of 4-6. Vichy
France remains neutral for the entire game. The
120
Axis control all Vichy French hexes, including
Vichy French colonies, and may enter them without
a DoW against Vichy France. Britain may build two
Free French 1-3 infantry units in Free French
colonies, in addition to any units which turned Free
French.
72.23 In Winter 1940, Germany receives 5 BRPs from
each of Hungary, Rumania and Bulgaria. In Spring
1941, Hungary, Rumania and Bulgaria activate as
German minor allies. Finland activates as a German
minor ally in Summer 1941.
72.24 Russia may declare war on the Axis in Spring
1942 or thereafter, or prior to that date if Germany
fails to maintain a garrison of 10 ground factors on
the Eastern front. Russia may declare war on the
Baltic States, occupy eastern Poland and demand
Bessarabia and the Finnish border hexes. Otherwise
Russia remains neutral and discounts the possibility
of a German attack. Russian infantry units, on all
types of hexes, are subject to -1 DM (15.24) on the
first turn of a German invasion.
72.25 The U.S. enters the war, without the need to
pay for a DoW, in Spring 1942, with a BRP base and
BRP total of 200 and 13 ASW factors.
72.26 The U.S. grants Britain five BRPs in Summer
1941 and 10 BRPs in Fall and Winter 1941.
72.27 In Fall 1941, the U.S. may place one ASW
factor and one 9-factor fleet in the SW box. In
Winter 1941, the U.S. may place one ASW factor and
two 9-factor fleets in the SW box.
72.28 When Germany declares war on Denmark,
Danish forces are not placed on the board and all
Danish hexes are deemed to have been controlled
by Germany from the start of the German player
turn.
72.3 VARIANTS: Do not use any variants.
72.4 BRITISH SURRENDER: Britain surrenders if
London, Birmingham and Manchester are
controlled by the Axis at the end of an Allied
combat phase. If Britain surrenders:
A3R rules rewrite v.3
72.41 Canada becomes an American minor ally
worth 20 BRPs, with the following forces: one 4-5
armor and two 3-4 infantry units, two air factors
and two 9-factor fleets. Units on the board are used
to make up the Canadian forces. Unbuilt units may
be used only if no other units are available. All
other British ground and air forces are removed
from play. Half (rounded up) of the remaining
British fleet factors are immediately moved to the
U.S. box, may be used by the U.S., and may be
reconstructed if lost. All other British fleet factors,
including those which are unbuilt at the moment of
surrender, are permanently removed from play. All
British SW units become American.
72.42 All British-controlled hexes pass to German
control at the end of the Allied player turn in which
Britain surrenders, except those occupied by other
Allied units.
72.43 In each YSS after the surrender of Britain, the
major power which controls London at the end of
each year receives half (rounded down) of the
British BRP base at the time of surrender.
72.5 RUSSIAN SURRENDER: Russia surrenders if
Moscow, Leningrad, Stalingrad and Grozny are
simultaneously controlled by the Axis at the end of
an Allied combat phase. If Russia surrenders:
72.51 Russia retains control of all hexes able to
trace a supply line to Moscow or the Russian hexes
on the eastern edge of the board. All other Russian-
controlled hexes come under German control and
the units in them are eliminated.
72.52 During each Allied SR phase following Russia’s
surrender, Germany adds the current production
value of one Russian IC to its BRP total.
72.53 The Axis must leave a garrison of ground/air
factors in Russia equal to the number of Russian
ground/air factors in play. No additional Russian
unit construction is allowed. If the Axis forces in
Russia at the time of the Russian surrender do not
meet this requirement, the Axis must comply with
it during their next player turn or Russia may
121
reenter the war at no BRP cost. Garrison units may
later be withdrawn from Russia if they are replaced
by other Axis units. Russia retains control of any
hexes it controls, and takes no further part in the
game.
MULTI-PLAYER GAMES
73. THE MULTI-PLAYER GAME
73.1 Two players may play the 1940 and Barbarossa
scenarios. Up to four players may play the 1944
scenario. Up to five players may play the 1941 and
1942 scenarios. Up to six players may play the
Campaign Game and 1939 scenarios.
73.2 If a player withdraws from a multi-player
game, play continues with control of the
withdrawing player’s power(s) being assigned to
one of his allies. If, as a result of withdrawals, only
two players remain, the victory conditions for the
two-player game apply. If three or more players
play to completion, the multi-player victory
conditions are used. Under the multi-player victory
conditions a member of an alliance may emerge as
the biggest individual winner, even though his
alliance loses the war. As a result, keeping one’s
allies busy against the enemy while picking up
objectives yourself becomes quite critical. The
Western Allies may find Russia strangely reluctant
to enter the fray unless Germany threatens to win it
all, and the Italians may be equally reluctant to do
Germany’s bidding without getting something out
of it themselves.
73.3 DIPLOMATIC AGREEMENTS:
73.31 In addition to the normal diplomatic rules,
players may make any agreements they wish, with
both allies and enemies, present and future, so long
as their agreements are not contrary to the rules of
the game. Agreements may include, but are not
limited to, cooperative conquests and intervention,
neutrality, truce, BRP grants, spheres of influence,
command arrangements, basing privileges, air and
naval support and limitations on SW or other arms
construction.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
73.32 Agreements need not be kept. Players are free
to break them at any time, just as nations broke
treaty commitments before, during and after the
actual war. The only penalty for breaking an
agreement is to ensure the offended player’s
distrust for the remainder of that, and possibly
future, games.
73.33 Players may wish to agree before a game to a
time limit on diplomatic discussions, or to restrict
them to certain parts of each game turn.
are unable to agree, the BRPs are divided equally,
dropping fractions.
73.7 A player may agree to place some of his units
under the control of one of his allies. However,
except for lent Italian units (51.2), such changes of
control may not be used to enable one ally to evade
the BRP cost of offensive operations, nor can it be
used to “transfer” unused SRs from one ally to
another.

73.4 No player may move ground units to or over

hexes controlled by an ally during movement or SR
without that ally’s consent. Similarly, a player may
not base air or naval units at a base controlled by an
ally without that ally’s consent. A player who
controls a supply source may not refuse to allow an
ally to draw supply from that supply source, if
otherwise allowed to do so, or to trace supply
across hexes he controls.

73.5 Whenever two allies wish to attack the same

minor country or colony, or intervene in the same
minor country, on the same turn, a coin is flipped if
they cannot agree. The winner of the coin flip may
move one unit into, or adjacent to the forces of, the
territory in question. The loser then moves one
unit, and so on. This alternating movement
continues until one or the other does not wish to
move any more units in that vicinity. This
procedure may be used during movement, combat,
exploitation or SR, and may be adapted to other
situations where allies cannot agree on how to
proceed. Since such disagreements indicate a strain
on the alliance, units of the allies concerned may
not stack together on that front for the remainder
of that player turn, although units already stacked
may remain stacked together if they do not move.

73.6 A player may not enter a minor country

attacked by an ally without that ally’s permission.
Such permission, once given, cannot be revoked.
When two or more allies participate in a
cooperative conquest which yields BRPs, they may
divide those BRPs in any manner they desire. If they

122 A3R rules rewrite v.3


74. RUSSIAN SURRENDER RULES
74.1 WHEN RUSSIA SUES FOR PEACE: At the end of
each Russian player turn, the Russian Resistance
Table is consulted to determine whether Russia
offers to surrender. No die roll is made - if the net
result on the Russian Resistance Table is zero or
less, Russia offers to surrender. Germany has the
option of accepting the Russian surrender offer or
rejecting it in the hope of imposing more severe
terms on Russia.
74.2 [See The Russian Resistance Table]
74.3 GERMANY REJECTS A RUSSIAN SURRENDER
OFFER: If Germany rejects a Russian surrender
offer, Russia and Germany remain at war and play
continues normally. At the end of each subsequent
Russian player turn, the Russian Resistance Table is
again consulted to determine whether Russia again
offers to surrender. Once Germany rejects a Russian
surrender offer, it cannot change its mind that turn
and must await a new offer at the end of another
Russian player turn, which it can accept or reject as
it wishes.
74.4 GERMANY ACCEPTS A RUSSIAN SURRENDER
OFFER: If Germany accepts a Russian surrender
offer, Russia surrenders, with the following results:
74.41 HEX CONTROL AND FORCES: All Russian-
controlled partisans are eliminated and are not
taken into account in determining hex control.
Russia retains control of all hexes it controlled at
the moment of surrender, including objective hexes
and ICs, provided it can fully supply them by
tracing a supply line from Moscow or the east edge
of the board. ZoCs have no effect on the
determination of which hexes are supplied for the
purposes of this rule. All other Russian-controlled
hexes come under German control and the units in
them are eliminated and returned to the Russian
force pool. Control of Russian-controlled hexes
outside Russia and any Russian minor allies is
determined in the same manner. If the Axis manage
to isolate the capital of a Russian minor ally, they
conquer that minor. After this determination is
123
made, Axis-controlled hexes which cannot be fully
supplied from an Axis supply source revert to
Russian control and any Axis units in such hexes
are repatriated to the nearest supplied, Axis-
controlled hex. Russian forces which can draw
supply from Moscow or the east edge of the board
are unaffected by a Russian surrender.
74.5 POST-SURRENDER RUSSIA: After surrendering,
Russia remains in the game and continues to take
its turns normally. Russian BRP totals are calculated
each YSS. Russian ICs increase in value normally.
Russian BRPs are not added to the Allied total for
the purpose of determining the initiative and
neither Russia nor the Western Allies may build
partisans (25.25) until Russia reenters the war.
74.51 RUSSIAN BRP GRANTS TO GERMANY: During
each Russian SR phase, beginning in the turn
following a Russian surrender, Russia must grant
BRPs equal to the current production value of one
Russian IC to Germany. Russia must grant these
BRPs even if it has lost all its ICs. The amount of the
grant is not changed even if Russia's only remaining
IC has an unusually low production value (34.42).
The grant occurs even if the BRPs are not available
and a BRP deficit for the following year is thereby
created or increased. Such a deficit does not affect
the Russian BRP base. The Russian BRP spending
limit is disregarded when these BRP grants are
made.
74.52 AID FROM THE WEST: After it surrenders,
Russia may receive aid from the Western Allies. The
normal rules relating to the manner in which BRP
grants are made to Russia and the means by which
the Axis may interfere with or prevent such grants
continue to apply after Russia surrenders.
74.53 Germany may DoW Russia after it has
surrendered, even if the Russian resistance level is
still zero or less.
74.6 RUSSIAN REENTRY INTO THE WAR: Russia may
subsequently declare war on the Axis if the result
on the Russian Resistance Table at the end of the
preceding Russian player turn was greater than
A3R rules rewrite v.3
zero. The Axis may declare war on Russia at any
time after Russia has surrendered. Either DoW costs
35 BRPs and affects the USAT normally. Once a
second German-Russian war breaks out, Germany
no longer receives BRP grants from Russia (74.51).

74.7 A SECOND RUSSIAN SURRENDER: If Russia and

the Axis go to war a second time, calculations on
the Russian Resistance Table continue to be made,
and a second Russian surrender could occur. There
is no limit to the number of possible Russo-German
wars or Russian surrenders.

74.8 VICTORY DETERMINATION: Russia is not

considered to have been conquered for the purpose
of victory determination unless a Russian surrender
is in effect at the end of the scenario.

124 A3R rules rewrite v.3


75. BRITISH SURRENDER RULES
75.1 WHEN BRITAIN SUES FOR PEACE: At the end of
each game turn, the British Resistance Table is
consulted to determine whether Britain offers to
surrender and, if Germany accepts the surrender,
what role British forces will play for the remainder
of the war. No die roll is made - if the net result on
the British Resistance Table is zero or less, Britain
offers to surrender. Germany has the option of
accepting the British surrender offer or rejecting it
in the hope of imposing more severe terms on
Britain later in the game.
75.2 [See The British Resistance Table]
75.3 GERMANY REJECTS A BRITISH SURRENDER
OFFER: If Germany rejects a British surrender offer,
Britain and Germany remain at war and play
continues normally. At the end of each subsequent
game turn, the British Resistance Table is again
consulted to determine whether Britain again offers
to surrender, and on what terms. If a British
surrender offer is rejected, Germany may not later
change its mind and accept the offer it must await a
new offer at the end of another game turn, and
accept or reject the new offer as it wishes.
Starting on the turn after Germany rejects a British
surrender offer:
A. British units may be constructed in Canada.
B. Britain is considered conquered for the purposes
of 20.721. 20.724 applies to initial U.S. deployments.
75.4 GERMANY ACCEPTS A BRITISH SURRENDER
OFFER: If Germany accepts a British surrender offer,
Britain surrenders and Germany decides on the
precise terms of surrender it wishes to impose on
Britain. The following steps are taken:
1. The British surrender level is determined.
2. The British force pool is reduced in size.
3. Britain makes territorial and economic
concessions to the Axis or has territory returned to
her following negotiations.
125
75.41 BRITISH SURRENDER LEVEL: The British
surrender level is simply the net result on the
British Resistance Table. The British surrender
level, which may not be less than - 10, reflects the
concessions a defeated Britain is willing to make to
Germany. Germany may, for diplomatic reasons,
impose less severe terms on Britain if it wishes to
do so, and may even return conquered territory to
British control.
75.42 EFFECTS OF A BRITISH SURRENDER: The
British Surrender Table sets out the British force
pool levels after surrender, as well as the
concessions which Germany may compel Britain to
grant during negotiations.
75.421 [See the British Surrender Table]
75.422 UNITS: When Britain surrenders, the British
Surrender Table is consulted to see which British
forces continue the fight against the Axis. At least
one 4-5 armor and two 3-4 infantry units, two air
factors and two 9-factor fleets (representing
Canadian forces) are immediately added to the U.S.
force pool. All Free French units are also added to
the U.S. force pool. If Allied variant 11 (increased
commitments from the Dominions) is held by the
Allies, an additional 2-5 armor and 3-4 infantry unit
are added to the U.S. force pool. Other British units
join the U.S. force pool as indicated by the British
Surrender Table. The Allied player selects which
units are added to the U.S. force pool. Units which
are on the board must be selected first, and are
added to the U.S. force pool at no BRP cost. Unbuilt
units, including the Summer 1942 additions to the
British force pool, may be selected only if no other
units are available, and must be built before they
are used. Units which are on the board when Britain
surrenders are removed from play only if their
elimination is required to comply with the
reduction of the British force pool. British units
which are not added to the U.S. force pool are
permanently eliminated. Allied variant 16
(commandos) is not negated by a British surrender.
All Allied SW units remain in play. Britain retains
A3R rules rewrite v.3
its Malta submarines unless Malta is taken as a
concession.
75.423 HEX CONTROL: In Britain, each side retains
the hexes it controls, except that any hexes which
cannot be fully supplied are transferred to the
other side. ZoCs and air or naval interception have
no effect on the determination of which hexes are
supplied for the purposes of this rule. British units
on such hexes are eliminated and returned to the
British force pool; Axis units on such hexes are
repatriated to the nearest supplied, Axis-controlled
hex. In all other areas, the side which has control of
the area for BRP purposes gains control of all hexes
in the area and the other side must withdraw all its
units from that area. Once hex control is
determined, some areas may further change hands
as a result of the terms of British surrender, as
outlined below.
CLARIFICATION: Wafdist control of hexes in Egypt
(25.52) is not considered Axis control for the purposes of
this rule. Thus, even if Cairo was occupied by a partisan
when Britain surrendered, Britain would retain control
of Egypt unless Germany took it as a concession (75.431).
75.424 ECONOMICS: Britain’s BRP base at the time of
surrender is determined by taking into account
relevant BRP losses (33.3) up to the moment of
surrender, after which it remains fixed for the
remainder of the game. If the U.S. is at war with
Germany when Britain surrenders, any British BRPs
are added to the U.S. BRP total, while any non-base
deficit (33.7), including one created or increased by
territorial concessions to the Axis or any indemnity
demanded by Germany, is subtracted from the U.S.
BRP total. If the U.S. is neutral when Britain
surrenders, any British deficit reduces both the U.S.
BRP base and BRP total, but surplus British BRPs are
added only to the U.S. BRP total, not to the U.S. BRP
base. Such surplus British BRPs may be used to
rebuild British units, but otherwise expenditures
for the reconstruction of unbuilt British units prior
to U.S. entry into the war reduce both the U.S. BRP
base and BRP total. In either case, after these
adjustments are made, the U.S. receives or deducts
126
BRPs for Britain during each subsequent YSS.
Britain’s BRP value as a minor ally equals its BRP
base, minus the BRP value of any key economic
areas and colonies under Axis control. In each YSS
after a British surrender, the Axis receive BRPs for
any British colonies they control, as well as half
(rounded down) of the BRPs for London and
Manchester/Birmingham, should they be under
Axis control (40.3).
75.425 PARTISANS: After Britain surrenders, the
U.S., if at war with Germany, may build two
partisans in Axis-controlled territory in Britain.
75.4251 WAFDISTS: If Britain retains Egypt after a
surrender, all Wafdists are eliminated and no new
Wafdists may be built until the Axis are at war with
the U.S. If the Axis take Egypt as a concession,
Wafdists remain in play as anti-Axis partisans,
though no new ones may be built by any major
power.
75.43 GERMAN-BRITISH NEGOTIATIONS
75.431 TERRITORIAL DEMANDS: Germany may
obtain territorial concessions from Britain as
allowed by the British Surrender Table (75.421). The
value of each territorial concession is set out in the
British Concession Table (75.433). Germany may
select any combination of territorial and economic
concessions up to the value allowed by the British
Surrender Table. Ceded territories in the
Mediterranean front may, if Germany wishes, come
under Italian control. All British units in ceded
areas automatically move to the nearest area
remaining under British control (British player’s
choice if two areas are equidistant). Such units
must move to the nearest area even if that area
cannot be supplied, thus most likely being
eliminated later due to being isolated. Areas which
contain American units come under American
control and may not be ceded by Britain. Russian
units may not prevent the Axis from obtaining an
area and Russian units in such areas are relocated
to the nearest Russian-controlled hex outside the
ceded area. Neutralized minor countries return to
their original status.
A3R rules rewrite v.3
CLARIFICATION: The Axis taking control of a British-
controlled city with a USAT entry (such as Gibraltar,
Birmingham, etc.) triggers an increase in the USAT, just
as if the Axis had captured it normally.
75. 432 INDEMNITIES: Germany may also impose a
one-time indemnity of 10, 20 or 30 BRPs on Britain
in the same manner as it obtains territory. Britain
immediately transfers these BRPs to Germany. If
Britain does not have enough BRPs to pay the
indemnity, the deficit is paid by the U.S. If the U.S.
also lacks the BRPs, it incurs a BRP deficit.
75.433 [See the British Concession Table]
75.434 THE TERMS OF SURRENDER: The reductions
in the British force pool set out in the British
Surrender Table are automatic and are not
negotiable. The territorial and economic
concessions Britain may be compelled to make are
limited in value to the maximum set out in the
British Surrender Table. The total value of any
British territories acquired by Germany and any
indemnity imposed on Britain may not exceed the
indicated maximum for the applicable surrender
level.
75.435 GERMAN FORBEARANCE: If the U.S. is not at
war with the Axis when Britain surrenders, the Axis
may pursue a conciliatory policy with respect to
Britain and the United States by limiting their
territorial and economic demands to less than the
maximum allowed by the British Surrender Table.
In addition, territories already controlled by the
Axis may be returned to British control, although
the Axis may not exchange territories they already
control for territories controlled by Britain at the
moment of surrender. If the Axis return territory to
Britain, they may not acquire other territory and
must content themselves with economic and
political concessions. Such a policy does not affect
the size of the British force pool, which is
automatically reduced in size as set out in the
British Surrender Table. The value of the
concessions renounced by the Axis, as well as the
value of any territories returned to Britain during
negotiations, is determined by reference to the
127
British Concession Table. All future British
Resistance results and the USAT are reduced by the
value of these concessions. Britain may not refuse
the return of its conquered territories.
CLARIFICATION: In order to return southern England to
Britain, the Axis must control London. Similarly, the Axis
must control Birmingham and Manchester for Germany
to return central England to Britain. Scotland, which
does not contain a key economic area, must be
completely controlled by Germany before it can be
returned to Britain.
CLARIFICATION: The Axis may return conquered Free
French colonies.
75.436 AMERICAN UNITS IN BRITAIN: If the U.S. is
at war with Germany and has units in an
unsupplied area in Britain, they are unaffected by
the surrender process. The situation is resolved in
the same manner as hex control after a French
surrender. Hexes which contain American units
remain under Allied control, whether or not they
can be supplied by the Allies. An area which
contains an American unit, even if the only
American unit is a fleet, may not be the subject of a
territorial concession (75.431). An American airbase
is not considered a “unit” for the purposes of this
rule.
75.5 AFTER A BRITISH SURRENDER
75.51 GERMANY MAY NOT BE ABLE TO BUILD
SUBMARINES: If the USAT is less than 37, Germany
may not build any new submarines as long as the
peace with Britain lasts (42.212).
75.52 BRITAIN AS AN AMERICAN MINOR ALLY: After
surrender, Britain becomes an (inactive) American
minor ally. British units are included in American
offensive options and use American SRs. Britain
receives only its basic allotment of DPs (59.51). It
loses the ability to place airbases or bridgeheads, or
to DoW other minors. Subject to the size of the
British force pool and naval reconstruction limits,
all types of British units, including fleets, may be
constructed by the U.S., even while the U.S. is
A3R rules rewrite v.3
neutral. British units must be constructed in deterioration in Britain’s position which results in
Canada unless Britain has reentered the war. U.S. the British Resistance level dropping below the
initial deployments are used to send British units to original British surrender level prior to British
Europe. If the U.S. is neutral when Britain reentry does not trigger a second surrender.
surrenders, Britain remains neutral and may not be
attacked by the Axis until Germany and the U.S. are 75.8 VICTORY DETERMINATION: Britain is not
at war, although British units may deploy to Europe considered to have been conquered for the purpose
before the U.S. enters the war. of victory determination unless a British surrender
is in effect at the end of the scenario.
75.53 British minor allies or minor countries
associated with Britain enter into the same
relationship with the U.S. if Germany does not
neutralize them as part of its demands on Britain
(75.433).

75.6 BRITISH REENTRY INTO THE WAR: Britain may

activate and reenter the war only if the U.S. is at
war with the Axis. Once the U.S. enters the war, the
players must again consult the British Resistance
Table at the end of each game turn.

CLARIFICATION: While Britain has surrendered, British

fleets are counted as Allied in calculating the fleet ratio
only if the U.S. has entered the war.

No modifier is applied for the British BRP level

(which no longer exists separately), but units which
were removed from the British force pool at the
time of surrender are considered to be unbuilt. If
the net result on the British Resistance Table rises
above zero, Britain renounces its peace treaty with
Germany, reenters the war and is no longer
considered to have surrendered. Britain continues
as an American minor ally after it reenters the war,
although its forces may again be constructed in
Britain, Suez or Basra (19.35), London again acts as
an unlimited supply source, and British fleets may
be reconstructed in Rosyth. Britain’s reduced force
pool and economic status are unchanged by its
reentry. The recapture of British key economic
areas and colonies (even prior to reentry) benefits
the U.S. by increasing Britain’s BRP value.

75.7 A SECOND BRITISH SURRENDER: Once Britain

reenters the war, it may surrender again if the
British Resistance Table again drops to zero or less.
The surrender is resolved as described above. A

128 A3R rules rewrite v.3


76. U.S. - AXIS TENSIONS
The USAT determines when the U.S. may declare
war on the Axis, as well as the economic, strategic
and diplomatic involvement of the U.S. in the war
prior to U.S. entry. USAT recording begins in Fall
1939, with the USAT at zero. A cumulative total of
the USAT is kept. Generally, the tension level will
rise, but Axis DPs and certain events may reduce
the tension level. The USAT may become negative
during the game.
AUTOMATIC MODIFIER
This modifier is automatically implemented at the
start of each game turn, to reflect the fundamental
differences between the Tripartite powers and the
U.S.
+1 Each game turn, including Fall 1939
DIPLOMATIC MODIFIERS
Diplomatic modifiers resulting from DP allocations
may be triggered during any diplomatic phase as
desired by the allocating major power (59.8). More
than one major power may activate DPs in the same
turn. All DPs must be used by the end of the year of
allocation.
+# For each Allied DP placed in the United States
-# For each Axis DP placed in the United States
STATUS MODIFIERS
Status modifiers are implemented each game turn
that the indicated situation exists. The modifier for
the number of major powers at war with the Axis is
determined at the start of each game turn. The
remaining status modifiers are triggered if the
indicated situation exists at the start of a turn or
arises in the course of a turn.
+1 If two or more major powers are at war with the
Axis.
+2 If one major power is at war with the Axis.
+3 If no major powers are at war with the Axis.
+1 Axis ground units in Britain.
+1 Axis ground units in Russia.
129
+1 Axis control of any of Madrid, Gibraltar,
Alexandria, Suez (maximum +1 per game turn).
Control by Axis partisans does not count.
EVENT MODIFIERS
Event modifiers are implemented at the time the
indicated event occurs. Modifiers based on control
of territory are negated if the territory in question
is recaptured and apply again if the territory
changes hands a second time.
+1 For every 15 Axis BRPs spent on offensive
operations each turn. A remnant of eight or more
BRPs at the end of the Axis player turn triggers an
increase; a remnant of seven or fewer BRPs is
ignored.
+1 If the Axis perform any offensive operations
against Poland in Fall 1939.
+1 Axis DoW against a minor neutral.
+2 Axis DoW against a major power.
+2 Axis capture of Paris, London, or Moscow (each).
+1 Axis capture of Birmingham, Manchester,
Gibraltar, Malta, Suez, Alexandria, Baghdad,
Leningrad or Stalingrad (each). Capture by Axis
partisans does not count.
+1 Axis control of any hex in Palestine,
Transjordan, Iraq, Lebanon-Syria, Persia or Turkey
(only a maximum of +1 for any such hex).
+1 Germany declares unlimited submarine warfare
(42.411).
+1 If Britain loses 20 BRPs to SW (sum all Axis
raider, submarine, bombing and rocket attacks) in
the current game turn, with an additional +1 for
every additional ten British BRPs eliminated.
Losses incurred by Murmansk convoys (37) do not
count.
-2 Western Allied DoW against a neutral NOT
controlled by the Axis.
-2 Russian DoW against the Axis.
-1 Russian DoW against a minor neutral.
-1 Russian subversion attempt (Allied variant 9),
whether successful or not.
-1 Russian occupation of eastern Poland.
-1 For every 10 BRPs Germany loses to Western
Allied bombing attacks in the current game turn,
A3R rules rewrite v.3
with an additional -1 for every additional ten
German BRPs eliminated
FAR EAST EVENT MODIFIERS
The effects of Japanese actions are implemented at
the end of the relevant game turn (Japan moves
after both the Axis and Allies). The Japanese occupy
French Indochina in Summer 1941.
rate at which tensions with the Axis rise - thus a
rapid rise in tensions triggers more timely
preparations than a slow rise in tensions. No BRPs
are spent for the construction of such forces. Force
pool additions after U.S. entry into the war are
staggered as indicated. “DoW +” means that the
units are available for construction that many turns
after the U.S. goes to war with the Axis.

-3 Negotiations between Japan and the West reduce ASW FORCES: The U.S. may deploy one ASW factor
tensions in Asia.* at no BRP cost and deploy one 9-factor fleet to the
+2 Japan occupies French Indochina. SW box. In the next turn's SW deployment phase,
+2 Japanese DoW against Russia.* the U.S. may deploy another ASW factor and
+4 Japanese attack on British and Dutch possessions another 9-factor fleet. In the turn after that, the
in Asia.* U.S. may deploy another ASW factor and divert
another 9-factor fleet (42.412). This continues until
* Negotiations between Japan and the West, as well the next YSS, when the U.S. may start purchasing
as Japanese actions against Russia or the British and both ASW and SAC factors (42.211). In addition the
Dutch possessions in Asia may occur only as a result U.S. may deploy all available ASW factors and fleets
of a diplomatic die roll for Japan. to the SW box. U.S. fleets on ASW duty prior to U.S.
entry may not intercept German raiders.
RESULTS
Results are implemented as indicated. Results may BRP GRANTS PRIOR TO U.S. ENTRY
not be negated by a subsequent drop in the USAT.
BRP grants to Britain or France are allowed as
7 U.S. may allocate one DP in the next YSS (59.24). indicated by the tension level. BRP grants to Russia
25 Limited aid to Allies endorsed by Congress. U.S. are not allowed until the U.S. has entered the war.
may grant five BRPs each turn to Britain or France.
25 U.S. may allocate two DPs in the next YSS
(59.24).
32 Lend lease approved. U.S. may grant 10 BRPs
each turn to Britain or France.
34 U.S. may allocate three DPs in the next YSS
(59.24).
37 U.S. may immediately deploy ASW forces.
40 Lend lease expanded. U.S. may grant 20 BRPs
each turn to Britain or France.
45 U.S. may receive and allocate DPs normally in
the next YSS.
50+ U.S. may declare war against the Axis.

U.S. FORCES
The forces available when the U.S. declares war on
the Axis are fixed, regardless of when such a
declaration of war occurs. This is because the state
of American preparedness for war depends on the

130 A3R rules rewrite v.3